DCS 500 Thyristor Power Converter

for DC Drive Systems

25 to 5150 A

Software Description
DCS 500B

7RUTXHUHIHUHQFH
$&VXSSO\
7RUTXH
UHIHUHQFH &XUUHQWDFWXDO
6SHHGUHIHUHQFH DGG6SHHG VHOHFWRU IRUPLQJ
YLDSDQHOEXV UHIHUHQFH
6SHHG /RF5HP
UHIHUQFH &XUUHQW&RQWURO )LULQJXQLW
$OSKDUHI

Constant
sources 5DPS 6SHHG &XUUHQWOLPLWDWLRQ
JHQHUDWRU FRQWUROOHU
Up
(0)
FDOF

Down 0
6SHHG$FWXDO TG
6FDOLQJ
'&02725
 DC Drives 25 to 5150 A
SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION
for version 21.233

Code: 3ADW 000 078 R0301 Rev C

SWDB_E_C.DOC

EFFECTIVE: Aug. 1st, 2001

SUPERSEDES: Rev B Dec. 2nd, 1998

2001 ABB Automation Products GmbH. All rights reserved.

 Contents

• General ................................................................................................................................. 1
Software Overview.......................................................................................................... 2
Parameter Sets .......................................................................................................... 2
Saving the program.................................................................................................... 2
Identification of the Converter Software version ......................................................... 3
Identification of the Field Exciter Software version ..................................................... 3
Function Blocks .............................................................................................................. 4
Digital and Analog I/O..................................................................................................... 5
Digital Inputs .............................................................................................................. 5
Digital Outputs ........................................................................................................... 5
Analog Inputs ............................................................................................................. 6
Analog Outputs .......................................................................................................... 9
• Settings and commissioning functions................................................................................. 11
SETTINGS function block ............................................................................................. 11
MANUAL TUNING function block ................................................................................. 12
Autotuning................................................................................................................ 13
• Drive Logic .......................................................................................................................... 16
DRIVE LOGIC function block........................................................................................ 16
Closing Control of the Contactors............................................................................. 16
Opening Control of the Contactors ........................................................................... 17
Run Control.............................................................................................................. 17
Stop Control ............................................................................................................. 18
Reset the drive fault ................................................................................................. 20
Change between parameter set1 and set2 ................................................................... 21
Local/Remote ............................................................................................................... 21
• Speed feedback and speed reference handling .................................................................. 23
Speed scaling to software ........................................................................................ 23
SPEED_MEASURMENT function block........................................................................ 23
Selection of the speed actual measurement............................................................. 24
Incremental encoder ................................................................................................ 24
Analogue Tacho Generator ...................................................................................... 24
Polarity ..................................................................................................................... 24
Scaling of the actual voltage to control..................................................................... 25
Application example ................................................................................................. 25
Actual speed based on EMF .................................................................................... 25
Calculation of speed from the EMF .......................................................................... 25
Filtering of the actual speed ..................................................................................... 25
CONST_REF function block ......................................................................................... 26
SOFTPOT function block .............................................................................................. 26
Reference increment and decrement ....................................................................... 26
Limitation.................................................................................................................. 26
REF_SEL function block ............................................................................................... 26
Changing of the speed direction of rotation .............................................................. 27
RAMP GENERATOR function block ............................................................................. 27
Local / Remote Speed Reference ............................................................................ 27
Holding of the reference ........................................................................................... 27
Ramp Function in Emergency Stop.......................................................................... 27
Selecting of the Ramp function ................................................................................ 28

DCS 500 Software Description i

Contents

Limitation of the reference.........................................................................................28

Passing of the RAMP function...................................................................................28
Output follows the speed actual ................................................................................28
Reset the output........................................................................................................28
Acceleration compensation .......................................................................................28
• Speed Control ......................................................................................................................30
REFSUM_2 function block.............................................................................................30
SPEED_ERROR function block .....................................................................................30
Speed Step for testing...............................................................................................30
Error value filter.........................................................................................................30
Window Control Principle ..........................................................................................31
Application example for Window Control ...................................................................31
Enabling the Window Control ....................................................................................31
Determining the Window Size ...................................................................................31
Output connection points ..........................................................................................31
SPEED_CONTROL function block ................................................................................32
Gain and Integral time settings..................................................................................32
The P-gain reduction.................................................................................................32
Output Limitation.......................................................................................................32
Integral part Setting during the Control Mode Changing............................................33
Principle of Drooping................................................................................................33
Drooping Adjustment.................................................................................................33
SPEED_MONITOR function block .................................................................................33
Speed Actual Comparators .......................................................................................34
Overspeed limit .........................................................................................................34
Speed Measurement Fault ........................................................................................34
Stall Protection..........................................................................................................34
• Torque Reference ................................................................................................................37
TORQ_REF_SELECTION function block ......................................................................37
Torque Reference Scaling.........................................................................................37
Load sharing in Master / Follower Application ...........................................................37
Output Limitation.......................................................................................................37
TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION function block ........................................................37
Current Limitations ....................................................................................................37
Torque Limits ............................................................................................................38
Speed Dependant Current Limitation ........................................................................38
Gear Backlash Compensation...................................................................................39
• Current Control ....................................................................................................................42
TORQ_REF_HANDLING function block ........................................................................42
Torque Reference Selection......................................................................................42
Torque Step ..............................................................................................................43
Output Limitation and its Indication ...........................................................................43
CURRENT_CONTROL function block ...........................................................................43
Torque / Current Reference Selection.......................................................................43
Current Response Test .............................................................................................43
Regulation Blocking ..................................................................................................43
Armature Current Scaling..........................................................................................43
Current Reference Rise Time....................................................................................43
Current Reference Limitation ....................................................................................43

ii DCS 500 Software Description

 Contents

Current Difference Alarm.......................................................................................... 43

PI- Regulation .......................................................................................................... 44
Scaling of the gain KP .............................................................................................. 44
Scaling of the Time Constant KI ............................................................................... 44
Discontinuous Current Point..................................................................................... 44
Tuning of Current Regulator..................................................................................... 45
Firing Angle Limitation.............................................................................................. 45
Additional Commutation Reserve DXN..................................................................... 45
Example ................................................................................................................... 45
Network reactance ................................................................................................... 46
Short Circuit Current ................................................................................................ 46
400 A load................................................................................................................ 46
600 A load................................................................................................................ 46
DXN ......................................................................................................................... 46
Firing angle example ................................................................................................ 47
Note. ........................................................................................................................ 47
Status Indication for Bridge ...................................................................................... 47
• Field Excitation.................................................................................................................... 49
Selection of the Field Exciter .................................................................................... 50
Field Exciter Status .................................................................................................. 50
No Field Acknowledge Selected............................................................................... 50
Internal Diode Field Exciter SDCS-FEX-1..................................................................... 50
Internal Field Exciter SDCS-FEX-2 ............................................................................... 51
Acknowledge............................................................................................................ 51
External Field Exciter DCF503-0050............................................................................. 51
External Field Exciter DCF504-0050............................................................................. 51
AI/DI Connected Field Exciters ..................................................................................... 51
Acknowledge Selection ............................................................................................ 51
Use of the Analog Input Channel.............................................................................. 52
Calculation Example................................................................................................. 52
Two Field Exciters at the same time ............................................................................. 52
Field Current Settings .............................................................................................. 52
Free Wheeling Function ........................................................................................... 53
Trigger Point Setting of the Free Feeling Function ................................................... 53
Filter for Actual Field Current ................................................................................... 53
Field Current Controller ................................................................................................ 54
Field Reversal............................................................................................................... 54
Activating ................................................................................................................. 55
Field direction change hysteresis ............................................................................. 55
Force field direction.................................................................................................. 55
Field monitoring when changing direction ................................................................ 55
Opti-Torque .................................................................................................................. 56
Selection of OPTI-TORQUE..................................................................................... 57
Field current reduction using torque reference ......................................................... 57
Field monitoring when OPTI-TORQUE changes the field direction .......................... 58
Field current / FLUX linearisation ............................................................................. 58
Saturation................................................................................................................. 59
Linearisation procedure............................................................................................ 59
Field reduction when at stand-still ............................................................................ 59

DCS 500 Software Description iii

Contents

Field heating when in "OFF"-state.............................................................................60

EMF_CONTROL function block.....................................................................................60
The Purpose of EMF Controller.................................................................................60
Selection of EMF-control...........................................................................................61
Resistive and inductive voltage drop .........................................................................61
Field weakening area ................................................................................................61
FLUX reference handling ..........................................................................................62
Flux Reference in Emergency Stop...........................................................................62
EMF reference handling............................................................................................62
PI - controller.............................................................................................................62
EMF-error value filter ................................................................................................63
PI -gain value scaling ................................................................................................63
PI - controller output limitation...................................................................................63
• Protections ...........................................................................................................................65
CONVERTER_PROTECTION function block ................................................................65
Network voltage measurement..................................................................................65
400 V supply .............................................................................................................65
Network undervoltage ...............................................................................................65
Network overvoltage .................................................................................................65
Overcurrent ...............................................................................................................65
Over -temperature.....................................................................................................66
Earth Fault ................................................................................................................66
MOTOR_1_PROTECTION function block .....................................................................67
MOTOR_2_PROTECTION function block .....................................................................67
Measured Motor Temperature...................................................................................67
Measurement selection .............................................................................................67
Alarm and tripping limits............................................................................................68
Motor Protection by means of the switch...................................................................69
Motor thermal model......................................................................................................69
Preloading.................................................................................................................71
Thermal model selection ...........................................................................................71
Alarm and tripping limits............................................................................................71
Thermal time constant...............................................................................................72
• Brake Control .......................................................................................................................76
Safety........................................................................................................................76
BRAKE_CONTROL function block ................................................................................76
Holding Torque .........................................................................................................76
Brake Release ..........................................................................................................76
Minimum Speed Indication ........................................................................................76
Brake Acknowledge ..................................................................................................76
Start Delay ................................................................................................................77
Stop Delay ................................................................................................................77
Function ....................................................................................................................77
TREF OUT ................................................................................................................79
TREF ENABLE..........................................................................................................79
DECEL CMND ..........................................................................................................79
LIFT BRAKE .............................................................................................................79
BRAKE RUN .............................................................................................................79
• Extended inputs / outputs.....................................................................................................81

iv DCS 500 Software Description

 Contents

• Serial link via FIELDBUS..................................................................................................... 83

• 12 pulse configuration ......................................................................................................... 85
• Data Logger ........................................................................................................................ 87
DATA LOGGER function block ..................................................................................... 87
• User Event .......................................................................................................................... 90
• Diagnostics ......................................................................................................................... 92
FAULT HANDLING function block ................................................................................ 92
Fault and Alarm signals............................................................................................ 92
Fault Word bits......................................................................................................... 92
Alarm Word bits ....................................................................................................... 92
Fault Logger ................................................................................................................. 92
CONSTANTS function block......................................................................................... 93
Logical constants ..................................................................................................... 93
Numerical constants................................................................................................. 93
FREE_SIGNALS function block .................................................................................... 93
Appendix A Pin and Parameter list.................................................................................................. A1

DCS 500 Software Description v

 Functional Software Description

• General The DC drive named DCS 500B is equipped with a SDCS-CON-2

microprocessor board. The original version was called DCS 500
and was equipped with a SDCS-CON-1 board.

The DCS 500B has a MODBUS communication bus connection,

which is a common bus protocol for ABB Drives products for the
panel link.

The DCS 500B drive can be controlled by means of digital and

analog inputs or via the CDP 312 Control Panel.

The DCS 500B software contains the function blocks of a standard

application program and function blocks which can be connected
to each other to form more advanced application programs. A
standard program is designed so that it contains numerous func-
tions, is flexible and suitable for most of the basic drive applica-
tions.
Typical application areas for DCS 500B are:
• Winder control
• Master Follower
• Positioning Control
• Ski Lifts
• Battery Charging
• Cranes

7RUTXHUHIHUHQFH
$&VXSSO\
7RUTXH
UHIHUHQFH &XUUHQWDFWXDO
6SHHGUHIHUHQFH DGG6SHHG VHOHFWRU IRUPLQJ
YLDSDQHOEXV UHIHUHQFH
6SHHG /RF5HP
UHIHUQFH &XUUHQW&RQWURO )LULQJXQLW
$OSKDUHI

Constant
sources 5DPS 6SHHG &XUUHQWOLPLWDWLRQ
JHQHUDWRU FRQWUROOHU
Up
(0)
FDOF

Down 0
6SHHG$FWXDO TG
6FDOLQJ
'&02725

Figure 1 DCS 500B armature control

DCS 500 Software Description 1

Functional Software description

Software Overview
Parameter Sets Two parameter sets are available for two different applications in a
drive.
Example: A digital input can be used to select 1 of 2 parameter
sets. Parameter set 1 is for motor set 1 and parameter set 2 is for
motor set 2. A digital output is used to control external hardware
which selects the actual motor 1 or motor 2 connection.

AC supply

DCS 500 Converter

SOFTWARE
Drive Logic
RDY ON

RDY RUNNING MOTOR ACT

10913
[MOTOR2]

913

I/O board
DI DO

Application 2
selected
Application selection
0 = Appl. 1
1 = Appl. 2

M2 M1 M2 M1
M M M M
Field M1

Field M1
(Field M2)

(Field M2)

PARAMETER PARAMETER
SET 1 for SET 2 for
APPLICATION 1 APPLICATION 2

Figure 2 Two different applications in one drive

Saving the pro- The converter program is stored in a FPROM memory circuit
gram (D33).The parameters for the converter and the field exciter are
stored in one FPROM memory circuit (D35). The circuits are in-
stalled on the control board SCDS-CON-2.

2 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Parameter values will be saved by means of the parameter

BACKUP STORE MODE (11202). When the action is finished af-
ter writing or reading of parameters the mode is changed to 0
[NONE].

BACKUPSTORE MODE:
0 = [NONE] no backup
1 = [SAVE MOT1 SET] save motor set 1 to FPROM memory.
2 = [SAVE MOT2 SET] save motor set 2 to FPROM memory.
3 = [FACTORY SET VALUE] default values are restored to the RAM
memory
4 = [SELECT MOT1 SET] read motor set 1 from the FPROM memory
5 = [SELECT MOT2 SET] read motor set 2 from the FPROM memory

Identification of The version of the software can be identified in two ways:

the Converter - software version is printed on the label which is located on the
Software version memory circuits D33.
- the signal CNT SW VERSION (11218) indicates the converter
program version.

VERSION
(226 = 1. version SDCS-CON-2)
(227 = 2. version)
DCS500

DC21.226

Figure 3 Identification labels of memory circuit D33

Identification of If a field exciter module SDCS-FEX-2 or DCF 503/4 (SDCS-

the Field Exciter FEX-3x) is used the version of the field exciter software can be
Software version identified in two ways:
- software version is printed on a label on the micro controller of
the field supply unit SDCS-FEX-2 or DCF 503/4
- the signal FEXC1 SW VERSION (11220) indicates the con-
verter program version.
when two field exciter units are installed in the drive, the pro-
gram version of the second unit can be read from signal FEXC2
SW VERSION (11221).
All the parameters of two-phase field exciter units are stored in the
FPROM memory circuit (D35) of the converter.

DCS 500 Software Description 3

Functional Software description

Function Blocks DCS 500B control program is made completely by function blocks.
The program can be modified with the control panel CDP312 or a
PC-based tool program CMT/DCS500B. Every function block, used
in the control program, has a structure similar to the one shown in
figure 4. Additional function blocks exist in every converter. They
can be used in the same way as the ones, shown in this document.
For more information, please see the APPLICATION BLOCKS
manual.

If additional function blocks are used, the converter should be la-

beled with a sticker indicating the type of application by any code or
plain text.

SP=Standard Program
SP
Function block output
Name of the Function Block SOFTPOT number
1918 11904
Function block input [INCR] OUT Function block output
(pin number; group 19 1919 11905
[DECR] ACT
parameter 18) 1920
[FOLLOW] Function block output name
1921 Signal name
Function block P1 5000 OHL
parameter 1922
P2 -5000 OLL Parameter name
Parameter value T20 Execution interval as ms
(display in "integer")

Figure 4 Structure of a Standard Program Function Block

All function block inputs characterized by a 3 or 4 digit number with

no Px box (Px box displays values either in integer, relative or
physical; see below) on the left hand side can be connected to a
function block output. Inputs can only be connected to each other
via a function block output (see next figure). Connections will be
made by selecting the input and using the number of the output as
a “parameter” value. Connecting more than one output to one input
is not allowed!
All the values shown within the Px boxes within this document are
given in Integer (micro processor) values. The scaling is according
to the PARAMETER LIST. Using the CMT/DCS500 PC tool, the
display can be altered between Integer, Relative (e.g. 78%) and
Physical (1432 rpm). The CDP 312 panel will always show physical
numbers.

4 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

XXXX
INPUT
XXXX

OUTPUT
SP SP
DI1 INPUT SOFT_POT
10701 1918 11904
O1 [INCR] OUT
10702 1919 11905
O2 [DECR] ACTIVE
1920
[FOLLOW]
T20 1921
P1 5000 OHL
1922
P2 -5000 OLL
T20

Figure 5 Function block connection.

Digital and Analog The analog and digital inputs and outputs are connected to the
I/O function blocks of the standard program to build up the drive appli-
cation.

Digital Inputs Standard I/O has eight digital inputs (DI1...DI8) which are con-
nected via SDCS-IOB-2x or directly to the Control Board SDCS-
CON-2.
I/O extension board SDCS-IOE-1 contains seven isolated digital
inputs (DI9...DI15).

SP Output signal SP
DI4 10707
DI9 10717
O1 O1
10708 10718
O2 O2
SDCS-IOE-1
T20 T20
Inverted Output signal
Execution time interval (ms)

Figure 6 Digital Input Function Blocks

Digital Outputs There are eight digital outputs and the connections are made to the
SDCS-CON-2 or SDCS-IOB-2x boards.

SP
Digital output name DO5
809
Input Signal (value = 0 controls the output to state 1) [IN] >1
810
Inverted Input Signal (value 0 controls the output to state 1) [INV_IN]
T20

Figure 7 Digital Output Function Block

DCS 500 Software Description 5

Functional Software description

Analog Inputs SP
Function Block name AI2 10707
OUT+ Output value
10708
OUT- Negated output value
10709
ERR Error code

P1
107 Selection of the Input signal type
1 CONV MODE
108 Value that corresponds to maximum
P2 20000 HIGH VALUE
109 input (+10V or +20mA)
P3 -20000 LOW VALUE
Value that corresponds to
ST5 minimum input (-10V or -20mA)

Figure 8 Analog Input Function Block

Maximum number of analog inputs is seven. The first five chan-

nels, AITAC, AI1, AI2, AI3 and AI4, are available with the SDCS-
CON-2 or SDCS-IOB-3 boards. The last two channels, AI5 and
AI6, are connected by means of the SDCS-IOE-1 extension I/O
board.

Analog inputs are scaled with parameters:

HIGH VALUE (1XX) = value in OUT+ (XXXXX) that corresponds to
maximum input value (normally +10V or +20 mA).
and
LOW VALUE (1XX) = value in OUT+ (XXXXX) that corresponds to
minimum input value (normally -10V or +20 mA).
If offset balancing is needed, the value of the HIGH and LOW
VALUE has to be increased or decreased slightly.

Note. The temperature measurements are scaled internally in AI2

and AI3 (Ω or °C). The parameters HIGH VALUE and LOW VALUE
have no significance in that case.

Signal Type Selection for In- The input signal type is defined by parameter CONV MODE (1XX).
puts The following table shows all possible values for analog input sig-
nals in the DCS500B software.

Analog Input AIx CONV MODE-parameter selection Terminal boards & settings:

AITAC 1 = -10...+10V IOB-3: ----

-20...+20mA IOB-3: S1:1-2 connected
2 = 4...20mA, unipolar IOB-3: S1:1-2 connected
3 = Tacho generator voltage CON-2: 3:1-4: 90-270V
- 10V...+10V X3:2-4: 30-90V
X3:3-4: 0-30V

AI1 1 = -10...+10V CON-2; IOB-3: ----

-20...+20mA CON-2: 500Ω connected X3:5-6
IOB-3: S1:3-4 connected
2 = 4...20mA, unipolar CON-2: 500Ω connected X3:5-6
IOB-3: S1:3-4 connected

6 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Analog Input AIx CONV MODE-parameter selection Terminal boards & settings:

AI2 1 = -10...+10V CON-2; IOB-3: ----

-20...+20mA CON-2: 500Ω connected X3:7-8
IOB-3: S1:5-6 connected
2 = 4...20mA, unipolar CON-2: 500Ω connected X3:7-8
IOB-3: S1:5-6 connected
3 = Motor temperature measurement IOB-3: S5:3-4 (5 mA), gain=10
1 x PT100; output scale: °C
4 = 2 x PT100; output scale: °C IOB-3: S5:3-4 (5 mA), gain =1

5 = 3 x PT100; output scale: °C IOB-3: S5:3-4 (5 mA), gain =1

6 = PTC; output scale: ohm (Ω) IOB-3: S5:1-2 (1.5 mA), gain =1
7 = PTC; output scale: ohm (Ω) CON-2: S1:23-24 (+10V source)

AI3 1 = -10...+10V CON-2; IOB-3: ----

-20...+20mA CON-2: 500Ω connected X3:9-10
IOB-3: S1:7-8 connected
2 = 4...20mA, unipolar CON-2: 500Ω connected X3:9-10
IOB-3: S1:7-8 connected
3 = Motor temperature measurement IOB-3: S5:3-4 (5 mA), gain=10
1 x PT100; output scale: °C
4 = 2 x PT100; output scale: °C IOB-3: S5:3-4 (5 mA), gain =1
5 = 3 x PT100; output scale: °C IOB-3: S5:3-4 (5 mA), gain =1
6 = PTC; output scale: ohm (Ω) IOB-3: S5:1-2 (1.5 mA), gain =1

AI4 1 = -10...+10V CON-2: ----

IOB-3: S1:11-12 not connected
S1:13-14 not connected
-20...+20mA CON-2: 500Ω connected X4:1-2
IOB-3: S1: 9-10 connected
S1:11-12 not connected
S1:13-14 not connected
2 = 4...20mA, unipolar CON-2: 500Ω connected X4:1-2
IOB-3: S1: 9-10 connected
S1:11-12 not connected
S1:13-14 not connected
3 = Earth fault current measurement IOB-3: S1:11-12 connected
Output scale: A 13-14 connected
9-10 not connected
Connection terminals: X3:11-12

AI5 on 1 = -10...+10V no action

-20...+20mA S1:3-4 connected
SDCS-IOE-1 2 = 4...20mA, unipolar S1:3-4 connected

AI6 on 1 = -10...+10V no action

-20...+20mA S2:3-4 connected
SDCS-IOE-1 2 = 4...20mA, unipolar S2:3-4 connected

DCS 500 Software Description 7

Functional Software description

Analog Input Error Codes Analog input error codes can be seen from the ERR pin, if the
hardware and software scalings are not compatible. Error codes
are shown below.

Error Text Description

Code
0 NO FAULT No faults or CONV MODE = 0
1 I < 4 mA CONV MODE = 2 and I < 4 mA
2 NO IOB-1/IOB-3 No IOB-1 or IOB-3 board connected
3 WRONG IOB:
AITAC Only IOB-2 board connected,
CONV MODE = 1 or 2 and IOB-3 is not connected
CONV MODE = 3 and IOB-1 is not connected
AI1 Only IOB-2 board connected
AI2 Only IOB-2 board connected
CONV MODE = 3,4,5,6 and IOB-3 is not connected
CONV MODE = 7 and IOB-1 is not connected
AI3 Only IOB-2 board connected
CONV MODE = 3,4,5,6 and IOB-3 is not connected
AI4 Only IOB-2 board connected
CONV MODE = 3 and IOB-1 is not connected
4 LOW VAL.>HIGH VAL. Low value > high value
5 NO IOE 1 Extension board not connected

EXAMPLE: A speed reference 0 ... +/- 8V is connected to analog input AI1:

Rescaling, if reference is - 0V = corresponds to zero speed
different to +/- 10V - +/- 8V corresponds to max speed
The speed loop at the control program is scaled to 20000 equal to
top speed. The value in rpm, the program uses is specified at pa-
rameter SPEED_SCALING (2103).

Parameters have to be set:

CONV MODE (104) = 1 (voltage signal)

HIGH VALUE (105) = 25000 (see below)
LOW VALUE (106) = -25000 (see below)
If the reference is +4V, the speed reference value at output of the
AI1 block (10104) is 10000.

general:
109
310 [ = • 20000
max .UHIHUHQFH

- don´t forget the sign!

- reference values higher than 10V can not be rescaled by the
converter; the rescaling has to be done outside the converter
- references below 6,25V cannot be rescaled, because of the
high limit of the scaling parameters

8 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Analog Outputs There are three analog output channels. Connections are made to
either SDCS-CON-2 or SDCS-IOB-3 boards. The first two outputs
(AO1 and AO2) are programmable, and the range of the outputs is
+10V...-10V. The third output is an armature current actual measu-
rement from the HW-circuit. For more detailed information, see
TECHNICAL DATA.

SP
201 AO1
Input signal [IN]

Maximum output voltage (V) P1 10000

202 NOMINAL V
203 OFFSET V
Minimum output voltage (V) P2 0

P3 204 NOMINAL VAL

Maximum value 20000

ST5

Figure 9 Analog Output Function Block

Example:
If the signal SPEED ACT (12102) is used in the analog output1,
the settings are:

AO1 [IN] (201) = 12102

AO1 NOMINAL V (202) = 10
AO1 OFFSET V (203) = 0
AO1 NOMINAL VAL (204) = 20 000
With these settings the actual speed value 20000 corresponds to
+10V output voltage.

[IN]
Uout = NOMINAL V + OFFSET V
NOMINAL VAL

DCS 500 Software Description 9

10
SP -1 SETTGS_3 SP -100 MANTUN_3
SETTINGS MAINTENANCE
(11208) TEST RELEASE
Conv. settings C4 Conv. values
517 RELEASE OF ARM.
10510 &
P1 0 SET I COMV A I TRIP A LOCAL {3} (10906) LOCAL CONTROLLING
4
518 1201 I1=I2
10509
P2 0 SET U CONV V I CONV A P1 0 DRIVEMODE

519 10511
P3 0 SET MAX BR TEMP U CONV V

520 (11209) TEST REF SEL

10512
P4 0 SET CONV TYPE MAX BR TEMP
0 0 4 ARM. CONTROLLER
521 10513
P5 0 SET QUADR TYPE CONV TYPE 1204
P2 1000 POT1 VALUE 1 7 FIRST FIELD EXCITER
10514
QUADR TYPE 1205
P3 0 POT2 VALUE 2 8 SECOND FIELD EXCITER
10507
BRIDGE TEMP 1206
P4 100 PERIOD t 3 9 SPEED LOOP
BTW.POT1/2
Motor Data
501 4 10 EMF CONTROLLER
P7 500 U MOTN V (11207) TEST REF
11206
502 SQUARE WAVE
P8 10 I MOTN A
1202
Functional Software description

503 P5 250 CMT DCS500 ADDR

P9 30 I MOT1 FIELDN A 11204
11201 COMMIS STAT TC STATUS
504 1203
P6 1 DRIVE ID 11205
P10 30 I MOT2 FIELDN A 11202 BACKUPSTOREMODE BC BC {3,4,13}
1207
505 P7 358 WRITE ENABLE KEY 11222 PROGRAM LOAD
P11 0 FEXC SEL
1208 11216
P8 358 WRITE ENABLE PIN 11218 CNT SW VERSION CMT COM ERRORS
Supply Data 10504
U NET ACT U_NET_ACT {14}
507 1209 11217
11219 CNT BOOT SW VER CDI300 BAD CHAR
P13 500 U SUPPLY P9 0 SELECT OPER.SYST
10508
U NET DC NOM V
506 1213
P14 2 PHASE SEQ CW 10515 P10 1 FIELDBUS NODE ADDR 11203
FEXC STATUS
LINE FREQUENCY
11210
Control Adjust. 11220 FEXC1 SW VERSION FEXC1 CODE
1210
523 10501 SP_ACT_FILT {4} ACTUAL VALUE 1 11211
FEXC1 COM STATUS
P12 0 CURR ACT FILT TC CONV CUR ACT CONV_CUR_ACT {14}
1211 FEXC1 COM ERRORS 11212
524 CONV_CUR_ACT {14} ACTUAL VALUE 2 CDP312
10502
P16 4 PLL CONTROL ARM CUR ACT
1212 11213
528 U_ARM_ACT {14} ACTUAL VALUE 3 11221 FEXC2 SW VERSION FEXC2 CODE
10503
P17 1024 PLL DEV LIM TORQUE ACT
FEXC2 COM STATUS 11214

UDC + 1214 11215

526 10505 FEXC2 COM ERRORS
U ARM ACT U_ARM_ACT {14} P11 0 MACRO SELECT
P18 0 OFFSET UDC -

CALC 10506
Iact EMF ACT
513 T5
P6 10 EMF FILT TC
SP -105 DCFMOD
525
P19 10 UNI FILT TC DCF FIELDMODE
(only for Cur. Controlling)

522
P15 0 LANGUAGE
1215
P1 0 DCF MODE : 0 : Disabled
ST20 1 : DCF Current Control
2 : Stand Alone
3 : Reserved
4 : Fexlink Node 1
5 : Fexlink Node 2
6 : MG Set

SP -80
AO2 1 2 4 5 6 Cur.Controller for high inductive load
205 407
IN ... x8 ARM_CURR_PI_KP

206 408
... x8 ARM_CURR_PI_KI
P1 5000 AO2 NOMINAL V

0 409 ARM_CONT_CUR_LIM
207
P2 0 AO2 OFFSET V
3601
15 REV_DELAY
208
P3 4095 AO2 NOMINAL VALUE
3602
15 REV_GAP
ST5 3603
15 FREV_DELAY

2 4 5 6 Input for external Overvoltg.Protection

1216
DI2 {3} DI/OVP BC
0 A121
1 F 21
1217
P2 0 OVP SELECT

4 as FEX 1 (Receiver)
5 as FEX 2 (Receiver) 10916
RUN DCF

10917
from ext. FEXLINK RESET DCF

11303
REF DCF

6 Fexlink as Transmitter
for FEX1 and FEX2

DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

• Settings and commis-

sioning functions
SETTINGS function This block serves for scaling all important signals. It is subdivided
block into 5 parts.
The parameters 517 to 521 are only needed, if a C4 type converter
is used. For more details, please see OPERATING INSTRUCTION.

In special cases, the calculated EMF needs to be smoothed. Para-

meter EMF_FILT_TC (513) serves for this reason.

The converter can display parameters and internal signals in physi-

cal values. To be able to do so, some basic values have to be sca-
led:
U_MOTN_V (501) nominal motor voltage
I_MOTN_A (502) nominal motor current
I_MOT1_FIELDN_A (503) nominal field current for field supply
unit 1
I_MOT2_FIELDN_A (504) nominal field current for field supply
unit 2, if there is one
FEX_SEL (505) selection of field supply unit

There are several signals, which can be used for indication. The
signal armature voltage is already connected to the analog output 2.
The scaling of these signals is different.
U_ARM_ACT (10505) actual DC output voltage
scaling: 100% = 4095 equal 1.35 * P507 in volt
TORQUE_ACT (10503) calculated actual torque, based on
armature current and flux signal
scaling: 100% = 4000 equal nominal motor torque, if P502 is set
to nominal motor current and P503/504 is set to nomi-
nal motor field current
CONV_CUR_ACT (10501) actual DC output current
scaling: 100% = 4095 equal nominal converter current in A
ARM_CUR_ACT (10502) actual DC output current
scaling: 100% = 4095 equal nominal motor current in A, if P502
is set to nominal motor current
CURR_ACT_FILT_TC (523) serves for smoothing of current ac-
tual signals 10501 and 10502

In a similar way, some basic scalings have to be done for the motor,
they have to be done for the network too.
PHASE_SEQ_CW (506) phase rotation
U_SUPPLY (507) nominal line voltage

DCS 500 Software Description 11

Functional Software description

The language, in which you want to read your information on the

panel, can be selected by
LANGUAGE (522) selection of language at CDP 312

For more details, refer to the special chapter or the OPERATING

INSTRUCTION.

MANUAL TUNING The controllers of the DCS 500B drive can be tuned manually or
function block automatically. There is an automatic tunig function for the armature
and field current controller. The speed loop, the armature current,
the EMF and field current controller can be manually tuned. Both
tuning methods are initalized by a parameter.

Selection of the tuning The manual tuning can be done if LOCAL-mode is selected with the
panel or by external digital I/O.

The selection is made by means of parameter:

DRIVEMODE (1201)
4 = armature current controller
7 = first field exciter
8 = second field exciter
9 = speed loop (reference chain and speed controller)
10 = EMF controller

Selection replaces normal references to the controllers or the speed

loop with the manual tuning reference. E.g. in a case of the speed
loop the LOCAL SPEED REF is replaced with manual tuning refe-
rence.
Source of the manual tuning reference can be selected from four
different sources:
POT1 VALUE (1204) range: -32 768...32 767
POT2 VALUE (1205) range: -32 768...32 767
SQUAREWAVE (11206)
generator whose levels are set with POT1 and POT2 VALUE
and time interval with PERIOD btw.POT1/2 (1206)
TEST REF (11207) range: 0...65 535
The selection is made by the signal TEST REF SEL (11209).

0 = [ZERO] reference is zero

1 = [POT1] POT1 VALUE (1204)
2 = [POT2] POT2 VALUE (1205)
3 = [SQRW] SQUAREWAVE (11206)
4 = [TEST] TEST REF (11207)

During the manual tuning measurements can be made e.g. with

CMT/DCS500 tool or analog outputs.

12 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

To set the level of the POT1/2 and the TEST REF has to be in the
normal reference range of destination.

Autotuning
see OPERATING INSTRUCTION

When a DRIVEMODE function was used status codes are indicated

by the signal COMMIS STAT (11201):

0 = NOT ACTIVATED
selected function successfully worked out

Messages, which may come up, if a SDCS-CON1 is used:

1 = RUN COMMAND ? See code 53
2 = FEXC SEL ? Wrong FEX selection
3 = FEXC RDY OPER FEX1 / 2 or DCF 503/4 not ready for
operation
4 = FEXC OK=0 Field supply not o.k.; see error messa-
ge on the display of the con-
verter
5 = FIELD ON=0 FEX1 / 2 or DCF 503/4 not switched
on
6 = IF NOT IN 95-105% Field current not within 95% ..... 105%
7 = NOT OK AFTER 20s Drive was not released by hardware
within 20s
8...48 = reserved

DCS 500 Software Description 13

Functional Software description

Messages, which may come up, if a SDCS-CON2 and DRIVE

_MODE = 3 [ARM. AUTOTUNING] autotuning of armature cur-
rent controller is used:

49 = IF AT START ? Field current does not reach reference

within 10s, when the selftuning is
started
50 = OHMIC LOAD Ohmic load not determined
51 = IACT FEEDBACK Current feedback is less than current
reference during measurement of ar-
mature resistance. Current limits are
lower than the limit for continous cur-
rent flow or lower than 20%.
52 = CURRENT CURVE Bad current curve. Fuse
blown,thyristor not firing or no motor
load.
53 = RUN COMMAND ? Wrong starting conditions. The drive is
running when the autotuning is started
or run command is not given within 20
s after start of autotuning.
54 = TOO HIGH SPEED Too high speed during autotuning
.Speed greater than 1% or EMF grea-
ter than 15%.
55 = INDUCTANCE Inductance cannot be determined. Fu-
se blown, thyristor not firing or no
motor load.
56 = CONT CURR LIM Limit for continous current flow cannot
be determined.
57 = FIELD REMOVAL The field removal takes longer time
than 10 s.
58 = STOP COMMAND Current regulator blocking or stop
command appears during autotuning.

Messages, which may come up, if a SDCS-CON2 and DRIVE

_MODE = 5 [FEX2/3 AUTOTUN] autotuning of field current
controller with FEX2 or DCF 503/4 is used:

60 = CANNOT AUTOTUNE The field current controller cannot be

set by this function
61 = ILL START COND Illegal start condition for field autotu-
ning

14 DCS 500 Software Description

 X6 of SDCS-CON-2 X7 of SDCS-CON-2

SP -63
DI7
ON/OFF 10713 SP -46
O1
DO4
X6:7 10714 807 RDY RUNNING
O2 IN

ST5 808 X7:4

INV IN
SP -36 DRLOGI_2
DRIVE LOGIC T20
SP -62 901 10901
ON/OFF RDY ON
DI8
RUN 10715 902 10902 SP -45
O1 RUN1 RDY RUNNING
DO5
X6:8 10716 903 10903 809 RUNNING
O2 RUN_MREF {4,10} RUN_CONST_REF {4} RUN2 1 RUNNING IN

904 10904 810 X7:5

ST5 RUN3 FAULT RUNNING {4} INV IN
{4,6,7}
905 10905
COAST STOP ALARM T20
SP -65
906 10907
DI5 EME STOP EMESTOP ACT
EM STOP O1
10709
LOCAL
10906
LOCAL LOCAL {2}

DCS 500 Software Description

X6:5 O2
10710
MIN_SPEED {9} (12201) MIN SPEED SP -49
DO1
ST20 BC {2} (11205) BC (BLOCK.)
801 FAN CONT
IN
907
RESET 802
INV IN X7:1
SP -64 908
START INHIBIT
DI6 T20
RESET 10711 909
O1 DISABLE LOCAL

X6:6 10712 910 10908 SP -48

O2 ACK CONV FAN FAN ON FANS_ON {8}
DO2
ST20 911 FIELD ON 10909 803 EXC CONT
ACK MOTOR FAN IN

912 MAIN CONT ON 10910 804 X7:2

ACK MAIN CONT INV IN
SP -69
DI1 913 10913
MOTOR2 MOTOR ACT T20
CONV FAN O1
10701
914 10911
P1 0 FIELD HEAT SEL TRIP DC BREAKER
X6:1 10702 SP -47
O2 915
DYN BRAKE ON
10912 DO3
P2 1 MAIN CONT MODE
ST20 805 MAIN CONT
916 IN
P3 0 STOP MODE
806 X7:3
917 INV IN
SP -68 P4 0 EME STOP MODE
DI2 918 T20
MOTOR FAN 10703 P5 0 PANEL DISC MODE
O1 DI2 {2}
919 10914
X6:2 10704 P6 0 PWR LOSS MODE AUTO-RECLOSING SP -42
O2
DO8 MAIN CONT
920 815
ST20 P7 0 COMFAULT MODE IN
COMM FAULT
10915
X96:1-2
921 816
P8 2 COMFLT. TIMEOUT INV IN Relay output
SP -67
SDCS-POW-1
DI3 T20 T20
MAIN CONT O1
10705

X6:3 O2
10706

ST20
Must be connected, when no fan acknowledges (DI1, DI2)

SP -66 SP -44
DI4 DO6
FREE 10707 811 FREE
O1 IN

X6:4 10708 812 X7:6

O2 INV IN

ST20 T20

SP -43
DO7
813 FREE
IN

814 X7:7
INV IN

T20
Functional Software description

15
Functional Software description

• Drive Logic The purpose of the Drive Logic is to control the main, excitation
and fan contactors, start and stop the drive and protect the drive in
fault situation. The Drive Logic contains the outputs which indicate
the state of the drive.

DRIVE LOGIC functi- The explanation given within the next paragraphs is based on the
on block default structure of the converter. In this case, the configuration is
identical to speed control with speed controller and current con-
troller. This logic has been changed compared to earlier software
versions. In this version the signals ON/OFF and RUN1/2/3 are
edge sensitive. When the electronics of the drive is switched on,
the binary inputs must have 0 status. Otherwise, the drive will not
start, until the first 0 to 1 transition is received by the input.

Closing Control If the output RDY ON (10901) = 1 (no FAULT), then the outputs for
of the Contactors handling the main, field and fan contactor(s) of the drive can be
closed by giving the logical 1 command (edge sensitive; 0 to 1
transition!) to the input [ON/OFF] (901). Parameter
MAIN_CONT_MODE (915) defines the main contactor control
mode:
0 = closed when both [ON/OFF] (901) and
( [RUN1] (902) or [RUN2] (903) or [RUN3] (904) ) inputs
are in state 1
1 = close when [ON/OFF] (901) is in logical state 1

The following sequence will take place when [ON/OFF] (901)

changes from 0 to 1:

Main Contactor
NO FAULT closing command
MAIN CONT ON
=1
RDY ON (10901)
=1
FAULT 41:
Main Contactor
[ON/OFF] (901) acknowledge No main contactor
No acknowledge
0 --> 1 =1

Yes
FAN ON (10908)
0 --> 1
FAULT 38:
Net work
FAULT 50: phase sequence Phase sequence
ok? No fault
[ACK CONV FAN] No converter fan
= 1? No acknowledge
Yes

Yes
FAULT 31:
FAULT 40:
Synchronization
Not in synchronism
[ACK MOTOR FAN] ok? No
No external fan
= 1? No acknowledge
Yes
Yes
Excitation contactor FAULT 29:
closing command Mains undervoltage
FIELD ON = 1 Supply voltage
or
ok? No FAULT 30:
Mains overvoltage
FAULT 39: Yes
Field acknowledge No field Output
during 6 sec. No acknowledge RDY RUNNING
ok? (10902) = 1
Yes

READY FOR RUN

Figure 11 RDY RUNNING sequence.

16 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Opening Control If the signal [ON/OFF] (901) changes from 1 to 0 (edge sensitive),
of the Contactors the drive will block the controllers immediatelly and start a delay
time. Because of the regulator blocking the armature and field cur-
rent will be forced to zero. When the delay time has elapsed the
outputs for handling the contactors will be set to 0; the contactors
should drop off.
This input has the second highest priority. The sequence described
before will be worked out independant from the drive condition
(with / without speed; with / without armature current).

In case of tripping, the fan, field and main contactors are opened in
a certain order which depends on the type of the fault. Fault acti-
vates the output FAULT (10904) to logical state 1.

If a motor or converter overtemperature fault is detected, the out-

puts for handling the cooling fans are kept high until the measured
temperature has decreased below the alarm level.
The drive will accept a reset-command, when the temperature has
decreased below the fault level. In this case the outputs for the fan
contactors will be reset.

There are 3 different types of faults:

- Faults which trip the main contactor:
- Faults which trip main contactor and field contactor
- Faults which trip main contactor, field contactor and fans

for more detailed information, please see

manual OPERATING INSTRUCTION

The input START_INHIBIT] (908) has the highest priority. If this

input is set to 1, the outputs for the handling of the contactors can
never be forced to level 1, if the drive is at standstill. If the drive is
running and the input is set to 1, the drive will act in the same way
as if [ON/OFF] (901) is set to 0. Afterwards the drive cannot be
switched on as long as START_INHIBIT (908) has logic 1 level.

When dynamic braking is used (output DYN BRAKE ON (10912)),

an external resistor is connected in parallel with the armature
module. If the drive trips, the field of the motor must be maintained,
otherwise the resistor cannot produce fast deceleration.

Run Control When RDY RUNNING (10901) = 1, the drive can be started by
setting either input [RUN1] (901), [RUN2] (902) or [RUN3] (903) to
state 1. The drive releases the references and controllers and sets
the RUNNING (10903) signal to logical state 1. Another way to
start the drive is by Control Panel CDP312 in local mode using the
start button.

DCS 500 Software Description 17

Functional Software description

Stop Control The drive can be stopped in the following ways:

- By opening the Main Contactor:

Controlling [ON/OFF] (901) input to zero state. All contactors
will open and there is no electrical braking. The drive will stop
by coasting (see opening control of the contactors).
This stop mode cannot interrupt Emergency Stop, Stop be-
cause of panel or field bus link problems.

- RUN-command to zero
If all RUN inputs [RUN1] (902), [RUN2] (903) or [RUN3] (904)
are set to zero , the drive will stop.
This stop mode can be interrupted by Emergency Stop, Stop
because of panel or field bus link problems.

Parameter STOP MODE (916) defines how the stop is made:

0 = stop by ramp (DECEL1 (1709) or DECEL2 (1712) ) at
RAMP GENERATOR function block
1 = stop by torque limit (TORQ_MAX / TORQ_MIN)
2 = stop by coasting (torque is zero)

If the drive is stopped and should be restarted, the actual con-

dition of the drive has to be taken into consideration:
- if STARTSEL (1717) = 0 (start from zero):
a. and the actual speed is below MIN_SPEED_L (2201)
the drive accepts the 0 to 1 transition of the RUN com-
mand and will accelerate according to the reference
without handling the ON/OFF signal
b. and the actual speed is above MIN_SPEED_L (2201)
the 0 to 1 transition is ignored as long as the speed is
above this level; if this cannot be accepted because of
any reason (e.g. stop by coasting) both inputs must
have logic 0 level; afterwards, ON/OFF and RUN
should be set to 1 (edge sensitive); the drive will force
the motor to zero speed by the torque limit at first and
afterwards, the drive will accelerate according to the
reference; this behaviour is independant from the se-
lected stop mode
remark: if EMF is selected as a speed feedback signal,
it may happen, that the drive reacts according to a, be-
cause the MIN_SPEED_L is too smal

18 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

- if STARTSEL (1717) = 1 (flying start):

the RUN command is no longer edge sensitive; the drive
will accelerate according to the reference, when the RUN
command is set to 1, independant, if the actual speed was
zero or different to zero before; if the drive was stopped by
the ON/OFF command (the RUN command was kept to
logic 1 level), it will react when ON/OFF changes from 0 to
1 in the same way, as if the RUN command would have
been used

- Coast Stop
When [COAST STOP] (905) input is set to logical state 1,
regulators are blocked and contactors remain closed. The drive
is allowed to decelerate freely towards zero speed. As long as
the drive stops in this way, the stop functions available with the
RUN command are disabled and vice versa.
This stop mode can be interrupted by Emergency Stop, Stop
because of panel or field bus link problems.

- Emergency Stop
If [EME STOP] (906) signal is set from 1 to 0, the emergency
stop function is activated. The reaction of the drive can be de-
fined by paramter EME STOP MODE (917) :
0 = stop by ramp (EMSTOP_RAMP (1714) ) at
RAMP GENERATOR function block
1 = stop by torque limit
2 = coast stop (torque is zero)
3 = dynamic brake
The state of the output signal EMESTOP ACT (10907) changes
0 -> 1. The drive will come up with an ALARM, which must be
reset and which will open all contactors at zero speed (with
coasting immediatelly).
For resetting the fault, see OPERATING INSTRUCTION
This stop mode can interrupt the Stop because of panel or field
bus link problems.

DCS 500 Software Description 19

Functional Software description

- Stop because of problems with the panel link (communication

between drive and control panel CDP 312)
if the serial link between the drive and the control panel is inter-
rupted by any reason (panel removed from the drive, cable
broken, etc) the reaction of the drive can be specified by
paramter PANEL_DISC_MODE (918):
0 = stop by ramp (DECEL1 (1709) or DECEL2 (1712) )
at RAMP GENERATOR function block
1 = stop by torque limit (TORQ_MAX / TORQ_MIN)
2 = stop by coasting (torque is zero)
3 = stop by dynamic brake
4 = continue remote
The drive will come up with a FAULT, which must be reset and
which will open all contactors at zero speed (with coasting im-
mediatelly).

- Stop because of problems with the field bus serial link

(communication between drive and progr. logic controller)
if something is wrong with the field bus serial link (between
PLC and serial link adapter module or between adapter module
and drive) the reaction of the drive can be specified by pa-
rameter COMFAULT_MODE (920):
0 = stop by ramp (DECEL1 (1709) or DECEL2 (1712) )
at RAMP GENERATOR function block
1 = stop by torque limit (TORQ_MAX / TORQ_MIN)
2 = stop by coasting (torque is zero)
3 = no action
The drive will FAULT and must be reset and will open all con-
tactors at zero speed (with coasting immediatelly).

Reset the drive The drive can be reset using the input [RESET] (907) or in local
fault control mode by means of the control panel CDP312 by pressing
the RESET-button. The drive recognises the rising edge of the sig-
nal. To be able to restart the drive after trip, there has to be a rising
edge in signal ON/OFF-input . The technique prevents the RESET-
input signal from self-commanding the contactors "ON".

20 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

The point where the main contactor and

field exciter are tripped (TRIP2)
Motor temperature tripping limit The point where fans are switched off
Motor temperature alarm limit
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE

STATUS
RDY ON RDY ON

RDY RUNNING RDY RUNNING

RUNNING RUNNING

ALARM ALARM

FAULT FAULT
ON
COMMANDS
Close the contactors of main supply,fans and field exciter
ON
RUN RUN

RESET RESET
This RESET-command has not effect
because ALARM is still active.

Figure 12 Example of the behaviour of the program in

case of motor overtemperature fault

Change between pa- The DCS 500B software can be discussed from different point of
rameter set1 and views, depending what is wanted. Within chapter 1 the features are
set2 listed by their functionallity. If this functionallity needs to be used at
probably two different applications, it is more useful to have a look
to the internal structure of the software.

The drive control program is subdivided into 3 blocks:

- parameter set 1 for parameter groups 1 to 24
- parameter set 2 for parameter groups 1 to 24
- application set for parameter groups 25

Local/Remote The Drive can be controlled either in Remote state by means of the
digital inputs or in Local state by the CDP312 control panel or the
CMT/DCS500 Commissioning and Maintenance Tool. LOCAL
(10906) output is in logical state 1, if LOCAL-mode is selected.

DCS 500 Software Description 21

22
SP -11
SPEED MEASUREMENT

INCREMENTAL ENCODER CH A TACHO PULSES 12104

M
X5 SDCS-CON-2
CH B PULSE
0
2103 TACHO
P1 15000 SPEED SCALING
1
2101
P2 2048 TACHOPULS NR 2
SP -84 SPEED ACT
12102 SPEED_ACT {5,14}
TACHO AITAC 3
T
AITAC:OUT+ 10101 (10101) AITAC:OUT+ 4
X3:4-1..3
Functional Software description

SDCS-CON-2 AITAC:OUT-
10102
{2} (10505)
EMF
U ARM ACT
TO 5
AITAC:ERR
10103
{2} (501)
SPEED
U MOTN V
CALC
101
P1 0 AITAC CONV MODE

102
P2 30000 AITAC HIGH VALUE 2102
P3 5 SPEED MEAS MODE
103
P3 -30000 AITAC LOW VALUE 2104
P4 0 SPEED ACT FTR
SPEED ACT FILT
12103
ST5 SP_ACT_FILT {2}
2105
P5 500 SPEED ACT FLT FTR T

SPEED ACT EMF

12101

T5

SP -20
SP -90 RAMP_3
REF SEL SP -18
SPEED REF AI1 RAMP GENERATOR
10104 1910 1720
AI1:OUT+ IN1 SPEED SET
X3:6-5 SPEED REFERENCE
11801
SDCS-CON-2 10105 1911 11903 1701
AI1:OUT- SEL1 OUT IN

10106 1912 SIGN 11703

AI1:ERR IN2 (11803) LOC REF

104 1913
P1 1 AI1 CONV MODE SEL2 (10906) LOCAL
0
105 1914 1702 11701
P2 20000 AI1 HIGH VALUE IN3 RES IN OUT RAMP_OUT {5}
0 S
106 1915 1717 0
P3 -20000 AI1 LOW VALUE SEL3 P10 0 STARTSEL

ST5 1916 1703

ADD HOLD H

1917 1707
REV T1/T2
RUN_MREF {3,10} 1714
ST5
P1 200 EMESTOP RAMP E-

1708
P2 200 ACCEL1
SP -77 T+
1711
CONST REF P3 100 ACCEL2
1901 1709
ACT1
P4 200 DECEL1
1902 11902 T-
ACT2 ACT RUN_CONST_REF {3} 1712
P5 100 DECEL2
1
1903 1710
ACT3
P6 0 SMOOTH1
1904 1713
ACT4
P7 0 SMOOTH2

1715
1906 P8 20000 SPEEDMAX
P2 1500 REF1
11901 1716 {5}
OUT SPEED-
1907 P9 -20000 SPEEDMIN
P3 0 REF2 MIN/MAX
1704
1908 FOLLOW IN
P4 0 REF3
1705
1909 FOLL ACT
P5 0 REF4
1706
1905 RES OUT
P1 1000 DEF
RUNNING {3} (10903) RUNNING
ST5
SET ALL RAMP VALUES TO ZERO
BC {2} (11205) BC
SP -15 SOFTPOT1

SOFTPOT 1718
P11 0 ACC COMP.MODE
1918 OUT 11904
INCR (OUT) ACCELCOMP 11702
1719 ACC_COMP {7}
P12 0 ACC COMP.TRMIN
1919 ACT 11905
DECR
ST5
1920
FOLLOW

RUNNING {3}
1923
ENABLE

1921
P1 5000 OHL

1922
P2 -5000 OLL

DCS 500 Software Description

(10903) RUNNING

T20
 Functional Software description

• Speed feedback and The speed feedback signals can be taken from three different
speed reference hand- sources:
ling • by means of analog tacho generator
• by means of a pulse encoder
• from the EMF signal, calculated by the converter by means of
the converter´s output voltage

The speed reference for speed control can be given in several

ways:
• by means of analog input
• from a constant reference source
• reference up/down counter
• application program
• CDP312 panel or CMT/DCS500 Tool

Speed scaling to The speed values (ref./act.) are scaled so that 20000 units in soft-
software ware equals to the drive's maximum speed which is set in pa-
rameter SPEED SCALING (2103) in 0.1 rpm accuracy. For exam-
ple, maximum speed is 1000 rpm. SPEED SCALING would be set
to 10000. When speed reference is 10000, the motor runs at 500
rpm. The maximum value of the speed reference is -30000 or
+30000 depending on which direction of rotation is used.

SPEED_MEASURME The speed of the motor can be measured in three different ways:
NT function block by an incremental encoder, by an analogue tacho generator or by a
calculated/measured EMF-voltage. Speed measurement with the
pulse encoder has four different modes. The difference between
these modes is in the accuracy of the measurement, which de-
pends on the type of pulse encoder.
The analogue tacho generator is connected to the analogue input
channel AITAC. The input voltage range is -10V...+10V and accu-
racy of A/D-conversion is 13 bits. If higher than 10V tacho genera-
tor is used, the scaling of incoming voltage can be done on I/O-
board SDCS-IOB-1 and in case of I/O-board SDCS-IOB-3 with ex-
ternal circuits (PS5311). The software of the DCS 500B includes
scaling parameters for adjusting the analogue speed feedback.

DCS 500 Software Description 23

Functional Software description

Selection of the Speed measurement mode is selected by means of parameter

speed actual
measurement SPEED MEAS MODE (2102).

0 = [ENCODER A+,B dir]

ch A pos edges for speed; ch B: direction
1 = [ENCODER A+-]
ch A: pos. and neg. edges for speed
2 = [ENCODER A+-,B dir]
ch A pos and neg.edges for speed; ch B: direction
3 = [ENCODER A+-,B+-]
ch A and B and pos. and neg. edges for speed and direction
4 = [ANALOG TACHO]
AITAC is used
5 = [EMF SPEED ACT]
speed actual is calculated from the EMF motor;
this is the default setting

Incremental en- If an incremental encoder is used, the number of pulses per revolu-
coder tion has to be set in the parameter TACHOPULS NR (2101), the
default setting is 2048. It is possible to monitor the received number
of tacho pulses by means of the signal TACHO PULSES (12104),
when SPEED MEAS MODE (2102) is set to value 0...3 or 5.

Analogue Tacho The analogue tacho generator output voltage must be scaled with
Generator HW circuit so that at maximum drive speed the measured value is
below 10V. This provides a reserve between maximum speed and
limitation of analogue input and gives a possibility to use overspeed
protection. SDCS-CON-2 I/O-board contains the scaling circuit but
with SDCS-IOB-3 I/O-board external circuit must be used (PS5311
tacho generator adaption board). After the A/D-conversion an inter-
nal value +-4095 corresponds to +-10V. To scale this value to the
range of the speed reference 0...20000, there are scaling parame-
ters in AITAC function block:

AITAC CONV MODE (101) = 1 with SDCS-IOB-3 I/O-board

= 3 with SDCS-IOB-1 I/O-board
AITAC HIGH VALUE (102)
min. -32768...max. 32767
AITAC LOW VALUE (103)
min. -32768...max. 32767

Polarity The polarity of the analogue tacho generator voltage must be posi-
tive with positive speed references and negative with negative
speed references.
Note. If the polarity is false, the drive trips to SPEED MEAS.
FAULT.

24 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Scaling of the The function of the analogue tacho generator can be checked by
actual voltage to driving the motor at actual speed which is based on the calculated
control EMF. At the mean time the drive’s actual speed is measured by a
manual tachometer and incoming feedback of the analogue tacho
generator can be checked from the output OUT+ (10101) of AITAC
function block.

Application ex- Example. Let’s suppose that speed reference value 20000 corre-
ample sponds to 1500 rpm of motor. First a value 15 000 is set to pa-
rameter SPEED SCALING (2103). The tacho generator gives +8V
at actual speed 1500 rpm forward and -8V at 1500 rpm reverse.
The actual speed of the motor has to be 1500 rpm with speed ref-
erence 20000, so the AITAC scaling is made as follows for:
AITAC CONV MODE (101) = 3
AITAC HIGH VALUE (102) = (10V/8V)*20 000=25 000
AITAC LOW VALUE (103) =(10V/-8V)*20 000= -25 000

Actual speed ba- The EMF (Electromotive Force) speed actual is based on the rela-
sed on EMF tionship of flux, EMF and actual speed. This method can be used
up to the field weakening point. The parameter U MOTN V (501)
defines the armature voltage of the motor, which corresponds to
the speed value 20000 in the software.
The armature autotuning function calculates the ARM R (411) and
ARM L(410) parameter values. See paragraph "Autotuning" in this
chapter.

Calculation of 8GF − ( 5 $ * , $ + / $ * G, $ / GW )
speed from the
Q=
)/8;
EMF
The resistive voltage drop ARM R (411) is calculated:

I CONV A (10509 )
ARM R = 22444 * RA Ω *
U SUPPLY ( 507)
where RA [Ω] = armature resistance

The inductive voltage drop ARM L(410) is calculated:

LA mH * I CONV A (10509 ) * 245

ARM L =
U SUPPLY ( 507) * scantime

where LA [mH] = armature inductance in mH

scan time = 3,33 ms (50 Hz network) or 2,77 ms (60 Hz)

Filtering of the Filter time constant for signal SPEED ACT (12102) can be adjusted
actual speed by parameter SPEED ACT FTR (2104). The output of the second
filter SPEED ACT FILT (12103) can be used as display.

DCS 500 Software Description 25

Functional Software description

CONST_REF func- Only one of the five constant reference sources can be selected at
tion block a time by means of inputs [ACT1] (1901), [ACT2] (1902), [ACT3]
(1903) or [ACT4] (1904). The Logic diagram is shown above. If
ACT1...ACT4 inputs are all in zero state, the reference value is set
to parameter DEF (1905). Otherwise the reference value is one of
REF1...REF4.
For example, if constant reference REF3 (1908) is used, input
[ACT3] (1903) has to be set to logical state 1 and inputs [ACT1]
and [ACT2] must be set to zero by the application. Normally, if in-
put pin is not connected at all, its state is zero. Block output OUT
(11901) value is set equal to parameter REF3 (1908).

SOFTPOT function The speed reference generated by the SOFTPOT (software po-
block tentiometer) acts as an up/down counter. The function is shown in
the following figure.

OHL = ouput high limit

Speed
reference

t
[INCR] = 1 [DECR] = 1
OLL = output low limit

Figure 13 SOFTPOT up/down function block

Reference in- The input [INCR] (1918) activates incrementing of speed refer-
crement and dec- ence. The speed reference acceleration time is defined with pa-
rement rameter ACCEL 1 (1708) in RAMP GENERATOR function block.
The input [DECR] (1919) activates decrementing of speed refer-
ence. The speed reference deceleration time is defined with pa-
rameter DECEL 1 (1709) in RAMP GENERATOR function block.
Limitation The maximum and minimum limits for speed reference are set with
parameters OHL (1921) and OLL (1922).
If input [FOLLOW] (1920) is in logical state 1, the output of the
block OUT (11904) follows actual speed of motor (SPEED ACT)
signal.
The logical output ACT (11905) is in state 1 when either [INCR]
(1918) or [DECR] (1919) input is in state 1.
REF_SEL function The speed references from different sources are collected to this
block function block.

26 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

The inputs [SEL1] (1911), [SEL2] (1913), [SEL3] and (1915) con-
trol which of the reference signals ([IN1]...[IN3]) is connected to the
SUM block inside the REF SEL function block. Only one of the sig-
nals IN1, IN2 or IN3 can be connected to the SUM block at a time.
[ADD] (1916) is always connected to the SUM-block.
Changing of the Input [REV] (1917) controls the output selection of the SUM-block.
speed direction If this input is set to logical state 1, the speed reference at the OUT
of rotation (10202) is negated. This can be used to change the rotation of di-
rection on a 4Q-drive.
RAMP GENERATOR The main function of the RAMP GENERATOR function block is to
function block accelerate and decelerate the motor’s speed with selected time
constants to the value of [IN] (1701).
IN (1701)
20000

0 OUTPUT OF THE RAMP

SMOOTH ACTION

SMOOTH DECEL
1&2
ACCEL 1 & 2 SMOOTH
1&2 1&2

Figure 14 Function of the Ramp Generation function block

Local / Remote There are two switches in front of the ramp block. The first switch
Speed Reference is the LOCAL/REMOTE selector. When LOCAL control is selected
from, for example, the CDP312 control panel, the speed reference
comes from the panel link. In REMOTE control the reference
comes from the input pin [IN] (1701).

The second switch sets the reference to zero at the input of the
ramp by means of [RES IN] (1702) input pin.

Holding of the If the [HOLD] (1703) input is in logical state 1, the output of the
reference ramp is holding the old value.

Ramp Function in If emergency stop function is activated by drive logic EME STOP
Emergency Stop MODE (907) = 1, then the deceleration time is read from the pa-
rameter EMESTOP RAMP (1714).

DCS 500 Software Description 27

Functional Software description

Selecting of the It is possible to define two different acceleration, deceleration and

Ramp function smoothing time constants. A typical application for this feature is
two DC-motors connected to one drive and each motor is operated
separately. The application program in the drive may also select
different ramp times in different control situations.
Selection can be done by input pin [T1/T2] (1707). If input [T1/T2]
(1707) is in logical state 0, then the values of the parameters
ACCEL 1 (1708), DECEL 1 (1709) and SMOOTH 1 (1710) define
the ramp function as seen in figure above.
If input [T1/T2] is in logical state 1 then the values of the parame-
ters ACCEL 2 (1711), DECEL 2 (1712) and SMOOTH 1 (1713)
define the ramp function.

Limitation of the Parameter SPEEDMAX (1715) defines the maximum reference

reference value and SPEEDMIN (1716) the minimum value after the RAMP
block.

Passing of the The ramp function can be bypassed by setting the input [FOLLOW
RAMP function IN] (1704) to logical state 1.

Output follows The output OUT (11701) can be made to follow the speed actual
the speed actual by setting the input [FOLL ACT] (1705) to logical state 1.

Reset the output The output OUT (11701) can be set to zero by setting the input
[RES OUT] (1706) to logical state 1.

Acceleration The output ACCEL COMP (11702) is giving the additional torque
compensation reference which is needed to compensate inertia of load. The ac-
celeration compensation mode is selected by parameter ACC
COMP.MODE (1718). The time in which the drive will accelerate
from zero speed to max. speed using motor nominal torque is set
to parameter ACC COMP.TRMIN (1719)

28 DCS 500 Software Description

 SP -17
REFSUM_2
1801
IN1
OUT
11802
1802
IN2
TORQUE_REF {6,7}
SPEED-
{4}
MIN/MAX
SP -13
SPEED ERROR
ST5
2001
IN

2021 12001
SPEED_ACT {4,14} SPEED ACT OUT
SP -14
2005
P1 0 FRS SPEED CONTROL
2006
2003 IN
WIN MODE OUT OF WIN
12002
OUT
12004
2004 KP
P2 0 WIN SIZE STEP RESP
12003
DROOPING 12005
IN LIM
2002

DCS 500 Software Description

SPEED_STEP {16} STEP
2008
BAL SET1
ST5
2009
BALREF VAL1

TORQ/SPEED {7}
2010
BAL2 SET2

2011
BAL_REF {7} BAL2REF VAL2

2012
HOLD HOLD

2007
RINT CLEAR

SPC_TORQ_MAX1 {6} (12301) SPC TORQMAX1

SPC_TORQ_MIN1 {6} (12302) SPC TORQMIN1

(10903) RUNNING
SET OUT TO ZERO
(11205) BC

2014
P1 500 KP
SP -81 2015
AO1 P2 0 KPSMIN
201
IN 2016
P3 0 KPSPOINT
RAMP_OUT {4} 202
P1 10000 AO1 NOMINAL V 2017
P4 500 KPSWEAKFILT
203 2018
P2 0 AO1 OFFSET V
P5 5000 KI
204 Torque ref
P3 20000 AO1 NOMINAL VALUE 2013
P6 0 DROOPING

ST5 2019
P7 0 TD

2020
P8 50 TF

SP -12 SPMONI_2
ST5
SPEED MONITOR
(12102) SPEED ACT

2201 12201
P1 50 MIN SPEED L MIN SPEED MIN_SPEED {10}

2202 12202 MIN_SPEED {3}

P2 5000 SPEED L1 SPEED GT L1

2203 12203
P3 10000 SPEED L2 SPEED GT L2

2204 12204
P4 23000 OVERSPEEDLIMIT OVERSPEED

2205
P5 0 STALL.SEL

2206
P6 50 STALL.SPEED

2207
P7 3000 STALL.TORQUE

2208
P8 10 STALL.TIME

2209
P9 200 MON.MEAS LEV

2210
P10 50 MON.EMF V

ST20
Functional Software description

29
Functional Software description

• Speed Control The function of the speed control is to adjust the torque reference
for the torque control so that the speed actual will be equal to the
speed reference.

REFSUM_2 function The last function block of the speed reference chain is REF SUM.
block The block adds [IN1] + [IN2] = OUT. The output OUT (11701) of
the ramp generator is connected to input [IN1] (1801) and possible
additional reference to [IN2] (1802).
SPEED_ERROR func- The main task of the SPEED ERROR function block is to calculate
tion block the difference between the speed reference in input [IN] (2001) and
speed actual SPEED ACT (12102).

Speed Step for Input [STEP] (2002) can be used, for example, during the commis-
testing sioning to make step response tests in order to find out the correct
PI-values for the speed control. [STEP RESP] (12003) output can
be used to monitor the speed response during the commissioning.

[STEP]

STEP RESP

Figure 15 Response for a speed step

Error value filter The error between the speed reference and actual values can be
filtered by means of parameter FRS (2005).
Too much filtering should not be used, because it slows down the
control and easily causes transient overshoots in the response. It is
reasonable to find out the cause for disturbances, for example,
varying load, mechanics, settings of controllers, installation of a
pulse encoder, etc.

30 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Window Control
Principle TORQ REF
+
SPC OUTPUT

SPEED ACT WIN SIZE (2004)

SPC OUTPUT

TIME

SPEED ERROR > WIN SIZE / 2

SPEED ERROR < WIN SIZE / 2
SPEED ERROR = 0

Figure 16 Window control function

The idea of Window control is to deactivate the speed control as

long as the speed deviation remains within the set window. This
allows the external torque reference to affect the process directly.

Application ex- In master/follower drives, where the follower section is torque con-
ample for Win- trolled, the window control is used to keep the speed deviation of
dow Control the section under control. The speed error output to the speed
controller is zero when speed error is less than WINSIZE/2.

If the load of the follower disappears because of a disturbance in

the process, the speed error will be outside the window. The speed
controller works and its output OUT (12004) is added to the torque
reference [TREF SPC] (2407).
Speed control brings the speed difference back to the window. This
function could be called overspeed or underspeed protection in the
torque control mode.

Enabling the The window control is activated by setting the input [WIN MODE]
Window Control (2003) to logical state 1.
The parameter TREF SEL (2406) in the TORQ REF HANDLING
function block must be set to value 5 when window control is used.

Determining the The size of window determined by parameter WIN SIZE (2004),
Window Size scaling is the same as for the speed reference. See the previous
figure "Window control function".

Output connec- Output OUT(12001) is normally connected to [IN] (2006) input in

tion points the SPEED CONTROL function block.

DCS 500 Software Description 31

Functional Software description

The output OUT OF WIN (12002) is activated to logical state 1, if

the value of speed error is outside the window area (defined in pa-
rameter WIN SIZE (2004).

SPEED_CONTROL
function block
Gain and Integral The speed error is formed in the SPEED ERROR function block,
time settings and it is connected to input IN (2006). The proportional gain (scal-
ing 100 = 1 gain) KP (2014) and integrator time constant (scaling 1
= 1ms) KI (2018) are the main parameters of the speed controller
PI-function. The output of the integral function can be reset by set-
ting the input [RINT] (2007) to state 1. Hold function is activated by
setting the input [HOLD] (2012) to logical state 1.

The P-gain re- The adaptive gain of the speed controller is used to smooth out
duction disturbances which are caused by e.g. low load and backlash.
Moderate filtering of speed error FRS (2005) is typically not enough
to tune the drive. Especially if there is a substantial backlash in the
drive and the drive oscillates at a low torque due to the mechanics.

Parameter KPSMIN (2015) determines the proportional gain when

the controller output is zero. When the output exceeds the value of
parameter KPSPOINT(2016), the proportional gain is normal KP
(2014). The rate of change of the proportional gain can be smooth-
ened by means of parameter KPSWEAKFILT (2017).

KP (2014)

KPSMIN
(2015)
OUT (12004)
Torque ref.
KPSPOINT (2016)

Figure 17 Reduction of gain as a function of torque reference

Output Limitation The speed control output OUT (12004) is limited by the
TORQUE/CURRENT LIMITATION function block (SPC
TORQMAX1 and SPC TORQMIN1). Output IN LIMIT (12005) is in
logical state 1, when the output of the speed controller is in positive
or negative limit.

32 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Integral part Set- Output from the integral part can be adjusted to a certain level by
ting during the setting the [BAL] (2008) to logical state 1; then the value of [BAL
Control Mode REF] (2009) is set to the output of the integral part. There is an-
Changing other similar function controlled by [BAL2] (2010) and [BAL2 REF]
(2011).
BAL REF and BAL inputs are used, for example, in the mechanical
brake control block of the standard program. BAL2 REF and BAL2
inputs are used in torque control. In torque control the integral part
of the speed controller follows the OUT (12402) pin of the TORQ
REF HANDLING function block. This function provides an bum-
pless current reference during a change of control mode (for exam-
ple Torque --> Speed control).

Principle of Drooping can be used if a certain amount of speed decrease is

Drooping needed when the load increases, for example, in the slave drive(s)
when they are speed controlled. Then the master and slave drives
do not conflict with each other before the slave(s) change to torque
control even if there is a slight speed difference between them. On
the other hand, drooping is used in drives where mechanical con-
nection is not strong enough to enable use of torque control.

Drooping Ad- The amount of speed decrease caused by the load is defined by
justment the parameter DROOPING (2013). The scaling is 10=1%. With the
torque reference 4000 the speed will decrease 1% calculated from
the rated speed when DROOPING = 10.

SPEED
ACT

20000

19000
18800
1% DROOPING

OUT (12004)
SPC OUTPUT
0 4000

Figure 18 Drooping as a function of torque reference

SPEED_MONITOR
function block

DCS 500 Software Description 33

Functional Software description

Speed Actual There are four comparators available for speed actual monitoring.
Comparators
When the speed actual is below the value of parameter MIN
SPEED L (2201), the output MIN SPEED (12201) is set to logical
state 1. This is used as zero speed indication.

Signal output SPEED GT L1 (12202) is active when actual speed is

above speed level SPEED L1 (2202). Parameter SPEED L2 (2203)
and output SPEED GT L2 (12203) have the same function.

Overspeed limit The drive can be protected against overspeed e.g. in cases where a
drive section is controlled with the torque reference and the load is
decreasing rapidly. The overspeed limit is set with parameter
OVERSPEEDLIMIT (2204), scale: speed units, range: (0....30 000)
20000 = 100%. Motor overspeed fault (code 37) will be activated, if
overspeed limit is exceeded. Default value is 23000.

Speed Measu- The speed measurement supervision is based on the relationship of

rement Fault the measured speed and measured/calculated EMF. Parameter
MON.MEAS LEV (2209) is the minimum absolute value that the
measured speed must have when EMF ACT (10506) is above the
limit MON.EMF (2210). Otherwise the speed measurement fault is
activated (fault code 14).

SPEED ACT (12102)

COMP-I
MON.MEAS LEV (2209) I1 I1>I2
I2 I1=I2
AND2
I1<I2
&
COMP-I
I1 I1>I2
MUL
X
I2 I1=I2
OR2 SR SPEED MEAS FAULT
-1 S Q
I1<I2
>1
- R
COMP-I
FIELD1 REV ACK SW-C1 I1 I1>I2
ACT I2 I1=I2
-1
I1<I2
+1 RESET
MUL COMP-I
EMF ACT (10506) I1 I1>I2
X AND2
I2 I1=I2
&
I1<I2
MON EMF V (2210)
MUL
X
-1

Figure 19 Speed measurement fault logic diagram

Stall Protection The stall protection stops the converter when the motor is in appar-
ent danger of overheating. The rotor is either mechanically stalled
or the load is otherwise continuously too high. The selection of the
stall protection is made by parameter STALL SEL (2205).

0 = stall ptotection disabled

1 = stall protection enabled
The stall protection is activated if the following conditions are full-
filled:

34 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

- Actual speed SPEED ACT (12102) is below the limit set by

parameter STALL SPEED (2206)
- Actual torque TORQ ACT (10503) exceeds the limit set in
parameter STALL TORQUE (2207) and this condition has been
effective for at least the time set in parameter
STALL TIME (2208).

When the drive stops, the fault MOTOR STALLED is indicated with
fault code 23 and bit number 14 will be set in FAULT WORD2
(11102).

DCS 500 Software Description 35

36
TORQUE_REF {5,7} TORQUE_REF {5,7}

SP -8
TORQ REF SELECTION
SP -89
AI2_REF {13}
TORQUE REF AI2
10107 2401
AI2:OUT+ TREF A
X3:8-7
SDCS-CON-2 AI2:OUT- 10108 LOAD_SHARE {16}
2403 SEL1:OUT 12401
LOAD SHARE TREF_EXT {7}

10109 2404
AI2:ERR TORQ_REF_B {16} TREF B

107
P1 0 AI2 CONV MODE
Functional Software description

108 2402
P2 2000 AI2 HIGH VALUE P1 0 TREF A FTC

109 2405
P3 -2000 AI2 LOW VALUE P2 0 TREF B SLOPE

ST5 (12303) TREF TORQMAX1

(12304) TREF TORQMIN1

RUNNING {3} (10903) RUNNING -1 SETS SEL1:OUT TO ZERO

ST5

SP -10
TORQUE/CURRENT LIMITATION
2301 12301
TORQ_MAX {16} SPC TORQ MAX SPC TORQMAX1 SPC_TORQ_MAX1 {5}
Min
2302 12302
TORQ_MAX_N {16} SPC TORQ MIN SPC TORQMIN1 SPC_TORQ_MIN1 {5}
Max
2303 12303
TORQ_MAX {16} TREF TORQ MAX TREF TORQMAX1
Min
2304 12304
TORQ_MAX_N {16} TREF TORQ MIN TREF TORQMIN1
Max

TORQ MAX2 12305 TORQ_MAX2 {7}

TORQ MIN2
12306 TORQ_MIN2 {7]

2305
P1 4000 TORQ MAX CURR_LIM_PO {7}
Min

CURR_LIM_NE {7}

2306
P2 -4000 TORQ MIN
Max

2315
P3 16000 GEAR.START TORQ
T
2316
P4 100 GEAR.TORQ TIME

2317 t
GEAR.TORQ RAMP CURR LIM P 12307
P5 200
2307
P6 4095 ARM CURR LIM P
Min x x y
2308 y 4192
P7 -4095 ARM CURR LIM N
Max

(12102) SPEED ACT CURR LIM N 12308

2309
P8 20000 MAX CURR LIM SPD x x y
I y 4192
2310
P9 16383 ARM CURR LIM N1

2311
P10 16383 ARM CURR LIM N2

2312
P11 16383 ARM CURR LIM N3

2313
P12 16383 ARM CURR LIM N4 n
2314
P13 16383 ARM CURR LIM N5

(11001) FLUX REF1

ST5

DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

• Torque Reference The function of the torque reference chain is to form a desired ref-
erence for the current regulation.

TORQ_REF_SELECTI An external torque reference can be connected via analog inputs.

ON function block AI2 function block is connected to [TREF A] (2401) in the standard
program, and this input contains a filter controlled by parameter
TREF A FTC (2402) (1000 = 1s), 0 = not in use.
[TREF B] (2404) input is another torque reference input, which
contains the ramp generator function controlled by parameter
TREF B SLOPE (2405) (1000 = 1s), 0 = not in use.

Torque Refer- The value 4000 is equal to nominal torque of the DC-motor (TN).
ence Scaling Therefore the analog input must be scaled according to this value.
For example, an external torque reference -10V...+10 V is con-
nected to analog input AI2 and the torque reference should be
-100%...+100% of the motor nominal torque. The parameter set-
tings are:
AI2 CONV MODE (107) =1
AI2 HIGH VALUE (108) = 4000
AI2 LOW VALUE (109) = -4000

Load sharing in The load of the follower drive can be adjusted by means of input
Master / Follower [LOAD SHARE] (2403) to the desired value by the application
Application function blocks. The default value is 100 % = 4000.
The output OUT (12401) is calculated:

[TREF A] x [LOAD SHARE] / 4000 + [TREF B]

Output Limitation The final torque reference before limitation is a sum of a [TREF A]
multiplied by [LOAD SHARE] and [TREF B].
The output OUT (12401) can be limited by internal signals [TREF
TORQMAX1] and [TREF TORQMIN1] in the function block
TORQUE / CURRENT LIMITATION.

TORQUE/CURRENT_ Torque / Current Limitation function block consist of limitation cir-

LIMITATION function cuits for torque and current references and gear backlash compen-
block sation.

Current Limita- The limitation of armature current is based on fixed current limit pa-
tions rameters and on limits which are the function of the actual speed.
There is a function block with given points of speed and maximum
current on these points. Finally the current limit selection is based
on a maximum/minimum selection of these two limitation sources.

DCS 500 Software Description 37

Functional Software description

Scaling of these limit values is 4095 = nominal current of the motor

I MOTN A (502)

ARM CURR LIM P (2307), scale: 4095 = I MOTN A (502)

ARM CURR LIM N (2308), scale: 4095 = I MOTN A (502)

Example. If the nominal current of the motor is 200A and the maximum
current is set to +/-230A, the limits are set to 230A/200A*4095=+/-4709.

Torque Limits Torque limits for the speed controller and the external torque refer-
ence chain are set by means of the parameters. The program
takes care that these limits cannot exceed the final torque limits,
which are based on the given armature current limit and flux refer-
ence. This ensures that, e.g. the speed controller does not ask for
a larger torque than the current limits allow.
The torque limitation outputs 12301...12306 are internally con-
nected to torque reference chain and speed controller.

The armature current limits are calculated for the torque limits by
means of the flux reference in such a way that the nominal current
of the motor with nominal flux gives nominal torque of the motor,
scaling: 4000 = TN(motor). The final torque limits can be read out
from signals TORQMAX2 (12305) and TORQMIN2 (12306).

TORQ MIN (2306), scale: 4000==TN(motor)

TORQ MAX (2305), scale: 4000==TN(motor)

Speed Depend- With the help of this function the load (motor´s shaft, coupling, gear
ant Current Limi- box and load machine) or the motor itself (commutation problems
tation at high speed) can be protected against overload.
If the drive is used in the field weakening range, the torque pro-
duced is lower than in the base speed range. Because of this and
together with the design criteria of the mechanics sometimes the
current needs to be lowered to avoid damage.
Some motors (most often at high speed motors) the current needs
to be reduced depending on the speed because of their electrical
design. Especially above the field weakening point the loading cur-
rent needs to be reduced according to instructions of motor cata-
logue.
The speed dependant current limitation function is described by 5
(x,y) coordinates. The pairs are:
1. … _LIM_SPEED - … _LIM_N1
2. point 1/4 - … _LIM_N2
3. point 2/4 - … _LIM_N3
4. point 3/4 - … _LIM_N4
5. 100% / 20000 point - … _LIM_N5
Linear interpolation is used for values between these coordinates.

38 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

The function can be graphed using the 5 points determined by the

parameter settings.
Within the next figure there are 3 possibilities shown together with
the outlooking of the curve and the parameter setting.

curve 3 curve 2 curve 1

CURRENT LIMIT
P9 2310
P9 1150 430 P9 4095 ... _LIM_N1
curve 2
P10 3800 P10 600 P10 2800
2311 ... _LIM_N2

P11 4750 P11 1250 P11 1900

2312 ... _LIM_N3
curve 3
P12 3800 P12 2250 P12 1350
2313 ... _LIM_N4
curve 1
P13 2000 P13 4500 P13 800
2314 ... _LIM_N5

Speed
1/4 2/4 3/4 20000
P8 4000 P8 4000 P8 4000 2309 ... _LIM_SPEED

Figure 20 Speed dependant current limitation (example)

In default condition the parameters _LIM_Nx are set to 4 times

nominal current and _LIM_SPEED is set to 20000 = 100% speed to
disable the function. The values of the parameters P2310 to P2314
don´t need to be in a specific order (e.g. not constantly increasing /
decreasing, see above). Dependend on the function of the arma-
ture current over speed range the following steps should be ap-
plied:
- specify the MAX_CURR_LIM_SPEED (2309)
- set the ARM_CURR_LIM_N1 (2310); the converter will use this
value for the speed range between zero speed and P2309;
please keep in mind, that all other limitations have to be in-
creased, if more than nominal motor current is demanded
(scale: 4095 = nominal current of motor)
- the speed range between the speed specified via P2309 and
top speed (100% or 20000) is splitted into 4 even parts
- set the ARM_CURR_LIM_N2 (2311); to a current value,
needed at point 1/2
- do the same with the other pairs

Gear Backlash The gear backlash compensation function can be used for back-
Compensation lash-affected drives. When the torque reference is changing direc-
tion, the torque limit is reduced for a while. Parameter
GEAR.START TORQ (2315) defines the torque limit after the
torque direction change. Scale: 4000 = nominal torque of motor

DCS 500 Software Description 39

Functional Software description

GEAR.TORQ TIME (2316) is the time period after the direction

change when GEAR.START TORQ torque limit is used. Scale: 1 =
1 ms.

GEAR.TORQ RAMP (2317) defines the rate of change for the

torque limit when GEAR.TORQ TIME has elapsed. GEAR.TORQ
RAMP is given as the maximum change of torque limit in 3.3 ms
(50Hz). Scale: 4000 = nominal torque of motor

Torque
reference sum

Reference jump
without backlash GEAR.TORQ RAMP
compensation

GEAR.START 3.3 ms (50 Hz)

TORQUE 2.8 ms (60 Hz)
t

GEAR.TORQ
TIME

Figure 21 Gear backlash compensation principle

40 DCS 500 Software Description

 SP -9 TREFHND2
TORQ REF HANDLING

0 0

2407
TORQUE_REF {5,6} SEL2.TREF SPC 1

2408 SEL2:TORQ/SPEED
12403
SEL2.TREF EXT 2 TORQ/SPEED {5}

SEL2:OUT
12402 BAL_REF {5}
Min 3

SEL2:IN_LIM
12404

Max 4
SP ERR

5
TREF_EXT {6}

ACC_COMP {4} (11702) ACCELCOMP

2409
TORQ_STEP {16} SEL2.TORQ STEP

2406
P1 1 SEL2.TREF SEL

(12305) TORQ MAX2

(12306) TORQ MIN2

RUNNING {3} (10903) RUNNING -1 SET OUTPUTS TO ZERO C_CNTR_3

SP -75

DCS 500 Software Description

ST5 CURRENT CONTROL
10405
ARM CURR REF
FLUX N
ARM CUR ACT 10403
401 CURR REF IN LIM
TORQ REF
12-PULS 10404
CURR DER IN LIM
FLUX REF1 [1209] 1,2
10402
ARM DIR
402
CUR_REF {16} CURR REF

403 10401
CUR_STEP {16} CURR STEP ARM ALPHA ARM_ALPHA {14}

404 t
BLOCK

405
TORQ_MAX2 {6} P1 0 REF TYPE SEL

406
TORQ_MIN2 {6} P2 1366 ARM CURR REF SLOPE

CURR_LIM_PO {6}
415 ARM CURR LIM P

CURR_LIM_NE {6}
416 ARM CURR LIM N

407
P3 300 ARM CURR PI KP

408
P4 3200 ARM CURR PI KI

409
P5 2050 ARM CONT CURR LIM

412
P6 150 ARM ALPHA LIM MAX

413
P7 15 ARM ALPHA LIM MIN

414
P8 0 DXN

410
P9 0 ARM L

411
P10 0 ARM R

417
P11 40 ARM CURR CLAMP

STSYN

SP -104 C_MONIT
CURRENT MONITOR

418
P1 32767 CURRENT RISE MAX
F03
DriveLogic

Iact

0 A137
Monit. 1 1 F34
method 2 2
421 A137
P2 7 CUR RIPPLE LIM
3 F34
420
P3 0 CUR RIPPLE MONIT

419
P4 0 ZERO CUR DETECT

INTERNAL 0
CURRENT ZERO SIGNAL
EXTERNAL 1
via Options

STSYN
Functional Software description

41
Functional Software description

• Current Control

TORQ_REF_HANDLI The speed controller’s output is normally connected to input [TREF

NG function block SPC] (2407) and external torque reference to [TREF EXT] (2408).

Torque Refer- The TORQ REF HANDLING function block consists of the operat-
ence Selection ing mode selector for the torque reference, and it is controlled by
parameter TREF SEL (2406) which has six different modes.

0= no torque or speed control

1= always selects the output of the speed controller

[TREF SPC] (2407) as the torque reference. This is a
normal selection for speed control.

2= always selects the external torque reference [TREF EXT]

(2408) as the torque reference. This is a normal selection
for torque control.
Note. If the torque reference does not correspond to the
load, e.g. the drive load falls down suddenly, it is possible
to
prevent overspeed in the drive section by means of
parameter OVERSPEEDLIMIT (2204).

3= selects the minimum value from the external torque

reference or the speed controller output. A negative
speed difference (SPEED REF < SPEED ACT) causes
a change-over to speed control. A change-over from
speed control to torque reference takes place when the
torque reference is smaller than the speed controller
output and speed difference is positive
[TREF EXT] < [TREF SPC] and SPEED REF ≈
SPEED ACT)

4= selects the maximum value based on the speed

difference. A positive speed difference (SPEED REF > -
SPEED ACT) causes a change-over to speed control. A
change-over from speed control to torque control takes
place when the torque reference is greater than the speed
controller output, ([TREF EXT] > [TREF SPC] and
SPEED REF ≈ SPEED ACT).

5= Window control, external torque reference and speed

controller output are added. See more details in
paragraph Window Control Principle.

42 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Torque Step [TORQ STEP] (2409) input is available for testing the current
regulation or for direct control of the current regulator.

Output Limitation Output signal OUT (12402) can be limited by internal signals
and its Indication [TORQ MAX2] and [TORQ MIN2] in the function block TORQUE /
CURRENT LIMITATION.
Output IN LIM (12404) is in logical state 0, when the input of the
limitation block is within the TORQMAX2 and TORQMIN2.

CURRENT_CONTROL
function block
Torque / Current The current reference is formed by dividing [TORQ REF] (401) by
Reference Selec- the FLUX REF1 signal according to formula
tion
Current = Torque / Flux
The current reference can be connected to input [CURR REF]
(402). Selection between these two references is made with pa-
rameter REF TYPE SEL (405), logical state 1 selects the current
reference.

Current Re- A current regulation response test can be done by connecting the
sponse Test step reference to input [CURR STEP] (403).

Regulation The current regulation can be blocked by setting input [BLOCK]

Blocking (404) to logical state 1.

Armature Current The torque reference from the torque reference selector is con-
Scaling nected to the current reference by means of the flux reference so
that with nominal flux and nominal torque the current reference will
be equal to nominal current of the motor. The scale of the current
reference is 4095 == nominal current of motor I MOTN A (502).

Current Refer- The rise time of the current reference can be adjusted by parame-
ence Rise Time ter ARM CURR REF SLOPE (406), scaling 1 = 1ms. This is used,
for example, if a too fast rise time causes problems in the motor
commutator.

Current Refer- After the slope the armature current reference goes through the
ence Limitation current limiter. Positive/negative limits of the current reference are
based on parameter ARM CURR LIM P (2307) and ARM CURR
LIM N (2308) or on a speed-dependent current limitation.

Current Differ- The difference between the ARM CURR REF and the ARM CURR
ence Alarm ACT (10502) goes directly to the current regulator. If the difference
between these values is larger than 20% (from nominal 4095) and
this situation remains at last 5 seconds, then the ARM. CURR.
DEV. ALARM will be given.

DCS 500 Software Description 43

Functional Software description

PI- Regulation The parameters of the PI controller can be set either with the
autotuning or manual tuning function. ARM CURR PI KP (407)
determines the gain of the regulator and ARM CURR PI KI (408)
determines the integral time constant of the regulator.

Scaling of the PI-controller input and output values are scaled so that gain value
gain KP 100% produces in the output the same value as can be seen in the
input. This kind of scaling is used in the current controller of the
DCS500B.

ARM CURR PI KP * error

output =
256

So, default value 300 is equal to gain 300/256=1.17 (117%)

Scaling of the Integral gain is calculated from the time constant:

Time Constant KI
scantime
ARM CURR PI KI = 16384 *
TC

where scantime = 3.33 ms in 50Hz network

= 2.77 ms in 60Hz network
TC = time constant in ms.

Discontinuous Parameter ARM CONT CUR LIM (409) is the converter actual cur-
Current Point rent at the point where discontinuous current of the armature circuit
changes to continuous current. By using autotuning this point will
be defined automatically. In manual tuning the point must be
measured from the armature circuit by means of e.g. an oscillo-
scope. Actual converter current value CONV CUR ACT (10501) is
set in parameter ARM CONT CUR LIM (409). There is also a
status bit B6 at TC_STATUS (11204), bit value 1 = armature cur-
rent is discontinuous.

I continuous armature current

t
I discontinuous armature current

t
Figure 22 Waveforms of the armature current

44 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Tuning of Current Tuning of the regulator can be done either manually with response
Regulator tests or with autotuning function, which is activated by setting pa-
rameter DRIVE MODE (1201) to 3, when the drive’s main contactor
is open. After closing of the main contactor and starting of the
drive, the autotuning procedure for the armature current controller
will start. The DRIVE MODE (1201) value is set to 0 when auto-
tuning is completed. The autotuning proceeds without user inter-
vention. Motor data have to be set correctly before autotuning is
started. More information about tuning can be read in chapter
Start-up.

Firing Angle The output signal of the regulator is the firing angle reference (1 =
Limitation 1°) ARM ALPHA (10401). Its minimum value is limited by means of
parameter:

The maximum output voltage of the thyristor bridge is limited by

parameter ARM ALPHA LIM MIN (413), default value =15

The armature voltage is U = 1.35 * USUPPLY * Cos α, if the

current is continuous. α = ARM ALPHA.

For example, if USUPPLY is 400 V AC, the maximum armature

voltage is 1.35 * 400 V * Cos 15° = 521 V.

The maximum firing angle is limited by parameter

ARM ALPHA LIM MAX (412), default value = 150. Do not change
this value without consulting ABB!

Additional Com- The commutation can not take place infinitely fast because of the
mutation Reserve network reactance. The time for the commutation can be ex-
DXN pressed by the commutation angle u, which can be calculated us-
ing formula:

u = arc cos (cos α - Id / Ik ) - α

where Ik = short circuit current

Id = load current
Ul = network voltage
Xl = network total reactance

Example It is wanted that a "weak" network can commutate 600 A current.

The nominal voltage of the network is 380 V and frequency 50 Hz.
Used transformer:
20 kV/400 V, 500 kVA
Rk = 0.0032 Ω
Lkm = 48.85 µH/phase

Cable: lenght 50 m, 250 µH/km, Lkk = 12.5 µH/phase

DCS 500 Software Description 45

Functional Software description

Network reac- Xk = 2 * π * 50 Hz * (48.85 µH + 12.5 µH)

tance = 0.019274 Ω

Short Circuit Cur- Ik = √2 * U / (2 * Xk) = 13941.33 A

rent
Let´s calculate what will happen when DC-drive takes 400 A and β-
limit is set to 165°.
400 A load Id / Ik = 400 A / 13941.33 A = 0.0287
cos 165° = -0.966
cos (α - u) = cos α - Id / Ik = -0.9946
arc cos ( -0.9946) = 174° == > OK
600 A load Same with 600 A current:
Id / Ik = 0.043

cos 165° = -1.009

cos (α - u) = cos α - Id / Ik = -1.009

arc cos ( -1.009) = unspecified == > NOT OK, slip over

DXN The DXN is proportional network short circuit voltage and it is de-
fined by using the converter nominal current.
The purpose of DXN is to prevent the slip over of the thyristor
bridge by changing the β-limit proportionally to the converter cur-
rent, if the network is "weak". DXN is calculated:

2 * Xk * I CONV A
DXN (414) = * 1000
2 * U SUPPLY

Parameter value for DXN (414) in this example is 43 = 4.3 %.

Scale: 1 = 0.1 %.

46 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Firing angle ex-

ample U
α

average voltage

t
L1 L2 L3 output voltage

main voltage

0 30 60 90 120 150 180 firing angle

Figure 23 Armature voltage controlled by firing angle 60°

Note. To avoid shooting through of the converter, the adjusted val-
ues of alpha limits should not be changed without consulting
ABB.

Status Indication Output connection point ARM DIR (10402) from the firing unit indi-
for Bridge cates the bridge in use:
0 = no bridge, 1 = motor bridge, -1 = generator bridge.

Values of the U MOTN V (501), I MOTN A (502) and U SUPPLY

(507) must be given to the program, because these parameters are
used for scaling the actual values of e.g. armature current.

DCS 500 Software Description 47

48
SP -34 EMFCONT2
EMF CONTROL

1003
EMF_MAX {16} EMF REF

EMF ACT
4095 0
SP -30 M1FIELD2
FLUX REF SUM
11002
MOTOR 1 FIELD
FANS_ON {3} (10908) FANS ON
1002 5
CONST_4095 {16} FLUX REF
P1 (MANUAL TUNING) {2} (1201) DRIVE MODE 1201=7
4095
FLUX REF1
11001 1313
P1 0 F1 RED.SEL

(1001) FIELD MODE 1001=1,3,5

11003 1301
F CURR REF F1 REF
100%
1314 F1 CURR REF
11301
P2 1228 F1 SEL.REF
TEST REF2
1006 1302
P1 100 LOCAL EMF REF F1 FORCE FWD 0%
Functional Software description

1016 1303
P12 160 GENER.EMF REF F1 FORCE REV

1005 1304
EMF REF SEL F1 ACK

1004 1305
FLUX REF SEL
P3 2047 F1 CURR GT MIN L
1012 1321
P2 20000 FIELD WEAK POINT P10 200 F1 CURR MIN TD
SDCS-FEX-2
1017 1306
P4 4710 F1 OVERCURR L or
P13 23100 GENER.WEAK POINT
1307 11302
1018 P5 0 F1 CURR TC DCF503/504 F1 CURR ACT F1_CURR_ACT {14}
P14 0 FIELD WEAK DELAY 1308
P6 1 F1 KP or
1007
P3 150 EMF KP 1309
P7 20 F1 KI DCF501/502
1008 1311
P4 4905 EMF KI P8 -4096 F1 U LIM N

1011 1312
P9 4096 F1 U LIM P
P5 50 EMF REL LEV

1009
P6 410 EMF REG LIM P ST20

1010
P7 -4095 EMF REG LIM N

1013
P8 1187 FIELD CONST 1

1014
P9 2190 FIELD CONST 2

1015
P10 3255 FIELD CONST 3

1001
P11 0 FIELD MODE SP -28 M2FIELD2
MOTOR 2 FIELD
ST10
(10908) FANS ON

(1201) DRIVE MODE 1201=7

1510
P1 0 F2 RED.SEL
SP -26
MOTOR 1 FIELD OPTIONS
1501
CONST_4095 {16} F2 REF
100%
1310 1511 F2 CURR REF
11501
P1 10 F1 U AC DIFF MAX FREE WHEELING P2 1228 F2 SEL.REF
TEST REF2

0%

1315
P4 100 OPTI.REF GAIN

1316
P5 614 OPTI.REF MIN L OPTITORQUE 1502
P3 2047 F2 CURR GT MIN L
1317 1503
P6 200 OPTI.REF MIN TD P4 4710 F2 OVERCURR L
SDCS-FEX-2
1504
1318 P5 0 F2 CURR TC or
P7 80 REV.REV HYST
1505 11502
1319 P6 1 F2 KP DCF503/504 F2 CURR ACT
P8 80 REV.REF HYST FIELD REVERSAL 1506
P7 20 F2 KI or
1320
P9 0 REV.FLUX TD 1508
P8 -4096 F2 U LIM N DCF501/502
1509
ST20 P9 4096 F2 U LIM P

ST20

SP -24
MOTOR 2 FIELD OPTIONS

1507
P1 10 F2 U AC DIFF MAX FREE WHEELING

ST20

DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

• Field Excitation With DCS 500B it is possible to use several kinds of field exciters
or a combination of them, depending on the application. This para-
graph describes available field exciter units. Functions which use
field exciters are also explained.

( ; 7( 5 1 $ / '&6&RQYHUWHU
) ,(/' $ FNQ R Z OHG J H
ILH OGH[FLWHU
( ; & ,7( 5
&21752/%2$5'
Field ,2  6 & ' 6 & 2 1 [
reference FD UGV
-flux control, field reference
-field logic
;  -EMF-control

R S -4 8 5

'&)[ ;

5 6   

; ; 

)LHOGP RQLWRULQJ

6'&6)(;[

&RQWURO
&RQWURO 6'&6)(; 6'&6)(;

F IE L D M O TO R

Figure 40 Basic parts of the field excitation

DCS 500 Software Description 49

Functional Software description

Selection of the The type of field exciter is selected by parameter FEXC SEL (505)
Field Exciter 0 [NO FIELD EXCITER]
No field exciter selected
1 [DIODE FIELD EXCT]
Internal diode field exciter SDCS-FEX-1
2 [FEX2 OR FEX3]
Internal SDCS-FEX-2 or ext. SDCS-FEX-3
3 [FEX3 FOR MOTOR2]
Ext. DCF50x-0050 for motor 2
4 [FEX2/3 + MOT2=FEX3]
internal SDCS-FEX-2 or ext. DCF50x-0050 as first field exciter
and external DCF50x-0050 (FEX3) as a second one
5 [FIELD ACK VIA DI]
Other field exciter, acknowledge through DI
6 [FIELD ACK VIA AI]
Other field exciter, acknowledge through AI

Field Exciter Status of the field exciter(s) can be seen from the maintenance
Status function FEXC STATUS (11203).

FEXC STATUS (11203)

BIT Internal name Comment
0 FEXC1_RDY_OPER 0 = not ready for operation (AC-voltage missing)
1 FEXC1_ OK 0 = selfdiagnostics failed or power failure in fex 1
2 FEXC_2 RDY_OPER 0 = not ready for operation (AC-voltage missing)
3 FEXC2_OK 0 = selfdiagnostics failed or power failure in fex 2
4 ACK_FEXC1_ON 1 = motor 1 field OK
5 ACK_FEXC2_ON 1 = motor 2 field OK
6 FIELD_HEAT_ON 1 = motor heating function active
7 FIELD1_REV_ACK direction of the field 0 = forward, 1 = reverse
8 ACK_CSC_ON 1 = on-command accepted by sequence control
9 ACK_FEXC_ON 1 = motor field OK

No Field Ac- If FEXC SEL (505) = 0, then the field acknowledge signal has no
knowledge Se- significance. This case is only for testing purposes. The first field
lected exciter and the second field exciter are used with a "Shared mo-
tion" function.

Internal Diode Field The current setpoint using the FEX1 is selected by selecting an
Exciter SDCS-FEX-1 appropriate voltage output from a field transformer. The program
does not measure the current value but an acknowledge signal is
formed which supervises whether the field exciter has current or
not. Other parameter settings are not needed. The acknowledge
signal cannot be read directly but if the signal TC_RDY_RUN
(11204) bit 2 is zero more than 6 second after ON-command, the
drive will trip to the fault: NO FIELD ACK.

50 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Internal Field Exciter Internal field exciter FEX2 is a half controlled bridge that can control
SDCS-FEX-2 the field current in one (positive) direction. Because of the nature of
the half controlled bridge, a very small amount of current (5...10%)
flows always through the bridge if the field contactor is closed.
SDCS-FEX-2 is controlled via a serial communication link. FEX2
measures the field current and sends the value to the drive via se-
rial communication.
Acknowledge The measured field current is used to form an acknowledge signal.
If the field current exceeds the overcurrent limit, the drive will trip to
the fault FIELD EX 1 OVERCURR. A low level of field current
blocks the controllers immediately, but the low level must be active
at least 6 seconds before the drive will trip to the fault: NO FIELD
ACK.

External Field Exciter For the control point of view the DCF503-0050 is similar to SDCS-
DCF503-0050 FEX-2. The differences are that DCF503-0050 can handle a higher
field current than SDCS-FEX-2, and its mechanical size is larger.
The control board type is SDCS-FEX-32.

External Field Exciter External field exciter DCF504-0050 can control the field current ei-
DCF504-0050 ther to the positive or negative direction. The direction is selected
by the sign of the field current reference. A positive sign means
"forward" bridge and negative sign "reverse" bridge.
The field current supervision logic is handled in the same way as in
SDCS-FEX-2. The control board type is SDCS-FEX-31.

AI/DI Connected When modifying existing machines ("revamping") the old field ex-
Field Exciters citers are often reused. In this case an acknowledge signal must be
formed in order to supervise the field function. This can be done
using either digital or analog input.

When a digital input is used to form the acknowledge signal, the

function is similar to that used with FEX1, the diode field exciter.

Acknowledge The acknowledge signal is selected with the same parameter that
Selection is used for selecting the field exciter type. Acknowledge signal is
connected to input [F1 ACK] (1304)

FEXC SEL (505)

...
5 = [FIELD ACK VIA DI]
field acknowledge through DI
6 = [FIELD ACK VIA AI]
field acknowledge through AI

DCS 500 Software Description 51

Functional Software description

Use of the Ana- Analog input is used when the field current is measured or con-
log Input Channel trolled. When controlling an AI-based field exciter, it is also neces-
sary to transfer the reference to the field exciter. This can be done
by means of connecting one analog output channel to the signal F1
CURR REF (11301). The scaling of the used analog output must
be arranged so that the value 4096 corresponds to the rated nomi-
nal excitation value as a voltage reference. The field current actual
signal must also be scaled so that the scaled input value is 4096
with rated field current.

Calculation Ex- For example, the field exciter nominal current is 32.5A, which cor-
ample responds to the 7V field current actual measurement. The con-
nected analog input channel is AI3.

Set:
CONV MODE (110) = 1
HIGH VALUE (111) 4096*10V/7V = 5851
LOW VALUE (112) -4096*10V/7V = -5851
I MOT1 FIELDN A (503) = 3250

For more information on how to scale the AI/AO, see paragraph

Digital and Analog I/O.

Two Field Exciters at When the same converter controls two motors as a "shared mo-
the same time tion", the armature unit is switched between two motors by means
of an extra contactor. Both motors have still their own field exciters.
In the documents the main motor field exciter is called the "first
field exciter" and that of the second motor the "second field ex-
citer".

Only the "first field exciter" can be current controlled and gets it´s
current reference from the EMF CONTROL function block. The
"second field exciter" always uses either a fixed field current level
or a variable one, generated by an analog input or a similar func-
tion.

Motor standstill heating function can be used on the not-used motor

by giving a small field current reference to the field exciter.

Field Current The nominal field current must be given to the program in order to
Settings have a correctly controlled field. Usually there is no need to change
maximum and minimum levels.

The nominal current of field exciters are set with parameters

I MOT1 FIELDN A (503) 100 = 1 A
I MOT2 FIELDN A (504) 100 = 1 A

52 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

The minimum field current levels are set with parameters

F1 CURR GT MIN L (1305) 4095 = rated current

F2 CURR GT MIN L (1502) 2047 = 50% of rated current

In field weakning applications minimum field current limit must be

checked. Parameter value must be below the minimum field cur-
rent.

The overcurrent level is set with parameters

F1 OVERCURR L (1306) 4095 = rated current

F2 OVERCURR L (1503) 4710 = 115% of rated current

Free Wheeling Ext. DCF50x-0050 has a free-wheeling function to give a path for
Function the current if the AC-input voltage disappears for some reason, e.g.
the field contactor opens. When this happens, the current does not
stop but tends to increase the voltage of the field excitation unit
very rapidly .

Trigger Point The AC input voltage is measured, and if the value changes too
Setting of the fast, the field excitation unit fires two selected thyristors continu-
Free Feeling ously open to provide a path for the current. The sensitivity for
Function starting the free-wheeling function can be adjusted by means of the
following parameters

F1 U AC DIFF MAX (1310)

F2 U AC DIFF MAX (1507)

Scaling is in % 1 = 1%.

The initial value is 10 % which means that the free-wheeling func-

tion starts if the two successive AC-voltage measurements in field
exciter differ more than 10 %.

Filter for Actual The field exciter unit has a filter for smoothing the actual field cur-
Field Current rent measurement. The filter has no influence on the PI-controller
but only on the measured signal transferred to the drive software.
The filter time constant should not be set too high because the
same signal is also used for minimum and overcurrent supervision
of the field exciter unit.

F1 CURR TC (1307) (scaling 1 = 0.01 s)

F2 CURR TC (1504)

DCS 500 Software Description 53

Functional Software description

Field Current Con- The current controller of the field excitation unit is located inside the
troller field excitation unit. Some parameters are accessible via serial
communication if the current controller needs manual tuning. The
current controller is a PI-type controller that has parameters for P-
gain and I-time constant.

P-gain parameters:

F1 KP (1308)
F2 KP (1505)
Scaling: input 4095
P 1
output 4095

I-time constant parameters:

F1 KI (1309) Scale: 1 = 10 ms
F2 KI (1506) Scale: 1 = 10 ms
The maximum output voltage of the PI-controller can be limited by
means of two parameters. When the bridge is fully open the output
voltage is 0.9 * VAC. This equals the limit value 4095. The limitation
is linear so 2048 = 0.5 * 0.9 * VAC.

F1 U LIM N (1311) negative limit

F1 U LIM P (1312) positive limit
F2 U LIM N (1508) negative limit
F2 U LIM P (1509) positive limit

Field Reversal Field reversal is needed when the drive has only one armature
bridge (two-quadrant). This gives the possibility to change the speed
direction and also to regenerate the energy back to the network. The
sign of the torque reference in armature control defines the direction
of the field.

Normal running as motor Field Reversal Braking

Id Id

I exc. F1 n + F1 n T
3 -phase + T - -
supply M EMF Iexc. G EMF
- +
F2 - F2 +

Figure 41 Field reversal braking principle

54 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Activating The field reversal function is enabled by means of parameter FIELD

MODE (1001)
0 [CONSTANT F] no EMF-control
1 [EMF, NO FIELD REV] EMF-control without field reversal

2 [NO EMF, FIELD REV] Field reversal

3 [EMF + FIELD REV] Field rev. + EMF-control
4 [NO EMF, OPTITORQUE] Field rev. + OPTITORQUE
5 [EMF + OPTITORQUE] Field rev. + OPTITORQUE +
EMF-control

On a four-quadrant drive the field reference value is always positive

100% (4095). If the EMF-controller is activated, the field current is
controlled but it still can never be larger than 100%.

Field direction To avoid a too sensitive field reversal function when the torque ref-
change hystere- erence value is close to zero, a parameter is needed to form a
sis hysteresis around the zero torque reference. The hysteresis is
symmetrical around zero. For exampe, the hysteresis value is 80.
The drive will change to reverse field when the torque reference is -
80 or smaller. Back to forward field the drive can change when the
torque ref is +80 or larger.

REV.REF HYST (1319) (default 80)

Force field direc- It is possible to force the drive to use a specified field direction. This
tion gives the user the possibility to allow a change of field direction only
when it is needed. For example, it is known when the drive must
really change the direction of speed. Using the force-command
makes the drive less sensitive to the value of the torque reference.
Two inputs are defined for forcing the field direction:

[F1 FORCE FWD] (1302)

[F2 FORCE REV] (1303)

Field monitoring Normally the field current is compared with the minimum level and if
when changing the current falls below the limit, all the control functions are blocked
direction and the drive goes to state RDY RUN = 0 and RDY REF = 0. Dur-
ing the field change the situation differs. The current can be below
the minimum field level for a certain time because the field current
must pass over zero.
In the process of field changing the current controller and the speed
controller I-part are blocked and the speed ramp output is updated
by the actual speed value.

DCS 500 Software Description 55

Functional Software description

The field current must change direction during a period of 2 sec,

otherwise signal ACK_FEXC1_ON goes to 0 and RDYRUN and
RDYREF are set to 0.

Following parameters are needed to supervise the function:

F1 CURR GT MIN L (1305) Defines the minimum level for the field
current

REV.REV HYST (1318) The sign of the torque reference defines

the field direction. Actual field direction is based on comparison of
field current reference and actual. The hysteresis is used in actual
current measurement when field reversal acknowledge signal is
produced.

REV.FLUX TD (1320) If real FLUX of the motor does not follow

rapidly the field current, e.g. in very old DC-motors, it can be nec-
essary to make an extra delay for defining the field direction. Nor-
mally this time can be 0.

Following signals are needed for the controllers and for some
measurements:

Bit 5 of TC_STATUS (11204) is the TC_FIELD_CHANGE indication

and during field reversal this signal blocks the armature current
controller, the I-part of the speed controller and updates the speed
ramp output with a measured speed value.

Opti-Torque The time that is normally needed for changing the field direction is
quite long because of the big inductance of the field winding. This
time can be reduced in certain cases by using the OPTI-TORQUE-
function.

56 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Speed

Normal Field Reversal

Current

Field
Current

Speed

Field Reversal
with OPTITORQUE-
function Current

Field
Current

Figure 42 Optitorque function compared with normal field

reversal
If the type of the process is such that before the field reversal only a
small torque is needed, e.g. changing of the speed direction, it is
possible to reduce the field current before the field reversal is acti-
vated.

This technique enables for a faster field reversal. The permissible

reduction in the field current can be defined by the required torque
reference. For example, if the speed direction is changed rather
slowly, the required torque can also be quite small, close to zero
speed, and so the motor field can also be reduced.

Selection of The OPTI-TORQUE can be selected by the parameter:

OPTI-TORQUE FIELD MODE (1001)

4 [NO EMF, OPTITORQUE] Field rev. + OPTITORQUE

5 [EMF + OPTITORQUE] Field rev. + OPTITORQUE +
EMF-control

Field current re- The relationship between torque reference and field current refer-
duction using ence is defined by parameter OPTI.REF GAIN (1315) (range
torque reference 0...10000).

OPTI.REF GAIN * Torque reference

F1 CURR REF (11301) = 
98

DCS 500 Software Description 57

Functional Software description

Value 100 means that field current is directly proportional to torque

reference. When a 10% torque reference is wanted to produce full
field current, OPTI.REF GAIN (1315) is set to 1000.

Field monitoring Field monitoring differs from normal field changes in that during field
when OPTI- reversal other controllers are not blocked. The bit 5 TC FIELD
TORQUE CHANGE in TC STATUS (11204) is kept in zero. The minimum
changes the field field signal is normally delayed by two seconds, and this is a fixed
direction delay. Because the time that the field current remains below the
minimum level is also a function of the torque reference, and the
torque reference depends on the process and the speed control-
ler´s gain values, two seconds may be too short a time in some ap-
plications.
For this reason the minimum field monitoring is by-passed, if the
field current reference falls below a certain level. Two parameters
are needed for defining the threshold to the reference when mini-
mum level is by-passed.

OPTI.REF MIN L (1316) 614 = 15% of nominal

When the field reference falls below this limit, the minimum field
monitoring is by-passed.
OPTI REF MIN TD (1317) 1000 = 1s
This is an additional delay to keep the by-passing activated after the
field current has again increased above the reference level. The
field reference cannot be below the limit OPTI.REF MIN L (1316)
longer than this time when OPTI-TORQUE function is active or the
field reversal is done.

Field current / When an extremely accurate control of torque is needed, e.g. on

FLUX linearisa- unwinder section of winder, the field current has to be linearised.
tion The reason is that torque is the product of motor armature current
and motor FLUX but motor FLUX is not directly proportional to the
field current.

Flux

I exc.

Figure 43 Flux of DC-motor as a function of field current

58 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Saturation The motor starts to saturate after a certain field current, and thus
the relation of field current and motor flux is not linear. For this rea-
son the field current cannot be directly used to define FLUX inside
the motor. On the other hand, the motor armature voltage without
load (= EMF) is directly proportional to the motor flux and motor
speed below the field weakening area.

For example, if the motor nominal DC voltage is 440V, and we are

running the motor at half speed and full FLUX, then the DC voltage
is about 220V. Then, if we reduce the flux to 50% and keep the
same speed, the DC voltage is about 110V. (This is only an exam-
ple!)

Because the motor EMF-voltage is directly proportional to motor

FLUX it is possible to define the relationship between the field cur-
rent and the motor FLUX by measuring the motor armature voltage
without load (EMF).
The main idea for linearisation is to find a field current that produces
the desired EMF-voltage at a certain speed. Linearisation is done
with a function block that needs three defined values, field currents
for a 90%, 70% and 40% flux. The other values are interpolated.
During the commissioning the values must be defined for the func-
tion block if the EMF-controller is to be used. Only the EMF-
controller uses the linearisation function.

Linearisation
procedure see OPERATING INSTRUCTION

Field reduction The motor field can be reduced during standstill in order to avoid
when at stand- overheating when the motor is not running. The function can be ac-
still tivated by means of two parameters:

F1 RED SEL (1313) Selection for the first motor

F2 RED SEL (1510) Selection for the second motor in the case of
shared motion.

The used current reference can be selected by means of two pa-

rameters:

F1 RED REF (1314) Reference for the first motor

F2 RED REF (1511) Reference for the second motor in the
case of shared motion.
The function is activated when
- "ON"-command is "1", ie., the main contactor is closed
- the drive is in RDY RUN state.
- 10 seconds has elapsed.

DCS 500 Software Description 59

Functional Software description

Field heating The motor field can have a small value in order to avoid condensa-
when in "OFF"- tion when motor is in "OFF"-state. The function can be activated by
state means of parameter:

FIELD HEAT SEL (914)

The used current references are the same as with the field reduc-
tion function:

F1 RED REF (1314) reference for the first motor

F2 RED REF (1511) reference for the second motor in the
case of shared motion.

The function is activated when command "ON" is 0, ie., the main

contactor is open. The function closes the field contactor.

EMF_CONTROL
function block U
I exc.

U armature

Excitation

Speed
Field Weakening Point

Figure 44 Field weakening as a function of speed

The Purpose of The EMF-controller has two main control functions:

EMF Controller 1. When the motor is run above the base speed, the EMF-
controller reduces the motor field to keep the EMF-voltage
constant at a maximum level. This must be done to avoid ar-
mature overvoltage and on the other hand, a maximum EMF is
needed to keep the FLUX as high as possible.

2. When an accurate torque controller loop is needed, the EMF

controller can be used to form an accurate FLUX value. The
application program in the DCS 500B calculates the required
value of the motor EMF at the used speed and used FLUX
reference. The EMF-controller then adjusts the field current so
that the measured EMF corresponds to the EMF-reference.

60 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Selection of The EMF-control function can be activated by means of parameter

EMF-control FIELD MODE (1001)

0 No EMF-control (constant field) without field reversal

1 EMF-control without field reversal
2 No EMF-control (constant field) with field reversal
3 EMF-control with field reversal
4 OPTITORQUE without EMF-control
5 OPTITORQUE with EMF-control

Field reversal is normally used on two-quadrant drives. The field

exciter must also be such that the field current can be controlled,
e.g. SDCS-FEX-2, DCF50x-0050 or DCF500/DCF700.

Resistive and in- To enable an accurate control, the EMF-voltage must be calculated.
ductive voltage Without load the measured DC-voltage equals about the EMF but
drop when the motor is loaded, the EMF starts to decrease because of
losses in the motor. The EMF is calculated for the controller using
the formula:

EMF = Udc - ( RA * i + LA * di/dt )

where
RA = armature resistance in ohms
LA = armature inductance in mH
i = armature current
Udc = measured armature voltage

For more information see paragraph Speed Measurements.

Field weakening Above a certain speed the motor FLUX must be reduced in order to
area avoid armature overvoltage. This area is called the "field weaken-
ing area" and the speed where the field reduction starts is called the
"field weakening point". Above the field weakening point the motor
FLUX is reduced by ratio 1/n. Two parameters are needed to carry
out the function:

Flux

100%
50%

Speed
nN 2n N

Figure 45 The flux as a function of speed

DCS 500 Software Description 61

Functional Software description

SPEED SCALING (2103) Max. speed of drive in 0.1 rpm. This

rpm value equals to spped reference value of 20000.

FIELD WEAK POINT (1012)

Motor field weakening point. Scaling in speed units.

Example. The motor is labeled 1500 - 1800 rpm, 440V

Set SPEED SCALING (2103) = 18000
Set FIELD WEAK POINT (1012) = 16666 (=1500 * 20000 / 1800 )

FLUX reference The FLUX reference can be selected by input [FLUX REF SEL]
handling (1004) as follows: The constant 100% flux reference (= 4096 units
in software) is selected if input [FLUX REF SEL] (1004) has value
0. Value 1 selects the flux reference from input [FLUX REF] (1002),
which is connected to the application program (by means of func-
tion blocks in DCS 500B), when there are special requirements
from the process point of view.

When the motor FLUX is reduced, a larger amount of armature cur-

rent is needed to create the same torque on the motor shaft. This
can be used on some applications, e.g. unwinder section in a
winder. Because of a bigger armature current, the resolution of the
measurement is better, which helps to control small torques with
good accuracy.

Normally the FLUX reference is not changed rapidly. For example,

on unwinder the FLUX reference follows the diameter of the roll.

Flux Reference in The control range for FLUX is 1:5, so the minimum FLUX reference
Emergency Stop is 20% of nominal. In case of EMERGENCY STOP, the reduced
FLUX reference is changed to maximum possible FLUX reference
defined by the field weakening area.

EMF reference The EMF reference is selected by input [EMF REF SEL] (1005).
handling Value 1 selects the EMF-reference from input [EMF REF] (1003) ,
which is connected to the application program. Value 0 selects pa-
rameter LOCAL EMF REF (1006) as the EMF reference.

The scaling of LOCAL EMF REF (1006) is:

100% = U MOTN V

PI - controller PI-controller is needed to correct inaccuracies caused by the proc-

ess, e.g. network AC voltage variations.

I-part of the controller is reset below a certain EMF-level because

the rotor resistance value IR would otherwise cause an

62 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

erroneous result.
The limit at which the I-part is released can be defined by parame-
ter:

EMF REL LEV (1011) default value is 50

(100 * 50/3786 = 1.3%)

EMF-error value The EMF actual value can be filtered for the controller by means of
filter 1st order filter. The time constant of the filter can be given by pa-
rameter

EMF FILT TC (513) scaling 1000 = 1s

(0...10000)
PI -gain value P-gain of the controller is reduced above the field weakening point
scaling by the factor 1/n in order to keep the process gain constant. P-gain
can be adjusted by means of parameter

EMF KP (1007) Scaling is internal unit

277 = 100 %
(1...999)
I-time constant does not have 1/n scaling factor, and it is separated
from the P-gain value. Time constant = 147200 / EMF KI and it can
be adjusted by means of parameter

EMF KI (1008) Scaling is internal unit

20000 = 7.4 ms

PI - controller The output of the PI-controller is limited so that 100% of final FLUX
output limitation reference is the absolute maximum value. The positive level of the
PI-controller is limited so that at exactly the field weakening point
the positive limit is zero. Above the field weakening point the posi-
tive limit starts to increase to facilitate a smooth transfer to the field
weakening area.

Limits for the PI-controller can be adjusted by means of parameters

EMF REG LIM P (1009) 4095 = nominal FLUX

+410 = default (+10%)
EMF REG LIM N (1010) -4095 = -nominal FLUX = def.

DCS 500 Software Description 63

64
SP -76 CONPROT2
CONVERTER PROTECTION
511
P1 110 ARM OVERVOLT LEV

512
P2 230 ARM OVERCURR LEV

508
P3 80 U NET MIN1

509
P4 60 U NET MIN2

510
P5 5000 PWR DOWN TIME

514
P6 0 EARTH.CURR SEL
Functional Software description

515
P7 4 EARTH.FLT LEV

516
P8 10 EARTH.FLT DLY

527
P9 0 CONV TEMP DELAY

ST20

SP -22 M1PROT_2
MOTOR 1 PROTECTION
1401
MOT1.TEMP IN

1402 11401
P1 0 MOT1.TEMP ALARM L MOT1 MEAS TEMP

1403
P2 0 MOT1.TEMP FAULT L

1404
KLIXON IN

1405 11402
P3 0 MODEL1.SEL MOT1 CALC TEMP

1406
P4 4096 MODEL1.CURR

1407
P5 120 MODEL1.ALARM L

1408
P6 130 MODEL1.TRIP L

1409
P7 240 MODEL1.TC

ST20

SP -21 M2PROT_2
MOTOR 2 PROTECTION
1601
MOT2.TEMP IN

1602 11601
P1 0 MOT2.TEMP ALARM L MOT2 MEAS TEMP

1603
P2 0 MOT2.TEMP FAULT L

1604 11602
P3 0 MODEL2.SEL MOT2 CALC TEMP

1605
P4 4096 MODEL2.CURR

1606
P5 120 MODEL2.ALARM L

1607
P6 130 MODEL2.TRIP L

1608
P7 240 MODEL2.TC

ST20

DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

• Protections

CONVERTER_PROTE
CTION function block
Network voltage The measurement/calculation of network voltage is based on the
measurement nominal voltage of the converter, nominal voltage of the supply and
the voltage measurement as follows:

Umeasured * U CONV V (10511) 3276 * 500

U NET ACT (10504 ) = = e. g. = 4095 = 100%
U SUPPLY ( 507) 400

400 V supply Note. DCS 500B converter module is exactly the same for 400V
and 500V supply. Voltage measurement scaling is constant 500V =
4095. U CONV V (10511) signal value must be 500 also for 400V
supply (software reads this value automatically from the SDCS-
PINxx board when C1, C2 or C3 modules are used).

Network under- The nominal net voltage is defined in U SUPPLY (507). The upper
voltage limit for network undervoltage is defined in % by parameter U NET
MIN1 (508). If the network voltage drops below this limit, the con-
trollers are blocked. An undervoltage trip is generated if network
voltage is not restored within the time defined by parameter PWR
DOWN TIME (510). Scaling 1 == 1 ms.

The lower limit for network undervoltage is defined in % by pa-

rameter U NET MIN2 (509). If the network voltage drops below this
limit, the drive is tripped immediately.
Network over- The overvoltage limit is fixed to 130%. If this limit is exceeded, and
voltage the situation continues for at least 10 seconds, an
OVERVOLTAGE-fault will occur. Armature overvoltage level is de-
fined in % of nominal voltage of motor by parameter
ARM OVERVOLT LEV (511).

Overcurrent There is a fixed overcurrent limit for the converter, and this value
can be read out from the signal
I TRIP A (10510) (scale 1 = 1A)
If there is a need to reduce this limit, it can be done with the pa-
rameter:
ARM OVERCURR LEV (512)
scale: 100 = nominal current of converter I CONV A (10509).

DCS 500 Software Description 65

Functional Software description

When the level is adjusted, the signal I TRIP A is updated auto-

matically.

Note. With converter type C4 the nominal values must be given to

the program with parameters 517...521.

When the overcurrent limit is exceeded, an OVERCURRENT-fault

will appear (fault code 2).

Over - The maximum temperature of the bridge can be read out from signal
temperature MAX BR TEMP (10512), scale: 1 = 1°C. If this limit is exceeded, a
CONVERTER OVERTEMP-fault will occur. The alarm limit is 10°C
below the tripping limit. Actual bridge temperature is given by signal
BRIDGE TEMP (10507), (scale 1 = 1°C).
With converter type C4 the maximum temperature of the bridge
must be given to the program with parameter 519.

Earth Fault Earth fault indication is based on a sum current transformer in the
supply. The sum of three phase currents is zero, if there is no earth
current.
SUPPLY
EARTH.CUR SEL

A COMP
D t 0
I1 > I2 Earth
EARTH.FLT LEV
Delay fault
EARTH.FLT DLY

M
Figure 46 Principle of earth fault current measurement

Earth fault protection is activated by parameter

EARTH.CUR SEL (514).
0 = not used
1 = activated
Earth fault current tripping level is defined by parameter
EARTH.FLT LEV (515).
(scaling in amps)
The time after which fault is activated is defined by parameter
EARTH.FLT DLY (516).
(scaling 0.001s)

66 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

MOTOR_1_PROTECT
ION function block
MOTOR_2_PROTECT
ION function block
Measured Motor The temperature measurement of the motor is usually measured
Temperature via analog inputs AI2 and AI3 of the DCS 500B. The temperature
measurement consists of Motor 1: [TEMP IN] (1401) and Motor 2:
[TEMP IN] (1601) channels with alarm and tripping limits. These
channels can be used for temperature supervision of both motors or
of one motor and e.g. the bearings.
If temperature measurement elements are used, the temperature
value can be monitored either in Celsius degrees (PT100) or in
ohms (PTC). It is also possible to use external temperature meas-
urements and therefore give temperature information by means of
current (mA) or voltage to the analog inputs.

Measurement When the motor temperature is measured using PT100, PTC or

selection some other type of measuring element, the right type of measuring
must be selected. If the PT100 elements are used, the respective
number is given (1...3). See the parameter AIx CONV MODE (xxx)
in AI2 and AI3 -function block.
When PTC measurement is selected, the conversion result is
scaled as a resistance value.

Also the jumpers of the input voltage range and current generator
must be set correctly in all cases. The SDCS-IOB3-card has only
one current generator; if two temperature measurements are used,
the elements of both channels have to be connected in series.

MOT1.[TEMP IN] (1401) is the input for measured temperature

from motor 1.
MOT2.[TEMP IN] (1601) is the input for measured temperature
from motor 2.

SDCS_IOB-3
X3:
5 AI2 A/D
6
7 AI3 A/D
8
X4:
U
10
PT100 PT100
5mA 11

Figure 47 Two PT100 sensors in a common current source

DCS 500 Software Description 67

Functional Software description

See the jumper settings of the input range and constant current
generator in Chapter 2 "Standard hardware description". See also
paragraph "Analog Inputs" in this chapter.

Alarm and trip- There are parameters for thermal measurement (PT100, PTC) a-
ping limits larm limit and tripping limit. If the measured temperature reaches
the value set in the alarm parameter, the program gives an alarm
indication, MOTOR 1 TEMP. ALARM / MOTOR 2 TEMP. ALARM. If
the temperature keeps on rising and reaches the tripping limit, the
program trips the drive and gives a fault indication MOTOR 1
OVERTEMP. / MOTOR 2 OVERTEMP. Overtemperature fault be-
longs to tripping level 2, which means that in case of overtempera-
ture the main and field contactors will open. Fans keep running until
temperature falls below the alarm limit.

In the PT100-measurement the alarm and tripping limit parameters

are set directly as Celsius-degrees. In the case of thermistor meas-
urement (PTC) the limits are set as resistance values, (0...4000
ohms). The alarm limits are set into parameters:

Motor 1: MOT1.TEMP ALARM L (1402)

Motor 2: MOT2 TEMP ALARM L (1602)

The temperature tripping limits can be set by the:

Motor 1: MOT1.TEMP FAULT L (1403)

Motor 2: MOT2 TEMP FAULT L (1603)

If the above parameters are set to zero, the alarm and tripping limits
will not be supervised.

Example:
Analog input channel 2 (AI2) has been selected for PT100-
measurement of the motor windings (3 elements), and the analog
input channel 3 (AI3) has been selected for PT100-measurement of
the motor bearings (2 elements). It is supposed that the alarm and
tripping limits of the motor winding are 110°C and 120°C. The alarm
and tripping limits of the bearings are 40°C and 50°C. The settings
in this case are:

AI2 CONV MODE (107) = 5

AI3 CONV MODE (110) = 4
MOT1.[TEMP IN] (1401) = 10107 (connect to output AI2: 10107)
MOT1.TEMP ALARM L (1402) = 110
MOT1.TEMP FAULT L (1403) = 120
MOT2.[TEMP IN] (1601) = 10110 (connect to output AI3: 10110)
MOT2.TEMP ALARM L (1602) = 40
MOT2.TEMP FAULT L (1603) = 50

68 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Note:
HIGH VALUE and LOW VALUE parameters in AI function blocks
are not in use when AI output is defined in °C or in ohms (Ω).

Jumper settings of SDCS-IOB3-card are made such that the input

voltage range in both channels is +/-10V.

Motor Protection DC-motor temperature protection can also be supervised by means

by means of the of the temperature switch in the DC-motor. The contact of the
switch switch opens in a certain temperature. The connection to the soft-
ware is by means of the digital input,and the input signal [KLIXON
IN] (1404) is used in software. When the input state changes from 1
to 0, the overtemperature trip will be activated.

SP
HW SW
MOTOR 1 PROTECTION
1401
[TEMP IN]
1402
SDCS- C: TEMP ALARM L
IOx-x DIxx 107xx 1403
M O1 C: TEMP FAULT L
107xx 1404 11402
O2 [KLIXON IN] MOT1 CALC TEMP
1405
T20 C: MODEL1.SEL
1406
C: MODEL1.CURR
1407
C: MODEL1.ALARM L
1408
C: MODEL1.TRIP L
1409
C: MODEL1.TC
T20

Figure 48 Overtemperature protection by means of the thermal

switch.

Motor thermal model The DC-motor must be always protected against overtemperature.
If a direct temperature measurement of the motor is not available,
the thermal model of the motor can be used when the current limits
of the drive are set higher than the nominal motor current.

In the DCS500B there are two thermal models available that can be
used at the same time. By means of input signal [MOTOR2] (913)
the measured armature current is directed to the correct model.

DCS 500 Software Description 69

Functional Software description

Q act

Motor’s thermal capacity D

100%
A
E

H
Qk B
C
F

Accel. Constant speed Decel. Standstill Accel. time

Figure 49 Qact as a function of different loads

Previous figure shows how QACT (motor’s thermal capacity) is for-

med of rising and falling sections of the time constant function. On
curve 0-A-C-D an overload trip occurs at point D owing to a too
short time constant even though the heating up clearly does not
reach the limit QACT = 100% which corresponds to the motor’s
thermal capacity.

In point A acceleration does not yet cause a trip because a cold

start was made

On curve 0-B-C-E-F-H the desired loading cycle can be repeated as

many times as necessary because its time constant is sufficiently
long.

The temperature rise of the motor behaves as a time constant

which is proportional to the motor current in power of two.

Iact2
Qact =  * ( 1 - e -t/τ ) * 100 (1)
Iref2

where:
Qact thermal value
Iact motor current actual
Iref reference current, normally rated current of motor
τ temperature time constant.
100 scaling factor
t time

70 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

When the motor is cooling, the temperature model follows the for-
mula
Iact 2
Qact =  * e -t/τ ) * 100 (2)
Iref2

As can be seen from formulas (1) and (2) , the thermal model uses
the same time constant for a warming motor and a cooling motor.

Preloading Formulas 1 and 2 do not take into account the thermal preloading
which in practical cases precedes currents that are higher than the
rated current. In the model these can cause a trip.
Preloading current is I0.

Iact2 - I02
Qact =  * ( 1 - e -t/τ ) * 100 (3)
Iref2 - I02

Thermal model The activation of thermal model is made by parameters

selection MODEL1.SEL (1405) and MODEL2.SEL (1605). If the thermal
model is not activated (0), its output is set to zero.

Input signal [MOTOR2] (913) selects which of the thermal models

follows the armature current measurement.
[MOTOR2] (913)
0 = MODEL 1 follows the armature current measurement
1 = MODEL 2 follows the armature current measurement

One thermal model thus follows the armature current and the other
is cooling.

Alarm and trip- Alarm and tripping limit calculation uses as the base current (Iref)
ping limits the values given by parameters

MODEL1.CURR (1406)
MODEL2.CURR (1605)

The normal value is 4096 (≅ motor rated current). This value should
not normally be changed. If for some reason it is not possible to run
the motor continuously with rated current, e.g. due to poor cooling
environment, then the value can be decreased. E.g. the target
continuous load is 85% of the used motor rated current. Then the
parameters are 0.85 * 4096 = 3481.

DCS 500 Software Description 71

Functional Software description

Alarm and tripping limits can be selected by means of four pa-

rameters

MODEL1.ALARM L (1407)
MODEL1.TRIP L (1408)
MODEL2.ALARM L (1506)
MODEL2.TRIP L (1507)

Initial values are selected so that the overloadability is quite high.

For example, the current must continuously be √120 * 100 = 109.5
% before alarm is given and for trippings the current must be √130 *
100 = 114 %.

Recommended value for alarm is 90...100% and for tripping

106...110%.

MODELx.ALARM L (xxxx) = (alarm %2/100)

MODELx.TRIP L (xxxx) = (trip %2/100)

Example. The tripping limit is 106% --> MODELx.TRIP L (xxxx) =

112

Thermal time Time constants for thermal models are given by two parameters
constant
MODEL1.TC (1409)
MODEL2.TC (1608)

It has to be noted that the thermal time constant cannot be used di-
rectly when calculating the tripping time. Often the motor manufac-
turer presents a curve that defines how long the motor can be
overloaded with a certain overload factor. Parameters MODEL1.TC
(1409) and MODEL2.TC (1608) can be selected by means of figure
on the next page.

72 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Current
Id/ %
260

240

200

180

160

140
120

100

0.5 1.0 5.0 10 100

Time (min

Figure 50 Example of motor loadability curve.

Note. This is an example and does not necessarily
correspond to any actual motor.
Example:
The drive should trip if motor current rises above 170% of motor
nominal current for a time longer than 1 minute. Motor’s preload is
50% of nominal armature current. See the following figure. Pa-
rameter MODEL1.TC (1409) value is 150.
Selected tripping base level is 106%. MODEL1.TRIP L (1408) =
1062 /100 = 102.

DCS 500 Software Description 73

Functional Software description

MOTOR TRIPPING TIME SECONDS

150 200 300 500 1000 2000
2400
2000
100
1500

60
1000
900
50 800
700
600

PARAMETER VALUE OF MODELx.TC (xxxx)

30 500
10

30
15

10
20

50
0

0
0

00
0

0
400

300
250
30

50

60

200

150
Motor’s PRELOAD factor
MOTOR’S SHORT TIME OVERLOAD CURRENT FACTOR

125
2.5 0.5 0
100
2.4
80
2.3 0.7
70
2.2 60

2.1 0.8 50

2.0 40

1.9 0.9 30
1.8 25

1.7 0.95 20
1.6 15
1.5 0.98
1.4 10
1.3

1.2
1.1
1.06
0.07 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4

NORMALIZED TIME CONSTANT

Figure 51 MODELx.TC selection curves with tripping base level 106%.

74 DCS 500 Software Description

DCS 500 Software Description
SP -32
BRAKE CONTROL
(10902) RESET

(10503) TORQUE ACT

301
HOLD REF
TREF OUT
10301
LOCAL
302 10302
RUN_MREF {3,4} BR RELEASE TREF ENABLE

303 10303
MIN_SPEED {5} MIN SP IND DECEL CMND

304 10304
ACT BRAKE LIFT BRAKE

305 10305
P1 0 START DELAY BRAKE RUN

306
P2 0 STOP DELAY

307
P3 0 HOLD TORQ

308
P4 0 EMESTOP BRAKE

ST20
Functional Software description

75
Functional Software description

• Brake Control Specific drives such as hoisting or travelling drives must keep in
their current position even the regulator switched off. Control of the
brake and converter has to be synchronised to avoid moving of
load when the brake is released. The motor has to produce a
holding torque before a release command is given to the brake.
DCS 500B has a full sequence control for a mechanical brake pro-
vided by the BRAKE CONTROL function block. It is designed to
operate in co-operation with speed controller.

Safety If a fault has occurred or watchdog trips in control board

SDCS-CON-2, the brake is immediately controlled to close
state
(LIFT BRAKE (10304) = 0).

If emergency stop is activated, the function of brake can be defined

by parameter EMESTOP BRAKE (307):
0 = DISABLE (brake is closed when speed is zero)
1 = ENABLE (brake is closed immediately)

BRAKE_CONTROL
function block

Holding Torque Holding torque reference can be connected to input [HOLD REF]
(301) from the application or analog input. If constant holding tor-
que is used, it can be set with parameter HOLD TORQ (307). If
[HOLD REF] (301) is not connected, the reference is defined by
parameter HOLD TORQ (307).

Brake Release The mechanical brake is released by means of input

[BR RELEASE] (302). The RUN command from the output of di-
gital input is normally connected to here.

Minimum Speed Input [MIN SP IND] (303) is the minimum speed indication for the
Indication block. This input should be active when actual speed of the drive is
below the minimum speed limit. Minimum speed indication is avai-
lable from the SPEED MONITOR function block or it can be
generated by external device or DCS 500B function block application

Brake Acknow- The brake released acknowledge can be connected by means of

ledge digital input to input [ACK BRAKE] (304) in BRAKE CONTROL
function block. Otherwise acknowledge is done in software by con-
necting [ACK BRAKE] (304) directly to brake release command
LIFT BRAKE (10304).

76 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

Start Delay After the start command is given with BR RELEASE-input and the
actual torque has reached the holding torque level, the LIFT
BRAKE output is set. After that during the time START DELAY
(304) the DECEL CMND is active keeping the speed reference in
zero. When start delay has elapsed, speed controller and ramp ge-
nerator are released. (scaling: 1 = 0.01s).

Stop Delay Stop delay is set equal to the closing time of the brake. When
BR RELEASE command is removed, the BRAKE CONTROL -
function block will reset the input of RAMP GENERATOR with
DECEL CMND. When actual speed is low enough, the MIN SP IND
- input is set active. Then LIFT BRAKE - command is removed and
during stop delay, the BRAKE RUN - command will keep the speed
controller operating with zero speed reference. When STOP
DELAY (305) has elapsed, the BRAKE RUN - command is remo-
ved. The mechanical brake is now holding the load by itself.
(scaling: 1 = 0.01s)

Function Following figure shows the timings of the BRAKE CONTROL in ca-
se of starting and stopping.

BR RELEASE
TREF ENABLE

LIFT BRAKE Delay until torque has reached desired level

Hold Torque/Hold Ref

Torque reference

START DELAY
DECEL CMND
STOP DELAY
BRAKE RUN
MIN SPEED (12201)

SPEED . MIN SPEED L (2201)

Figure 51 Brake control function

DCS 500 Software Description 77

78
SP

2006
SPEED CONTROL
[IN]
KP
12004
DROOPING OUT
2008 12005
[BAL] SET1
Functional Software description

IN LIM
2009
[BAL REF] VAL1
2010 SET2
[BAL2]
2011 [BAL2 REF] VAL2
2012
[HOLD] HOLD
2007
[RINT] CLEAR

Figure 52
SP
DI8
10715
RUN O1 SP
10716
O2 RAMP GENERATOR
1701
[IN]
T5 1803
C: LOC.SP.REF (To figure 4)
0 ACT
LOCAL 11701
1702 OUT 4
[RES_IN]
1703 0
[HOLD] H 11702
1707 ACCEL
SP COMP
BRAKE CONTROL 11703
301 10301 SIGN
[HOLD REF] TREF OUT
302 10302
[BR RELEASE] TREF ENABLE
MIN SPEED 303 10303 SP
12201 [MIN SP IND] DECEL CMND
304
[ACK BRAKE] DO6
305 10304 811
C: START DELAY LIFT BRAKE [IN] >1 LIFT_BRAKE
306 10305 812
C: STOP DELAY BRAKE RUN [INV IN]
307 HOLD TORQ
C: T20
308
C: EMESTOP BRAKE

Brake control example connection

T20 SP
DRIVE LOGIC
901
[ON/OFF]
902
[RUN1]
903
[RUN2]
904
[RUN3]

DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

TREF OUT TREF OUT (10301) is a output for torque reference which is used
when the brake is opened. This is normally connected to SPEED
CONTROL [BAL REF] (2009). This torque reference is set to in-
tegral part of speed controller by means of TREF ENABLE output

TREF ENABLE Logical output TREF ENABLE (10302) is activated when the
BR RELEASE changes 0 -->1 and is removed when START
DELAY has elapsed.
0 = TREF OUT (10301) is zero
-1 = TREF OUT (10301) is used as torque reference

DECEL CMND Logical output DECEL CMND (10303) is used to control the speed
reference. It is active until acceleration starts when brake is re-
leased and it is activated again when [BR RELEASE] (302) chan-
ges 1--> 0. By means of this output the speed reference of ramp
generator input is connected to zero before acceleration starts and
after stop command is given.

LIFT BRAKE Output LIFT BRAKE (10304) is used to open the mechanical brake
when the motor is able to produce torque (torque act = TREF
OUT).

BRAKE RUN Output BRAKE RUN (10305) is used for controlling one of input
signals RUN1, RUN2 or RUN3 in DRIVE LOGIC to give a RUN -
command for the converter.

DCS 500 Software Description 79

80
X1 of SDCS-IOE-1

SP -61
DI9
O1
10717
SP -88 FREE
FREE AI3 10718
X1:1 O2
AI3:OUT+
10110
X3:10-9
ST20
SDCS-CON-2 10111
AI3:OUT-

AI3:ERR
10112

110
P1 0 AI3 CONV MODE SP -60
111 DI10
P2 2000 AI3 HIGH VALUE
FREE O1
10719
112
P3 -2000 AI3 LOW VALUE
X1:2 O2
10720
ST5
ST20
Functional Software description

SP -59
SP -87 DI11
FREE FREE O1
10721
AI4
AI4:OUT+
10113
X4:2-1 X1:3 O2
10722
SDCS-CON-2 10114
AI4:OUT-
ST20
AI4:ERR
10115

113
P1 0 AI4 CONV MODE

114
P2 2000 AI4 HIGH VALUE SP -58
DI12
115
P3 -2000 AI4 LOW VALUE FREE 10723
O1

ST5 X1:4 10724

O2

ST20

SP -57
DI13
FREE O1
10725
SP -86
FREE X1:6 O2
10726
AI5
AI5:OUT+
10116
X2:2-1 ST20
SDCS-IOE-1 10117
AI5:OUT-

AI5:ERR
10118

116
P1 0 AI5 CONV MODE SP -56
DI14
117
P2 2000 AI5 HIGH VALUE FREE 10727
O1
118
P3 -2000 AI5 LOW VALUE X1:7 O2
10728

ST5
ST20

SP -55
DI15
SP -85
FREE O1
10729
FREE AI6
AI6:OUT+
10119 10730
X1:8 O2
X2:5-4
SDCS-IOE-1 10120
AI6:OUT-
ST20

AI6:ERR
10121

119
P1 0 AI6 CONV MODE

120
P2 2000 AI6 HIGH VALUE

121
P3 -2000 AI6 LOW VALUE

ST5

DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

• Extended inputs / out- The AI3 and AI4 blocks represent another 2 analog inputs which
puts have as yet not been assigned to any particular functions. The
blocks AI5 and AI6 represent another 2 additional inputs which are
only active, if the board SDCS-IOE1 is connected. Another 7 digital
inputs DI9 … DI15 are available with this additional hardware.

General: please see chapter General

DCS 500 Software Description 81

82
SP -95 FLBSET_2

FIELDBUS

4001
P01 0 FIELDBUS PAR.1
4002 (MODULE TYPE)
P02 0
4003
P03 0
4004
P04 0
4005
P05 0
4006
P06 0
Functional Software description

4007
P07 0
4008
P08 0
4009
P09 0
4010
P10 0 Parameters
4011 depends of
P11 0 modul type
4012
P12 0
4013
P13 0
4014
P14 0
4015
P15 0

ST5

SP -91 SP -92
DATASET 1 DATASET 2
10122 209
OUT1 IN1
10123 210 OUT
IN OUT2 IN2

10124 211
OUT3 IN3

ST5 ST5

SP -93 SP -94
DATASET 3 DATASET 4
10125 212
OUT1 IN1
10126 213 OUT
IN OUT2 IN2

10127 214
OUT3 IN3

ST5 ST5

DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

• Serial link via If analog and digital signals are not sufficient for the control or the
FIELDBUS status of the drive a serial link based on serial communication mod-
ules may be a possibility to imcrease the number of information or
the accurracy of the signals. The type of module is activated by
means of the block FIELDBUS. The data transferred from the con-
trol to the converter are stored in the blocks DATASET 1 and 3 as a
16-bit-information. Depending on the application the output pins of
these blocks have to be connected to input pins of other blocks in
order to transport the message. The same procedure is valid for
blocks DATASET 2 and 4, if they are connected. These blocks are
transmitting information from the converter to the control system.

There are several different communication adapter available:

- NPBA-02 for serial links, based on PROFIBUS
- NCSA-01 for serial link to ABB PLC type CS31 / AC31
- NMBA-01 for serial link , based on MODBUS
- NMBP-01 for serial link , based on MODBUS PLUS
- FCI for serial link to ABB PLC via AF100 bus
- no module for serial link to ABB PLC type AC70

General: please refer to the documentation describing the serial

link module and the Description of the drive-specific se-
rial link interconnections

Some of these modules have been updated in the past. They are
available with different software versions. The next table shows the
compatibillity (modules marked with * should be used together with
this converter software):
- NPBA-02; software version 2.1
- NPBA-02; software version 2.2 *
- NCSA-01; software version 1.5 *
- NMBA-01; software version 1.5 * (supports multilink)
- NMBP-01; software version 1.5 * (no parameter exchange)
- FCI; software version 1.3 *
- AC70; software version 1.1-1 *

DCS 500 Software Description 83

84
SP -97 SP -98
INPUT X18 OUTPUT X18

13617 3611
X18:13 X18:09
13618 3612
X18:14 X18:10
13619 3613
X18:15 X18:11
13620 3614
X18:16 X18:12

STSYN STSYN
Functional Software description

SP -99 12PULS_2
12-PULSE LOGIC

BRIDGE REVERSAL LOGIC

active, if [1209]= 1 or 2
Bridge
13611
3608
IREF0 Logic
IREF1-Polarity
13606
3609
Bridge Logic IREF2-Polarity
13609
3610 13607
Revers.Logic IREF1-Pol.Master

IREF2-Pol.Broth
13610
3601
P1 1 REV DELAY
Bridge of Slave
13612
3602
P2 10 REV GAP
Indicat.Revers
13613
3603
P3 10 FREV DELAY
Fault Reversion
13614

ON/OFF LOGIC
3607 13616
INHIB Logic Logik f.INHIBIT

BC {2} (11205) BC BC not Zero

13621

3616
BC Logic

CURRENT ANALYSIS
active, if [1209] = 1 Conv.Curr.Slave
13601

Arm.Curr.Slave
13602
3605 DIFF CURRENT
P4 10 13603
3606 Conv.Curr.Both
DIFF CURR DELAY
P5 150 13604
Arm.CURR.Both

Fault Current
13615

CURRENT REFERENCE
[1209]
3615 13608
P6 2048 ADJ REF1 Curr.Ref.2
*
AI2_REF {6}
3604 2048
IACT SLAVE 13605
Curr.Ref.1
MASTER
6-PULSE 13622
Res. f.Commun

STSYN

DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

• 12 pulse configuration The 12- pulse parallel connection produces the following advan-
tages:
- reduction in power converter´s effects on the mains supply net-
work, like reduced harmonics and different frequencies
- large output DC currents; doubling of the output current due to
parallel connection of two 6-pulse standard power converters
- improved current ripple; less amount of current ripple, higher
frequency and smaller torque pulsation

Basically, the 12 –pulse connection is a classical master-slave con-

figuration with a speed controlled 6-pulse master power converter
and a current controlled 6-pulse slave power converter. In addition
to these 2 identical power converters one field supply unit is
needed, which is controlled by the master.

The 12-pulse parallel connection is obtained by feeding the slave

with a mains supply offset by 30 degree compared to the master
and joining the power converter outputs on one side over a T-
reactor (interface choke, 12-pulse choke, … )

The 12-pulse mode has been implemented in the standard software

and will not become operative until parameterization is done. After a
few signals have been replaced for switch-on and switch-off, and
the specific master/slave parameters have been set, the two power
converters will work in the usual way. The only distinctive feature
compared with the classical 6-pulse version is that the two power
converters are synchronized for reversing the bridges.

Depending on the application and the type of converter (2 or 4

quadrant type) the final configuration is different:
- at 2 quadrant systems:
the 12-pulse function block remains unchanged; the current ref-
erence is taken out of the master and feed to the slave via ana-
log output – input;
see separate documentation MASTER – FOLLOWER 1.1
- at 4 quadrant systems:
the 12-pulse function block is used; the parameters need to be
set and the pins need to be connected;
see separate documentation DCS 500 Planning and Startup for
12 Pulse Power Converters

DCS 500 Software Description 85

86
Functional Software description

SP -102 DATALOG
DATA LOGGER

601
SPEED_ACT {4,5} IN1 Ch.1

602
CONV_CUR_ACT {2} IN2 Ch.2

603
U_ARM_ACT {2} IN3 Ch.3

604
U_NET_ACT {2} IN4 Ch.4

605
F1_CURR_ACT {8} IN5 Ch.5

606
ARM_ALPHA {7} IN6 Ch.6

607 10601
P1 1 DLOG.TRIGG COND DLOG STATUS

608
P2 20000 DLOG.TRIGG VALUE
CMT-TOOL
609
P3 200 DLOG.TRIGG DELAY
TRIG STOP RESTART
610
P4 3 DLOG.SAMPL INT

611 0 TRIG
DLOG.TRIG

612 0 STOP
DLOG.STOP

613 0 RESTART
DLOG.RESTART

T1ms

DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

• Data Logger DCS500B also includes a datalogger for measurements. Data log-
ger has six logging channels. The capacity of each channel is 1000
samples.

DATA LOGGER func- Data logger consists of six logging channels

tion block
DLOG1.[IN] (601)
DLOG2.[IN] (602)
DLOG3.[IN] (603)
DLOG4.[IN] (604)
DLOG5.[IN] (605)
DLOG6.[IN] (606)

The capacity of each channel is 1000 samples. These channels can

be used to collect fast incidents from the DCS500B within a certain
time. The total collection time (1...1000s) can be set with a sampling
interval parameter DLOG.SAMPL INT (610) (1...1000ms). This
collection time is common for all the channels.

Channels can be examined in graph/numeric form with the

CMT/DCS500 Tool.

Selection of the parameter/signal index to be sampled in the data

logger channels 1...6 is made by setting the index to the desired
connection point DLOG1.[IN] (601) ... DLOG6.[IN] (606).

Selection of the trigger condition is made by means of the parame-

ter DLOG.TRIGG COND (607) as follows:

0 = external triggering
1 = fault + external triggering
2 = triggers when the difference between two successive values of
data logger channel 1 is larger than the value defined in
DLOG TRIGG VALUE (608)
3 = triggers when the value in data logger channel 1 exceeds the
value which is defined in DLOG TRIGG VALUE (608)
4= triggers when the value in data logger channel 1 falls below the
value which is defined in DLOG TRIGG VALUE (608).

Note! Function blocks can be used to generate more complex trig-

gering conditions.

Number of samples after triggering can be defined by means of

parameter DLOG.TRIGG DELAY (609), 0 ... 1000.

DCS 500 Software Description 87

Functional Software description

Example:
The data logger is used to monitor the speed difference during a
speed response test. The measurement points are [STEP] (2002),
STEP RESP (12003). Triggering will take place when [STEP]
(2002) exceeds the set limit e.g. 10 (given step e.g. 100).

Settings:
DLOG1.[IN] (601) connect to 2002
DLOG2.[IN] (602) connect to 12003
DLOG.TRIGG COND (607) = 2,
triggers when the difference between two successive values of data
logger channel 1 is larger than the value defined in DLOG.TRIGG
VALUE (608).

DLOG.TRIGG VALUE (608) = 10

DLOG.TRIGG DELAY (609) = 800
200 samples before and 800 samples after the triggering.

DLOG.SAMPL INT (610) = 3ms, samples are taken 0.6 s

(200*3ms) before and 2.4 s (800*3ms) after triggering. Resolution
must be observed in setting of the sample interval; a too long inter-
val causes losses in the waveform during fast changes of the
measured signal.

The status of data logger can be read out from parameter DLOG
STATUS (10601).
0 = logger is empty
1 = logger is collecting data
2 = a trigger has occured
3 = logger has stopped after a trigger
4 = logger has stopped after a stop command
5 = logger has stopped after a trigger and stop command

88 DCS 500 Software Description

 SP -7
USER EVENT 1
1101
IN

1102
P1 0 TYPE

1103
"EXT. IND. 1" TEXT

1104
P3 0 DLY

ST20

SP -6
USER EVENT 2
1105
IN

1106
P1 0 TYPE

1107
"EXT. IND. 2" TEXT

1108

DCS 500 Software Description

P3 0 DLY

ST20

SP -5
USER EVENT 3
1109
IN

1110
P1 0 TYPE

"EXT. IND. 3"

1111
TEXT

1112
P3 0 DLY

ST20

SP -4
USER EVENT 4
1113
IN

1114
P1 0 TYPE

1115
"EXT. IND. 4" TEXT

1116
P3 0 DLY

ST20

SP -3
USER EVENT 5
1117
IN

1118
P1 0 TYPE

1119
"EXT. IND. 5" TEXT

1120
P3 0 DLY

ST20

SP -2
USER EVENT 6
1121
IN

1122
P1 0 TYPE

1123
"EXT. IND. 6" TEXT

1124
P3 0 DLY

ST20
Functional Software description

89
Functional Software description

• User Event Events can be programmed to DCS 500B software by using USER
EVENT function blocks.

Input [IN] activates logging of an external alarm or fault into the

Fault Logger when state is 1.

Parameter TYPE selects the type of external event:

0 = FAULT: TRIPLEVEL 1 (main, field and fan contactors are
opened
1 = FAULT: TRIPLEVEL 2 (main and field contactors are opened
2 = FAULT: TRIPLEVEL 3 (main contactors is opened
3 = ALARM (only alarm indication)
4 = EVENT (only logging to Fault Logger)

Parameter DLY (delay) selects the activation delay. External event

has to be active for longer than the activation delay time until it is
accepted.

90 DCS 500 Software Description

 SP -73
CONSTANTS
0
12501 CONST_0

-1
12502 CONST_M1_TRUE

1
12503
CONST_1

2
12504 CONST_2

10
12505 CONST_10

100
12506 CONST_100

1000
12507
CONST_1000

31416
12508
CONST_31416

DCS 500 Software Description

EMF:100%
12509 EMF_MAX {8}

TORQ:100%
12510 TORQ_MAX {6}

TORQ:-100%
12511 TORQ_MAX_N {6}

12512
CUR,FLX,VLT: 100% CONST_4095 {8}
SP -103 FLTHNDL
CUR,FLX,VLT:-100%
12513
CONST_M4095
FAULT HANDLING
SPEED: 100%
12514
CONST_20000
FAULT WORD 1
11101
SPEED:-100%
12515 CONST_M20000

FAULT WORD 2
11102
ST

FAULT WORD 3
11103

LATEST FAULT
11107

ALARM WORD 1
11104

ALARM WORD 2
11105

ALARM WORD 3
11106

LATEST ALARM
11108
SP -74
FREE SIGNALS
SIG1(SPEED REF)
12516
OPERATING HOURS
11109

SIG2(SPEED STEP)
12517
SPEED_STEP {5} T20

SIG3(TORQ. REF A)
12518

SIG4(TORQ. REF B)
12519 TORQ_REF_B {6}

SIG5(TORQUE STEP)
12520 TORQ_STEP {7}

SIG6(LOAD SHARE)
12521
LOAD_SHARE {6}

SIG7(FLUX REF)
12522

SIG8(EMF REF)
12523

SIG9(FORCE_FWD)
12524

SIG10(FORCE REV)
12525

SIG11(CURR. REF)
12526
CUR_REF {7}

SIG12(CURR._STEP)
12527
CUR_STEP {7}

ST
Functional Software description

91
Functional Software description

• Diagnostics If a fault or an alarm has occurred, an error code is generated.

These codes are transferred to the fault logger (maximum 100 error
codes with occurrence time). This fault logger can be examined for
previous fault and alarm codes by means of the control panel or
CMT/DCS500 Tool.

In the event of a supply voltage failure, the program stores the data
of the fault buffers and data loggers to a protected memory on the
Control card SDCS-CON-2.

Control card SDCS-CON-2 has a self-diagnostic program. The pro-

gram indicates the current state of the drive on a seven- segment
display. These codes are given in the manual "OPERATING
INSTRUCTION".

FAULT HANDLING Each fault and alarm/status is coded as an individual error code to
function block the LATEST FAULT (11106) and LATEST ALARM (11107).
Fault words FAULT WORD1 (11101), FAULT WORD2 (11102),
FAULT WORD3 (11103) and alarm words ALARM WORD1
(11104), ALARM WORD2 (11105), ALARM WORD3 (11106),
contain status bits for all possible DCS500B faults and alarms.

Fault and Alarm

signals see Operating Instruction

Fault Word bits see Appendix A - Signal list 11101/11102/11103

Alarm Word bits see Appendix A - Signal list 11104/11105/11106

Fault Logger The latest fault can be read out from parameter LATEST FAULT
(11107) and the latest alarm from LATEST ALARM (11108). The
parameter is also the basic index for the fault logger which consists
of 100 latest events, alarms and faults with occurrence times. The
contents of the fault logger can be read out by means of the
CMT/DCS500 Tool or panel.

92 DCS 500 Software Description

 Functional Software description

CONSTANTS functi- DCS 500B software consists of certain constant values which can
on block be used in application software or for testing purpose.

Logical constants Logical constants Output Value

CONSTANT 0 (12501) LOGIC 0 (false)
CONSTANT -1 (12502) LOGIC 1 (true)

Numerical Numerical constants Output Value

constants
CONSTANT 1 (12503) 1
CONSTANT 2 (12504) 2
CONSTANT 10 (12505) 10
CONSTANT 100 (12506) 100
CONSTANT 1000 (12507) 1000
CONSTANT 31416 (12508) 31416 (≈ π * 100)
EMF 100% (12509) 3786
TORQ 100% (12510) 4000
TORQ -100% (12511) -4000
CUR,FLX,VLT 100% (12512) 4095
CUR,FLX,VLT -100% (12513) -4095
SPEED 100% (12514) 20000
SPEED -100% (12515) -20000

FREE_SIGNALS These signals can be set by the CMT/DCS500 or control panel.

function block The value can be used to give different references. Before the
drive will follow this reference, it has to be connected to the correct
input. If BACKUPSTORE MODE is activated, these values will not
be stored!

Set constants Output Range

SIG1(SPEED REF) (12516) -30000...30000
SIG2(SPEED STEP) (12517) -30000...30000
SIG3(TORQUE REF A) (12518) -30000...30000
SIG4(TORQUE REF B) (12519) -30000...30000
SIG5(TORQUE STEP) (12520) -30000...30000
SIG6(LOAD SHARE) (12521) -30000...30000
SIG7(FLUX REF) (12522) -30000...30000
SIG8(EMF REF) (12523) -30000...30000
SIG9(FORCE FWD) (12524) -30000...30000
SIG10(FORCE REV) (12525) -30000...30000
SIG11(CURRENT REF) (12526) -30000...30000
SIG12(CURRENT (12527) -30000...30000
STEP)

DCS 500 Software Description 93

Functional Software description

94 DCS 500 Software Description

 Index

DXN, 45, 46
A dynamic braking, 17 K
Actual speed based on EMF, 25 KLIXON IN, 69
adaptive gain, 32
E KPSMIN, 32
Additional Commutation Reserve, 45 e, 31 KPSWEAKFILT, 32
AI1, 6 Earth Fault, 66
AI2 function block, 37 EME STOP, 19 L
AITAC, 6, 24 EME STOP MODE, 19, 27
LATEST ALARM, 92
AITAC CONV MODE, 24 Emergency Stop, 19
LATEST FAULT, 92
ALARM WORD1, 92 emergency stop function, 27
Limitation, 26
ALARM WORD2, 92 EMESTOP ACT, 19, 20
Load sharing, 37
ALARM WORD3, 92 EMESTOP RAMP, 27
LOCAL, 21
Analog Input Error Codes, 8 EMF, 23, 61
Local/Remote, 21
Analog Input Function Block, 6 EMF reference handling, 62
LOCAL/REMOTE, 27
Analog Output Function Block, 9 EMSTOP RAMP, 18, 19, 20
Logical constants, 93
Analog Outputs, 9 external torque reference, 42
analogue tacho generator, 23, 24
ARM ALPHA, 45 F M
ARM ALPHA LIM MAX, 45 Main Reference Selection, 26
Fault Alarm Signals, 92
ARM ALPHA LIM MIN, 45 Manual Tuning, 12
Fault Handling, 92
ARM DIR, 47 Measured Motor Temperature, 67
Fault Logge, 92
Armature Current Scaling, 43 Measurement selection, 67
FAULT WORD1, 92
Autotuning, 13 Minimum Speed Indication, 76
FAULT WORD2, 92
Motor 1 Protection, 67
FAULT WORD3, 92
B FEXC SEL, 50, 51
Motor 2 Protection, 67
motor temperature, 67
backlash, 32, 39 FEXC STATUS, 50
BACKUP STORE MODE, 3 FIELD ACK VIA AI, 51
Brake Release, 76 FIELD ACK VIA DI, 51
N
FIELD HEAT SEL, 60 Network overvoltage, 65
C Field heating, 60 Network reactance, 46
FIELD MODE, 61 Network undervoltage, 65
Calculation of speed, 25
Field Reversal, 54 Network voltage measurement, 65
Changing of the direction, 27
FIELD WEAK POINT, 62 Numerical constants, 93
Closing Control of the Contactors, 16
Filtering of the actual speed, 25
CMT/DCS500, 4, 21
Coast Stop, 19, 20
Firing Angle Limitation, 45 O
follower drive, 37
compensation, 28 Opening Control of the Contactor, 17
Force field direction, 55
Connections between Function Opti-Torque, 56
FPROM-memory circuit, 2
Blocks, 4 Over -temperature, 66
Free signals, 93
Const_Ref, 26 Overcurrent, 65
Free Wheeling Function, 53
constant reference, 26 overtemperature fault, 17
FRS, 30, 32
CONV MODE, 6
Function Blocks, 4
Current Difference Alarm, 43 P
Current Limitations, 37
Current Reference Limitation, 43
G Parameter Sets, 2
Passing of the RAMP function, 28
Current Reference Rise Time, 43 Gear backlash compensation, 40
PERIOD btw.POT1/2, 12
Current Response Test, 43 GEAR.START TORQ, 39
PI controller, 44
polarity of the analogue tacho, 24
D H POT1 VALUE, 12
Data Logger, 87 HOLD, 27 POT2 VALUE, 12
DCF503-0050, 51 Holding Torque, 76 proportional gain, 32
DCF504-0050, 51 PS5311, 24
Diagnostics, 92 I PT100 sensors, 67
Digital and Analog I/O, 5
I MOTN A, 47
Digital Input Function Blocks, 5
Identification of the Converter
R
Digital Output Function Block, 5
Software version, 3 Ramp function, 28
Discontinuous Current Point, 44
Identification of the Field Exciter Ramp Generator, 27
Drive Logic, 16
Software version, 3 REF SEL function block, 26
Drive Logic Function Block, 16
incremental encoder, 23, 24 Reset the drive fault, 20
DROOPING, 33
integrator time constant, 32 rise time of the current reference, 43

DCS 500 Software Description I1

Index

Run Control, 17 SPEED MEAS MODE, 24 Torque reference selection, 37

RUN-command to zero, 18 Speed measurement mode, 24 Torque Step, 43
RUNNING, 17 speed reference, 23 trip main contactor and field contactor,
Speed scaling, 23 17
S Speed Step, 30 trip main contactor, field contactor and
SQUAREWAVE, 12 fans, 17
Saving the program, 2
stall protection, 34 trip the main contactor, 17
Scaling of the actual voltage, 25
START INHIBIT, 17 tripping, 17
SDCS-CON-2, 5, 9, 24
Stop Control, 18 Tuning of Current Regulator, 45
SDCS-FEX-1, 50
SDCS-FEX-2, 51
SDCS-IOB-2x, 5
T U
SDCS-IOB-3, 9, 24 tacho generator adaption board, 24 U CONV V, 65
SDCS-IOE-1, 5 TACHO PULSES, 24 U MOTN V, 47
Selection of the Field Exciter, 50 TACHOPULS NR, 24 U NET MIN1, 65
Settings, 11 TEST REF, 12 U NET MIN2, 65
Short Circuit Current, 46 TEST REF SEL, 12 U SUPPLY, 47, 65
SOFTPOT, 26 thermal model, 69
Software version, 3 thermal preloading, 71 W
SPEED ACT, 25 Thermal time constant, 72
WIN MODE, 31
SPEED ACT FILT, 25 TORQ REF HANDLING function
WIN SIZE, 31
SPEED ACT FTR, 25 block, 42
window control, 31
speed control, 30 Torque Limits, 38
Window Control, 31
Speed Control Function Block, 32 torque reference chain, 37
Window Size, 31
SPEED ERROR function block, 30 Torque Reference Scaling, 37

I2 DCS 500 Software Description

 DCS 500 Thyristor Power
converters

Parameter and Signal list

Software Version: 21.233

Diagram: S21V2_0

Appendix A
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Contents Page

General .....................................................................................................................................4
Parameters of DCS 500............................................................................................................5
Signals of DCS 500...................................................................................................................7
Group 1: ANALOG INPUTS.........................................................................................8
Group 2: ANALOG OUTPUTS.....................................................................................12
Group 3: BRAKE CONTROL .......................................................................................14
Group 4: CURRENT CONTROL..................................................................................15
Group 5: CONVERTER AND MOTOR ........................................................................18
Group 6: DATA LOGGER ............................................................................................23
Group 8: DIGITAL OUTPUTS......................................................................................25
Group 9: DRIVE LOGIC...............................................................................................27
Group 10: EMF CONTROL..........................................................................................30
Group 11: FAULTS, ALARMS .....................................................................................33
Group 12: MAINTENANCE..........................................................................................36
Group 13: MOTOR 1 FIELD ........................................................................................39
Group 14: MOTOR 1 PROTECT. ................................................................................42
Group 15: MOTOR 2 FIELD ........................................................................................43
Group 16: MOTOR 2 PROTECT. ................................................................................45
Group 17: RAMP GENERATOR..................................................................................46
Group 18: REFERENCE CHAIN..................................................................................48
Group 19: REFERENCE SOURCES ...........................................................................49
Group 20: SPEED CONTROLLER ..............................................................................52
Group 21: SPEED MEASUREMENT...........................................................................54
Group 22: SPEED MONITOR......................................................................................55
Group 23: TORQUE and CURRENT LIMITS ..............................................................57
Group 24: TORQUE REFERENCE CHAIN .................................................................60
Group 25: FB EXECUTION .........................................................................................61
Group 26: FUNCTION BLOCKS 1...............................................................................62
Group 27: FUNCTION BLOCKS 2...............................................................................62
Group 28: FUNCTION BLOCKS 3...............................................................................62
Group 29: FUNCTION BLOCKS 4...............................................................................62
Group 30: FUNCTION BLOCKS 5...............................................................................62
Group 31: FUNCTION BLOCKS 6...............................................................................62
Group 32: FUNCTION BLOCKS 7...............................................................................62
Group 33: FUNCTION BLOCKS 8...............................................................................62
Group 34: FUNCTION BLOCKS 9...............................................................................62
Group 36: 12-PULSE OPERATING.............................................................................63
Group 37: WINDER PARAMETER ..............................................................................66
Group 38: FUNCTION BLOCKS WINDER ..................................................................66
Group 39: FUNCTION BLOCKS 10.............................................................................66
Group 40: FIELDBUS ..................................................................................................67
Group 101: ANALOG INPUTS.....................................................................................74
Group 103: BRAKE CONTROL ...................................................................................78
Group 104: CURRENT CONTROL..............................................................................79
Group 105: CONVERTER, MOTOR............................................................................80
Group 106: DATA LOGGER ........................................................................................82
Group 107: DIGITAL INPUTS......................................................................................83
Group 109: DRIVE LOGIC...........................................................................................86
Group 110: EMF CONTROL........................................................................................88
Group 111: FAULTS, ALARMS ...................................................................................89
Group 112: MAINTENANCE........................................................................................93
Group 113: MOTOR 1 FIELD ......................................................................................98
Group 114: MOTOR 1 PROTECT. ..............................................................................99
Group 115: MOTOR 2 FIELD ......................................................................................100
Group 116: MOTOR 2 PROTECTION.........................................................................101

A2
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 117: RAMP GENERATOR ...............................................................................102

Group 118: REFERENCE CHAIN ...............................................................................103
Group 119: REFERENCE SOURCES.........................................................................104
Group 120: SPEED CONTROLLER............................................................................105
Group 121: SPEED MEASUREMENT.........................................................................106
Group 122: SPEED MONITOR ...................................................................................107
Group 123: TORQUE and CURRENT LIMITS ............................................................108
Group 124: TORQUE REFERENCE CHAIN...............................................................109
Group 125: TASKS, CONSTANTS..............................................................................110
Group 126: FUNCTION BLOCKS 1 ............................................................................113
Group 127: FUNCTION BLOCKS 2 ............................................................................113
Group 128: FUNCTION BLOCKS 3 ............................................................................113
Group 129: FUNCTION BLOCKS 4 ............................................................................113
Group 130: FUNCTION BLOCKS 5 ............................................................................113
Group 135: DDCTool ...................................................................................................114
Group 136: 12-PULSE-OPERATING ..........................................................................115
Group 138: FUNCTION WINDER BLOCKS................................................................118
Group 139: FUNCTION BLOCKS 10 ..........................................................................118

A3
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

General

The entire software is made up of connected function blocks. Each of these individual function
blocks constitutes a subfunction of the overall functionality.

The function blocks can be subdivided into two categories:

• Function blocks which are permanently active, are almost always in use; these are
described on the following pages.
• Function blocks which, although they are available within the software as standard
features, have to be expressly activated when they are needed for special requirements.
These include, for example: AND gates with 2 or 4 inputs, OR gates with 2 or 4 inputs,
adders with 2 or 4 inputs, multipliers/dividers, etc. or closed-control-loop functions, such
as integrator, PI controller, D-T1 element, etc.

All function blocks are characterized by input and output lines, equipped with numbers. These
inputs/outputs can likewise be subdivided into two categories:

Inputs for designating connections Parameters for setting values

(such as ramp-up time / ramp-down time,
controller gain, reference values and others)
DI7 10713 901 DRIVE LOGIC

Output Input RAMP GENERATOR

1708
P2 Value

When you want to alter connections between P4 Value

1709

function blocks, proceed as follows: P6 Value

1710

• first select the input Parameter

• and then connect to output. Default setting
All those connections possessing one dot
each at their beginning and end can be
altered.

For input / parameter selection, the following applies:

• Ignore the two right-hand digits; the remaining digits are the group and to be selected
• The two right-hand digits are the element and to be selected

DI7 10713 Group 107

element 13

The selection can be done with the control panel CDP312, using the (double-up-down) for the
group and the (single-up-down) for the element or a PC-based tool program CMT/DCS500B.

A4
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Parameters of DCS 500

DCS/DCF 500B parameters consist of two types (parameters and inputs) and divided to
several different parameter groups. Parameters / inputs of a certain group belong to the same
functional part of the control program. Maximum number in one group is 99.
(within this manual the word parameter will be used for both types, parameter and input)
Every parameter is described using the same structure, which is shown by their basics below:
name
Parameter of {standard function block} function block (S11/16 ).
Explanation

index data type scal. factor maximum minimum default unit

Name is given in the same format as it is seen on the panel.

Para mentiones the name of the function block using this parameter; at the end of
this line the page of the software diagrams available at the end of the System
Description is given; at some parameters the software version is named this
parameter is available for the first time
Expl description in verbal form
Index of a parameter contains a group number and an element number. Last two
digits are the element number and other numbers before them form the
group number:
101 => parameter group = 1, element = 01
1404 => parameter group = 14, element = 04.
Data type is given with a short code:
FB_I: Input of a function block
FB_P: Parameter of a function block
P: Parameter
I2 16-bit signed integer
E2 Selection parameter
PB packed Boolean value
B Boolean value
U2 16-bit unsigned integer
C4 connection to function block output (signal) or to some parameter
Scaling factor In this table scaling factors are presented using symbols or constants.

scaling factor (=100%) calculation: internal to physical value scaling factor used at (excerpt):
0.001 int.val * 0.001 [unit] ----
0.01 int.val * 0.01 [unit] 5.03, 10.18 and others
0.1 int.val * 0.1 [unit] 4.14, 17.08 and others
1 int.val * 1 [unit] 1.08, 2.02 and others
MCURR ( 4095) int.val * 5.02 [A] / 4095 4.02; 14.06; motor current in A
FCURR ( 4095) int.val * 5.04 [A] / 4095 13.01, 13.05; field current in A
VOLT ( 4095) int.val * 5.07 [V] / 4095 13.11, 15.08; voltage in V
SPEED ( 20000) int.val * 21.03 [RPM] / 20.000 1.02, 17.01; motor speed in RPM
CCURR ( 4095) int.val * 105.09 [A] / 4095 4.09, 3604; converter current in A
TORQ ( 4000) int.val * 100.0 [%] / 4000 4.01, 13.19; motor torque in %
CURR ( 4095) int.val * 100 [%] / 4095 10.13; current in %
FLUX ( 4095) int.val * 100 [%] / 4095 10.02, 10.09; flux in %
EMF ( 3786) int.val * 100 [%] / 3786 10.03, 10.11; motor emf in %
BI not equal to 0 = TRUE
(logic input) 0 = FALSE
BO -1 = TRUE
(logic output) 0 = FALSE

A5
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Maximum HL = high level; is given as internal values

Minimum LL = low level; is given as internal values
Default is given as internal values
Unit either the maximum or the minimum or the default value has to be multiplied
by the scaling factor; then the unit has to be added to that number to get the
physical value

Example: The parameter which is defining nominal voltage of the motor has following
description:

U_MOTN_V
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block (S2/16 | mod in S21.232)
The nominal voltage of the motor in volts. (higher HL in S21.232)
501 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1800 LL: 0 D: 0 U: V

Name U_MOTN_V
Para will be found at the SETTINGS function block, which is shown on the
software diagrams on page 2 out of 16; this parameter has been modified at
software version S21.232 and has still this new function
Expl description in verbal form
Index parameter group = 5, element = 01
Data type FB_P: Parameter of a function block
I2 16-bit signed integer
Scaling factor equal 1
Maximum 1800
Minimum 0
Default 0 (at C1, C2, C3: will be set by the converter automatically)
Unit is Volt; example: HL (= 1800) * SC (= 1) = 1800V

A6
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Signals of DCS 500

DCS/DCF500B signals are divided to several different signal groups. Signals of a certain group
belong to the same functional part of the control program. Maximum number of signals in one
group is 99.
Every signal is described using the same structure, which is shown by their basics below:

Name
Signal of {standard function block} function block (S11/16 ).
Explanation
index data type scal. factor maximum minimum default unit

Name is given in the same format as it is seen on the panel.

Sig mentiones the name of the function block using this signal; at the end of this
line the page of the software diagrams available at the end of the System
Description is given; at some signals the software version is named this
signal is available for the first time
Expl description in verbal form
Index of a signal contains a group number and an element number. Last two digits
are the element number and other numbers before them form the group
number:
10101 => signal group = 101, element = 01
11401 => signal group = 114, element = 01.
Data type is given with a short code:
FB_O: Output of a function block
S: Signal
I2 16-bit signed integer
E2 Selection signal
PB packed Boolean value
B Boolean value
U2 16-bit unsigned integer
Scaling factor see table for parameters
Maximum values are given as internal values for those signals which can be modified
by user.
Minimum values are given as internal values for those signals which can be modified
by user.
Default not used for signals
Unit is given for signals which have an unit.

Example: The signal which is giving the actual motor voltage has following description:

U_ARM_ACT
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Actual voltage of the motor. Scaling based on signal U_NET_DC_NOM
10505 FB_O: I2 SC: VOLT HL: - LL: - D: - U: V
Name U_ARM_ACT
Sig will be found at the SETTINGS function block, which is shown on the
software diagrams on page 2 out of 16
Expl description in verbal form
Index signal group = 105, element = 05
Data type FB_O: Output of a function block
I2 16-bit signed integer
Scaling factor as for VOLT
Maximum not available
Minimum not available
Default not available
Unit is Volt;

A7
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 1: ANALOG INPUTS

AITAC_CONV_MODE
Parameter of AITAC-function block ( S4/16 )
Selector for type of input signal:
0 = DISABLE channel not in use
1 = +/-10V OR +/-20 mA -10...+10V IOB3
-20...+20mA IOB3: S1:1-2 connected
2 = 4...20 mA 4 ... 20mA IOB3: S1:1-2 connected
3 = TACHO VOLT. +/-10V 90...270V IOB1, CON-2: X3:1-4:
30... 90V IOB1, CON-2: X3:2-4:
0 ... 30V IOB1, CON-2: X3:3-4:
101 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 3 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
AITAC_HIGH_VALUE
Parameter of AITAC-function block ( S4/16 ).
Value that corresponds to upper range input signal (+10V/20mA)
102 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: 30000 U: rpm
AITAC_LOW_VALUE
Parameter of AITAC-function block ( S4/16 ).
Value that corresponds to lower range input signal (-10V/0mA/4mA)
103 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: -30000 U: rpm
AI1_CONV_MODE
Parameter of AI1-function block ( S4/16 ).
Selector for type of input signal:
0 = DISABLE, channel not in use
1 = +/-10V OR +/-20 mA -10...+10V IOB1, IOB3, CON-2
-20...+20mA IOB1, CON-2: 500 ohms between X3:5-6
IOB3: S1:3-4 connected
2 = 4...20 mA 4 ... 20mA IOB1, CON-2: 500 ohms between X3:5-6
IOB3: S1:3-4 connected
104 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 2 LL: 0 D: 1 U: -
AI1_HIGH_VALUE
Parameter of AI1-function block ( S4/16 ).
Value that corresponds to upper range input signal (+10V/20mA)
105 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: 20000 U: rpm
AI1_LOW_VALUE
Parameter of AI1-function block ( S4/16 ).
Value that corresponds to lower range input signal (-10V/0mA/4mA)
106 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: -20000 U: rpm

A8
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

AI2_CONV_MODE
Parameter of AI2-function block ( S6/16 ).
Selector for type of input signal:
0 = DISABLE channel not in use
1 = +/-10V +/-20 mA -10...+10V IOB1, CON-2, IOB3
-20...+20mA IOB1, CON-2: 500 ohms between X3:7-8
IOB3: S1:5-6 connected
2 = 4...20 mA 4 ... 20mA IOB1, CON-2: 500 ohms between X3:7-8
IOB3: S1:5-6 connected
3 = 1 x PT100 IOB3: S5:3-4 + S2:1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8
4 = 2 x PT100 IOB3: S5:3-4 + gain = 1
5 = 3 x PT100 IOB3: S5:3-4 + gain = 1
6 = PTC, BOARD IOB3 IOB3: S5:1-2 + gain = 1
7 = PTC, BOARD IOB1 IOB1, CON-2: S1: 23-24 (+10V source)
107 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 7 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
AI2_HIGH_VALUE
Parameter of AI2-function block ( S6/16 ).
Value that corresponds to upper range input signal (+10V/20mA)
108 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: 2000 U: -
AI2_LOW_VALUE
Parameter of AI2-function block ( S6/16 ).
Value that corresponds to lower range input signal (-10V/0mA/4mA)
109 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: -2000 U: -
AI3_CONV_MODE
Parameter of AI3-function block ( S11/16 ).
Selector for type of input signal:
0 = DISABLE channel not in use
1 = +/-10V or +/-20 mA -10...+10V IOB1, IOB3, CON-2
-20...+20mA IOB1, CON-2: 500 ohms between X3:9-10
IOB3: S1:7-8 connected
2 = 4...20 mA 4 ... 20mA IOB1, CON-2: 500 ohms between X3:9-10
IOB3: S1:7-8 connected
3 = 1 x PT100 IOB3: S5:3-4, + S3:1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 conn.
4 = 2 x PT100 IOB3: S5:3-4 + gain = 1
5 = 3 x PT100 IOB3: S5:3-4 + gain = 1
6 = PTC, BOARD IOB3 IOB3: S5:1-2 + gain = 1
110 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 6 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
AI3_HIGH_VALUE
Parameter of AI3-function block (S11/16 ).
Value that corresponds to upper range input signal (+10V/20mA)
111 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: 2000 U: -
AI3_LOW_VALUE
Parameter of AI3-function block (S11/16 ).
Value that corresponds to lower range input signal (-10V/0mA/4mA)
112 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: -2000 U: -

A9
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

AI4_CONV_MODE
Parameter of AI4-function block (S11/16 ).
Selector for type of input signal:
0 = DISABLE channel not in use
1 = +/-10V or +/-20 mA -10...+10V IOB1, CON-2
IOB3: S1:11-12, 13-14 not connected.
-20...+20mA IOB1, CON-2: 500 ohms between X4:1-2
IOB3: S1:9-10 connected
S1:11-12, 13-14 not connected.
2 = 4...20 mA 4 ... 20mA IOB1, CON-2: 500 ohms between X4:1-2
IOB3: S1:9-10 connected
S1:11-12, 13-14 not connected
3 = EARTH FAULT MON. IOB3: S1:9-10 not connected
S1:11-12, 13-14 connected
connection terminals: X3:11, 12
113 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 3 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
AI4_HIGH_VALUE
Parameter of AI4-function block (S11/16 ).
Value that corresponds to upper range input signal (+10V/20mA)
114 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: 2000 U: -
AI4_LOW_VALUE
Parameter of AI4-function block (S11/16 ).
Value that corresponds to lower range input signal (-10V/0mA/4mA)
115 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: -2000 U: -
AI5_CONV_MODE
Parameter of AI5-function block (S11/16 ).
Selector for type of input signal:
0 = DISABLE channel not in use
1 = +/-10V or +/-20 mA -10...+10V SDCS-IOE-1
-20...+20mA SDCS-IOE-1: S1: 3-4 connected
2 = 4...20 mA 4 ... 20mA SDCS-IOE-1: S1: 3-4 connected
116 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 2 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
AI5_HIGH_VALUE
Parameter of AI5-function block (S11/16 ).
Value that corresponds to upper range input signal(+10V/20mA)
117 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: 2000 U: -
AI5_LOW_VALUE
Parameter of AI5-function block (S11/16 ).
Value that corresponds to lower range input signal (-10V/0mA/4mA)
118 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: -2000 U: -
AI6_CONV_MODE
Parameter of AI6-function block (S11/16 ).
Selector for type of input signal:
0 = DISABLE channel not in use
1 = +/-10V or +/-20 mA -10...+10V SDCS-IOE-1
-20...+20mA SDCS-IOE-1: S2: 3-4 connected
2 = 4...20 mA 4 ... 20mA SDCS-IOE-1: S2: 3-4 connected
119 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 2 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
AI6_HIGH_VALUE
Parameter of AI6-function block (S11/16 ).
Value that corresponds to upper range input signal (+10V/20mA)
120 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: 2000 U: -

A 10
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

AI6_LOW_VALUE
Parameter of AI6-function block (S11/16 ).
Value that corresponds to lower range input signal (-10V/0mA/4mA)
121 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: -2000 U: -

A 11
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 2: ANALOG OUTPUTS

AO1.[IN]
Input IN of AO1 function block ( S5/16 ).
Connected to signal which is needed in AO1.
201 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12102 U: -
AO1_NOMINAL_V
Parameter of AO1 function block ( S5/16 ).
Output voltage which corresponds to nominal value of selected signal.
202 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 10000 U: mV
AO1_OFFSET_V
Parameter of AO1 function block ( S5/16 ).
Offset voltage which is added to the output voltage.
203 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 10000 LL: -10000 D: 0 U: mV
AO1_NOMINAL_VAL
Parameter of AO1 function block ( S5/16 ).
The nominal value of the signal which is connected to the IN-input.
204 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 20000 U: -
AO2.[IN]
Input IN of AO2 function block ( S2/16 )
Connected to signal which is needed in AO2.
205 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10505 U: -
AO2_NOMINAL_V
Parameter of AO2 function block ( S2/16 )
Output voltage which corresponds to nominal value of selected signal.
206 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 5000 U: mV
AO2_OFFSET_V
Parameter of AO2 function block ( S2/16 )
Offset voltage which is added to the output voltage.
207 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 10000 LL: -10000 D: 0 U: mV
AO2_NOMINAL_VAL
Parameter of AO2 function block ( S2/16 )
The nominal value of the signal which is connected to the IN-input.
208 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 4095 U: -
DATASET2.[IN1]
Input of DATASET2 function block ( S12/16 )
DATASET 2 is used for data transmission from the drive to the fieldbus master.
When a fieldbus communication module is connected the DCS 500 can transmit a
3 word telegram called DATASET2.[IN1]…[IN3] to a fieldbus master.
DATASET2.[IN1] selects the address of first word of this telegram.
209 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DATASET2.[IN2]
Input of DATASET2 function block ( S12/16 )
DATASET2.[IN2] selects the address of second word of this telegram.
210 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DATASET2.[IN3]
Input of DATASET2 function block ( S12/16 )
DATASET2.[IN3] selects the address of third word of this telegram.
211 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 12
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

DATASET4.[IN1]
Input of DATASET4 function block ( S12/16 )
DATASET 4 is used for data transmission from the drive to the fieldbus master.
When a fieldbus communication module is connected the DCS 500 can transmit a
3 word telegram called DATASET4.[IN1]…[IN3] to a fieldbus master.
DATASET4.[IN1] selects the address of first word of this telegram.
212 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DATASET4.[IN2]
Input of DATASET4 function block ( S12/16 )
DATASET4.[IN2] selects the address of second word of this telegram.
213 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DATASET4.[IN3]
Input of DATASET4 function block ( S12/16 )
DATASET4.[IN3] selects the address of third word of this telegram.
214 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 13
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 3: BRAKE CONTROL

[HOLD_REF]
Input of BRAKE CONTROL-function block. ( S10/16 )
Holding torque used when the drive is running during START_DELAY or STOP_DELAY.
301 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
[BR_RELEASE]
Input of BRAKE CONTROL-function block. ( S10/16 )
The release command for the mechanical brake.
302 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10715 U: -
[MIN_SP_IND]
Input of BRAKE CONTROL-function block. ( S10/16 )
Indicating that speed actual is below a minimum speed limit.
303 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12201 U: -
[ACT_BRAKE]
Input of BRAKE CONTROL-function block. ( S10/16 )
Acknowledge signal from the brake. This input points to the signal, it is connected to. The
logic level on this interconnection is defined as:
0= (brake is closed)
<> = (brake is open).
If the acknowledge is not used, set [ACT_BRAKE] = 0, otherwise connect it to Digital Input
or some other function block. When brake is opened with LIFT_BRAKE (10304) output,
[ACT_BRAKE] has to indicate OPEN-status within 5 seconds, if not, the drive will trip.
304 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
START_DELAY
Parameter of BRAKE CONTROL-function block. ( S10/16 )
When start command is given, speed reference is released after START_DELAY has
elapsed.
305 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: ms
STOP_DELAY
Parameter of BRAKE CONTROL-function block. ( S10/16 )
When stop command is given, current control is blocked when STOP_DELAY has
elapsed.
306 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: ms
HOLD_TORQ
Parameter of BRAKE CONTROL-function block. ( S10/16 )
Torque reference used when the drive is running during START_DELAY or STOP_DELAY
if [HOLD_REF] is not connected.
307 FB_P: I2 SC: TORQ HL: 16000 LL: -16000 D: 0 U: %
EMESTOP_BRAKE
Parameter of BRAKE CONTROL-function block. ( S10/16 )
Selects the function of mechanical brake in emergency stop situation:
0 = DISABLE (brake is activated when speed is zero)
1 = ENABLE (brake is activated immediately).
308 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 14
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 4: CURRENT CONTROL

[TORQ_REF]
Input of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
401 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12402 U: -
[CURR_REF]
Input of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Either current or torque reference is used depending on value of REF_TYPE_SEL-
parameter.
402 FB_I: C4 SC:MCURR HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12526 U: -
[CURR_STEP]
Input of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Additional current/torque reference added to the main reference.
403 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12527 U: -
[BLOCK]
Input of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
A block-command for the current controller. The controller will try to decrease the
armature current to zero as fast as possible.
404 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
REF_TYPE_SEL
Parameter of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Selector for the main reference:
0 = TORQ_REF
1 = CURR_REF
405 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
ARM_CURR_REF_SLOPE
Parameter of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
The maximum slope of the current reference (di/dt). Given as largest amount for
reference change during 3.3 ms (2.7 ms in 60Hz supply).
406 FB_P: I2 SC:MCURR HL: 4100 LL: 0 D: 1366 U: A
ARM_CURR_PI_KP
Parameter of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Proportional gain for PI-type current controller:
output = ARM_CURR_PI_KP * error / 256.
407 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 2977 LL: 3 D: 300 U: -
ARM_CURR_PI_KI
Parameter of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Integration gain for PI-type current controller:
Time constant = 16384 * 3,33 / ARM_CURR_PI_KI (50 Hz supply)
16384 * 2,77 / ARM_CURR_PI_KI (60 Hz supply).
408 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 31968 LL: 0 D: 3200 U: -
ARM_CONT_CURR_LIM
Parameter of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Current level where current changes from discontinous to continous. Value is set by
the auto-tuning or manual tuning function of the current controller.
409 FB_P: I2 SC: CCURR HL: 4100 LL: 0 D: 2050 U: A

A 15
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

ARM_L
Parameter of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Relative inductance of armature circuit. Value is set by the auto-tuning or manual tuning
function of the current controller.
ARM_L = LA [mH] * I_CONV_A * 245 / (U_SUPPLY * 3,33) (50 Hz supply)
LA [mH] * I_CONV_A * 245 / (U_SUPPLY * 2,77) (60 Hz supply).
410 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
ARM_R
Parameter of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Relative resistance of armature circuit. Value is set by the auto-tuning or manual tuning
function of the current controller.
ARM_R = 22444 * RA [ohm] * I_CONV_A / U_SUPPLY.
411 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
ARM_ALPHA_LIM_MAX
Parameter of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Max. firing angle in degrees.
412 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 165 LL: 0 D: 150 U: -
ARM_ALPHA_LIM_MIN
Parameter of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Min. firing angle in degrees.
413 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 165 LL: 0 D: 15 U: -
DXN
Parameter of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Additional commutation reserve proportional to the armature current.
414 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.1 HL: 150 LL: 0 D: 0 U: %
[ARM_CURR_LIM_P]
Input of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Positive limitation of current control block.
415 FB_I: C4 SC:MCURR HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12307 U: -
[ARM_CURR_LIM_N]
Input of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
Negative limitation of current control block.
416 FB_I: C4 SC:MCURR HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12308 U: -
ARM_CURR_CLAMP
Parameter of CURRENT CONTROL-function block. ( S7/16 )
If |ARM_CURR_ACT| < ARM_CURR_CLAMP then ARM_CURR_ACT (10502) = 0.
417 FB_P: I2 SC: CCURR HL: 40 LL: 0 D: 40 U: A
CURRENT_RISE_MAX
Parameter of the CURRENT CONTROL-function block. (S7/16 | S21.232)
Determines the amount of current the actual current of one after another current bubble
may differ. This setting is used to calculate the current rise monitoring function.
418 FB_P: I2 SC:MCURR HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 32767 U: A
ZERO_CUR_DETECT
Parameter of the CURRENT CONTROL-function block. (S7/16 | S21.232)
Selector to enable the use of the zero current detection based on the option board SDCS-
CZD-1. This board uses the thyristor blocking voltage.
0 = DISABLED (internal zero current detection on SDCS-CON-x in use)
1 = ENABLED (option board SDCS-CZD-1 is used)
419 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 16
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

CUR_RIPPLE_MONIT
Parameter of the CURRENT CONTROL-function block. (S7/16 | S21.232)
Selector for the current ripple monitoring function:
0 = METHOD 1 plus ALARM message
1 = METHOD 1 plus ERROR message
2 = METHOD 2 plus ALARM message(recommended for DCF 500B)
3 = METHOD 2 plus ERROR message (recommended for DCF 500B)
420 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 3 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
CUR_RIPPLE_LIM
Parameter of the CURRENT CONTROL-function block. (S7/16 | S21.232)
Threshold for the current ripple monitor function. Dependent on the method selected
current bubbles compared to each other have to be less different to avoid an alarm or error
message. If method 2 is selected, set this parameter to a value higher than
ARM_CURR_REF_SLOPE otherwise an indication will be displayed all time.
421 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.1 HL: 1500 LL: 0 D: 7 U: %

A 17
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 5: CONVERTER AND MOTOR

U_MOTN_V
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block (S2/16 | mod in S21.232)
The nominal voltage of the motor in volts. (higher HL in S21.232)
501 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1800 LL: 0 D: 0 U: V
I_MOTN_A
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
The nominal current of the motor in amperes is set by this parameter for 6 pulse drives.
Half of the nominal current of the motor in A is set by this parameter for 12 pulse drives!
Notice that when this value is changed, all motor current parameters and signals
will have different values when they are shown in [A] in the panel or in
CMT/DCS 500:
ARM_CURR_REF_SLP, CURRENT_RISE_MAX, MODEL1.CURR,
MODEL2.CURR, ARM_CURR_LIM_P, ARM_CURR_LIM_N,
MAX_CURR_LIM_N1-5, ARM_CURR_REF, ARM_CURR_ACT,
REF_DCF, CURR_LIM_P, CURR_LIM_N,
Arm.Curr.Slave, Arm.CURR.Both, Curr.-Ref.1,
Curr.-Ref.2.
502 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: A
I_MOT1_FIELDN_A
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block (S2/16 | mod in S21.232)
The nominal field current of motor 1 in 0.01 Amperes. (lower HL in S21.232)
Notice that when this value is changed, all motor 1 field current parameters and
signals will have different values when they are shown in [A] in the panel or in
CMT/DCS 500:
F1_CURR_GT_MIN_L, F1_OVERCURR_L, F1_RED.REF,
OPTI.REF_MIN_L, REV.REV_HYST,
F1_CURR_REF, F1_CURR_ACT.
503 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 16380 LL: 0 D: 30 U: A
I_MOT2_FIELDN_A
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block (S2/16 | mod in S21.232)
The nominal field current of motor 2 in 0.01 Amperes. (lower HL in S21.232)
Notice that when this value is changed, all motor 2 field current parameters and
signals will have different values when they are shown in [A] in the panel or in
CMT/DCS 500:
F2_CURR_GT_MIN_L, F2_OVERCURR_L, F2_RED.REF,
F2_CURR_REF, F2_CURR_ACT.
504 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 16380 LL: 0 D: 30 U: A

A 18
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

FEXC_SEL
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Selection for the type of the field exciter or the type of acknowledgement signal from old
field exciters:
0 = NO FIELD EXCITER
1 = DIODE FIELD EXC.
2 = FEX2 OR FEX3 HW: only one field exciter (see Technical Data) as Node 1;
SW: MOTOR1_FIELD (10ms update time)
3 = FEX3 FOR MOTOR2 HW: only one field exciter (no SDCS-FEX-2) as Node 2;
SW: MOTOR2_FIELD (100ms update time)
4 = FEX2/3 + MOT2=FEX3 HW: possibility of 2 and 3; SW: MOTOR1 + 2_FIELD
5 = FIELD ACK VIA DI SW: MOTOR1_FIELD
6 = FIELD ACK VIA AI SW: MOTOR1_FIELD
505 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 6 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
PHASE_SEQ_CW
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
The phase order of converter supply voltage. If measured phase order does not match
with this parameter, fault 38 "Phase sequence fault" is generated.
1 = R-T-S
2 = R-S-T
506 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 2 LL: 1 D: 2 U: -
U_SUPPLY
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block (S2/16 | mod in S21.232)
Nominal value of converter supply voltage. (higher HL in S21.232)
507 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1400 LL: 0 D: 0 U: V
U_NET_MIN1
Parameter of CONVERTER_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Upper limit for supply undervoltage monitoring in %. If supply voltage falls below this limit,
controllers are blocked. Undervoltage trip is generated if network voltage does not return
to a higher value than U_NET_MIN1 during time defined by PWR_DOWN_TIME.
508 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 130 LL: 0 D: 80 U: %
U_NET_MIN2
Parameter of CONVERTER_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Lower limit for supply undervoltage monitoring in %. If supply voltage falls below this limit,
the drive will trip immediately.
509 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 130 LL: 0 D: 60 U: %
PWR_DOWN_TIME
Parameter of CONVERTER_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
During this time the supply voltage must return to a value higher than U_NET_MIN1.
Otherwise an undervoltage trip will be generated.
510 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 5000 LL: 0 D: 5000 U: ms
ARM_OVERVOLT_LEV
Parameter of CONVERTER_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Armature overvoltage tripping level in % of nominal voltage of motor.
511 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 150 LL: 20 D: 110 U: %
ARM_OVERCURR_LEV
Parameter of CONVERTER_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Armature overcurrent tripping level in % of converter nominal current.
512 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 230 LL: 20 D: 230 U: %

A 19
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

EMF_FILT_TC
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Filter time constant for calculated EMF before EMF-controller.
513 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 10 U: ms
EARTH.CURR_SEL
Parameter of CONVERTER_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Selection for earth fault monitoring:
0 = DISABLE
1 = ENABLE.
514 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
EARTH.FLT_LEV
Parameter of CONVERTER_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Earth fault current tripping level in amperes.
515 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 20 LL: 0 D: 4 U: A
EARTH.FLT_DLY
Parameter of CONVERTER_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
The time after the earth fault is activated.
516 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 10 U: ms
SET_I_CONV_A
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
The nominal current of the converter.

Note: This parameter overwrites the nominal current of the converter defined by
type code resistors !
0 = type code resistors are in use
> 0 = value of this parameter is used.
517 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: A
SET_U_CONV_V
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
The nominal voltage of the converter.

Note: This parameter overwrites the nominal voltage of the converter defined by
type code resistors !
0 = type code resistors are in use
> 0 = value of this parameter is used.
518 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 2000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: V
SET_MAX_BR_TEMP
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
The tripping level for the converter heat sink temperature monitoring.

Note: This parameter overwrites the max bridge temperature of the converter defined by
type code resistors !
0 = type code resistors are in use
> 0 = value of this parameter is used.
519 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 150 LL: 0 D: 0 U: C

A 20
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

SET_CONV_TYPE
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
The type of the converter.

Note: This parameter overwrites the type of the converter defined by type code resistors !
0: (type code resistors are in use)
1: (C1 construction type converter)
2: (C2 construction type converter)
3 (C3 construction type converter)
4: (C4 construction type converter)
520 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
SET_QUADR_TYPE
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
The type of the converter.

Note: This parameter overwrites the type of the converter defined by type code resistors !
0: (type code resistors are in use)
1: (ONE_QUADRANT type converter DCx 501)
4: (FOUR_QUADRANT type converter DCx 502)
521 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
LANGUAGE
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Selects the language used for alarm/warning texts in the panel / CMT.
0 = ENGLISH
1 = GERMAN
2 = ITALIAN
3 = SPANISH
4 = FRENCH
522 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
CURR_ACT_FILT_TC
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Filter time constant for calculated CONV_CURR_ACT (10501) and ARM_CURR_ACT
(10502).
523 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 100 LL: 0 D: 0 U: ms
PLL_CONTROL
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block. (S2/16 | S21.230)
The network is reproduced by a software PLL system. If the frequency or the phase shift of
the network changes in comparison to the PLL, the PLL system has to be corrected. The
gain of this correction is set by this parameter.
524 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 6 LL: 1 D: 4 U: -
UNI_FILT_TC
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block (S2/16 | S21.232)
Filter time constant to smooth the feedforward control of the firing angle based on the line
voltage signal. Line voltage variations will be compensated with a time delay.
525 FB_P: I2 SC: 1.0 HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 10 U: ms
OFFSET_UDC
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block (S2/16 | S21.232)
The calculated EMF signal used for speed control at the SPEED_MEASUREMENT
function block can be offset compensated with this parameter.
526 FB_P: I2 SC: 1.0 HL: 81 LL: -80 D: 0 U: -

A 21
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

CONV_TEMP_DELAY
Parameter of CONVERTER_PROTECTION function block (S2/16 | S21.232)
This parameter delays the converter power part overtemperature function, if the option
board PW 1002 is used. This board can be used together with DCP type converters or
together with DCR kits. In default condition the delay is switched off. If the value is > 0 F03
and A105 are enabled and F04 is disabled.
527 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: s
PLL_DEV_LIM
Parameter of SETTINGS-function block (S2/16 | S21.232)
At weak networks or high overload of the converter the duration of two successive line
periods may differ. In this case the error message “not in synchronism” may be generated.
This parameter specifies the threshold for F31.
528 FB_P: I2 SC: 1.0 HL: 2048 LL: 612 D: 1024 U: -

A 22
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 6: DATA LOGGER

DLOG.[IN1]
Input of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Selects the signal which is measured in channel 1.
601 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12102 U: -
DLOG.[IN2]
Input of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Selects the signal which is measured in channel 2.
602 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10501 U: -
DLOG.[IN3]
Input of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Selects the signal which is measured in channel 3.
603 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10505 U: -
DLOG.[IN4]
Input of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Selects the signal which is measured in channel 4.
604 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10504 U: -
DLOG.[IN5]
Input of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Selects the signal which is measured in channel 5.
605 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 11302 U: -
DLOG.[IN6]
Input of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Selects the signal which is measured in channel 6.
606 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10401 U: -
DLOG.TRIGG_COND
Parameter of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Selects the triggering condition for the data logger:
0 = EXTERNAL
1 = FAULT or EXT
2 = DIFFERENCE
3 = MAX
4 = MIN
607 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 1 U: -
DLOG.TRIGG_VALUE
Parameter of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Reference value that will be used if the trigger condition DLOG.TRIGG_CONT is set to
DIFFERENCE, MAX or MIN
608 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: 20000 U: -
DLOG.TRIGG_DELAY
Parameter of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Number of samples collected after triggering instant. Length of data logger is 1000
samples in each channel.
609 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 1000 LL: 0 D: 200 U: -
DLOG.SAMPL_INT
Parameter of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Sampling interval defining how often a measurement is made in each channel.
610 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1000 LL: 1 D: 3 U: ms

A 23
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

DLOG.TRIG
Input of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Selects the signal which trigger the datalogger
611 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DLOG.STOP
Input of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Selects the signal which stop the datalogger.
612 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DLOG.RESTART
Input of DATA_LOGGER-function block. ( S14/16 )
Selects the signal which restart the datalogger.
613 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 24
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 8: DIGITAL OUTPUTS

DO1.[IN]
Input of DO1-function block. ( S3/16 )
Normal input.
801 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10908 U: -
DO1.[INV_IN]
Input of DO1-function block. ( S3/16 )
Inverted input.
802 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DO2.[IN]
Input of DO2-function block. ( S3/16 )
Normal input.
803 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10909 U: -
DO2.[INV_IN]
Input of DO2-function block. ( S3/16 )
Inverted input.
804 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DO3.[IN]
Input of DO3-function block. ( S3/16 )
Normal input.
805 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10910 U: -
DO3.[INV_IN]
Input of DO3-function block. ( S3/16 )
Inverted input.
806 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DO4.[IN]
Input of DO4-function block. ( S3/16 )
Normal input.
807 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10902 U: -
DO4.[INV_IN]
Input of DO4-function block. ( S3/16 )
Inverted input.
808 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DO5.[IN]
Input of DO5-function block. ( S3/16 )
Normal input.
809 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10903 U: -
DO5.[INV_IN]
Input of DO5-function block. ( S3/16 )
Inverted input.
810 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DO6.[IN]
Input of DO6-function block. ( S3/16 )
Normal input.
811 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DO6.[INV_IN]
Input of DO6-function block. ( S3/16 )
Inverted input.
812 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 25
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

DO7.[IN]
Input of DO7-function block. ( S3/16 )
Normal input.
813 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DO7.[INV_IN]
Input of DO7-function block. ( S3/16 )
Inverted input.
814 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DO8.[IN]
Input of DO8-function block. ( S3/16 )
Normal input.
815 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10910 U: -
DO8.[INV_IN]
Input of DO8-function block. ( S3/16 )
Inverted input.
816 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 26
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 9: DRIVE LOGIC

[ON/OFF]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Control of the main contactor.
901 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10713 U: -
[RUN1]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
One of three RUN-commands. All run commands release controllers of the drive.
902 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10715 U: -
[RUN2]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
One of three RUN-commands. All run commands release controllers of the drive.
903 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 11902 U: -
[RUN3]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
One of three RUN-commands. All run commands release controllers of the drive.
904 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
[COAST_STOP]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Coast stop-command. This command will stop the drive so that the motor is left running
and friction together with the load will decelerate the speed to zero.
905 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
[EME_STOP]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Emergency stop-command. This command will stop the drive in a way which is defined
with the parameter EME_STOP_MODE (917).
906 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10709 U: -
[RESET]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Reset-command. This command will reset all fault memories if corresponding fault
indication is not active any more.
907 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10711 U: -
[START_INHIBIT]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Start inhibit-command. This command will disable ON- and RUN-commands to the drive.
If the drive is running when this command is activated, the current controler tries to
decrease the current to zero as fast as possible. If a 12 pulse parallel configuration is in
use, please check signal LOGIK_F.INHIBIT (13616).
908 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
[DISABLE_LOCAL]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Disable local-command. This command will disable local control of the drive from either a
panel or CMT.
909 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
[ACK_CONV_FAN]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
An acknowledge signal from converter fan contactor. The drive will not start if there is no
acknowledge from the converter fan contactor after the FAN_ON (10908)-command.
910 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10701 U: -

A 27
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

[ACK_MOTOR_FAN]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
An acknowledge signal from motor fan contactor. The drive will not start if there is no
acknowledge from the motor fan contactor after the FAN_ON (10908)-command.
911 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10703 U: -
[ACK_MAIN_CONT]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
An acknowledge signal from main contactor. The drive will not start if there is no
acknowledge from the main contactor after the MAIN_CONT_ON (10910)-command.
912 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10705 U: -
[MOTOR 2]
Input of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
This signal activates the second parameter set. The drive has two parameter sets in the
memory. Active parameter set is selected with this signal:
0 = Parameter set nr. 1
<>0 = Parameter set nr. 2
913 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
FIELD_HEAT_SEL
Parameter of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Selects if field heating is used when the drive is not running:
0 = DISABLE
1 = ENABLE
914 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
MAIN_CONT_MODE
Parameter of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Selects the command used to control the main contactor:
0 = CLOSE WHEN ON + RUN (both ON and RUN needed)
1 = CLOSE WHEN ON
915 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 1 U: -
STOP_MODE
Parameter of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Selects the operation when RUN-command is removed:
0 = STOP BY RAMP (decelerate with ramp generator)
1 = STOP BY TORQ LIM (decelerate with torque limit)
2 = STOP BY COASTING (make a coast stop)
916 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 2 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
EME_STOP_MODE
Parameter of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Selects the operation when emergency stop-command is activated:
0 = STOP BY RAMP (decelerate with ramp generator)
1 = STOP BY TORQ LIM (decelerate with torque limit)
2 = STOP BY COASTING (make a coast stop)
3 = STOP BY DYN.BRAKE (use dynamic braking)
917 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 3 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 28
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

PANEL_DISC_MODE
Parameter of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Selects the operation when the panel or CMT communication is disconnected during local
operation:
0 = STOP BY RAMP (decelerate with ramp generator)
1 = STOP BY TORQ LIM (decelerate with torque limit)
2 = STOP BY COASTING (make a coast stop)
3 = STOP BY DYN.BRAKE (use dynamic braking)
4 = CONTINUE REMOTE (change to remote control)
918 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
PWR_LOSS_MODE
Parameter of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Selects if the auto-reclosing function is used when the power is disconnected for a short
time:
0 = DISABLE
1 = ENABLE
919 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
COMFAULT_MODE
Parameter of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Specifies the reaction of the drive after occurrance of a communication fault.
When a fieldbus communication module detects a communication fault these reaction
of the DCS 500 can be selected:
0 = STOP BY RAMP (decelerate with ramp generator)
1 = STOP BY TORQ LIM (decelerate with torque limit)
2 = STOP BY COASTING (make a coast stop)
3 = NOTHING (no action)
920 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 3 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
COMFAULT_TIMEOUT
Parameter of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
Sets sets the communication timeout counter.
It can be adjusted in 20 ms steps from
0 = disable fieldbus timeout (F60) supervision
1 = 1 * 20 ms to
150 = 150 * 20 ms = 3 sec
921 FB_P: I2 SC: 20 HL: 150 LL: 0 D: 2 U: ms

A 29
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 10: EMF CONTROL

FIELD_MODE
Parameter of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
Selects the operating mode of motor field control:
0 = CONSTANT FIELD No EMF-control (constant field) without field
reversal.
1 = EMF, NO FIELD REV EMF-control without field reversal.
2 = NO EMF, FIELD REV No EMF-control (constant field) with field
reversal.
3 = EMF+FIELD REV EMF-control with field reversal.
4 = NO EMF, OPTITORQUE OPTITORQUE without EMF-control.
5 = EMF+OPTITORQUE OPTITORQUE with EMF-control.
1001 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 5 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
[FLUX_REF]
Input of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
This is an input for flux reference. EMF CONTROL-block is using either flux or EMF
reference.
1002 FB_I: C4 SC: FLUX HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12512 U: -
[EMF_REF]
Input of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
This is an input for EMF reference. EMF CONTROL-block is using either flux or EMF
reference.
1003 FB_I: C4 SC: EMF HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12509 U: -
[FLUX_REF_SEL]
Input of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
This is an input for flux reference selection. It will select either [FLUX_REF] input or
constant reference of 100%.
0 = internal reference
<>0 = [FLUX_REF] input.
1004 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
[EMF_REF_SEL]
Input of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
This is an input for EMF reference selection. It will select either [EMF_REF] input or
LOCAL_EMF_REF-parameter.
0 = LOCAL_EMF_REF-parameter
<>0 = [EMF_REF] input.
1005 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
LOCAL_EMF_REF
Parameter of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
Sets the value of local EMF reference.
1006 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 150 LL: 0 D: 100 U: %
EMF_KP
Parameter of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
Proportional gain of the EMF controller. Gain is reduced above field weakening point with
a factor 1/n to keep the process gain constant. Scaling:
150 = gain is 54 %
277 = gain is 100 %.
1007 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 999 LL: 1 D: 150 U: -

A 30
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

EMF_KI
Parameter of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
Integral action time of the EMF controller. Scaling:
TC = 147200 / EMF_KI;
1008 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 20000 LL: 0 D: 4905 U: ms
EMF_REG_LIM_P
Parameter of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
Positive limit for EMF controller output.
1009 FB_P: I2 SC: FLUX HL: 4095 LL: 0 D: 410 U: %
EMF_REG_LIM_N
Parameter of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
Negative limit for EMF controller output.
1010 FB_P: I2 SC: FLUX HL: 0 LL: -4095 D: -4095 U: %
EMF_REL_LEV
Parameter of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
EMF controller blocking level. When measured EMF is below this level, the EMF-controller
is blocked.
1011 FB_P: I2 SC: EMF HL: 1000 LL: 0 D: 50 U: %
FIELD_WEAK_POINT
Parameter of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
Speed of the motor where flux reference reduction is started.
1012 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 23000 LL: 4000 D: 20000 U: rpm
FIELD_CONST_1
Parameter of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
Field current reference which produces 40% flux in motor
(default: 29% of nominal field current).
1013 FB_P: I2 SC: CURR HL: 4095 LL: 0 D: 1187 U: %
FIELD_CONST_2
Parameter of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
Field current reference which produces 70% flux in motor
(default: 53% of nominal field current).
1014 FB_P: I2 SC: CURR HL: 4095 LL: 0 D: 2190 U: %
FIELD_CONST_3
Parameter of EMF CONTROL-function block. ( S8/16 )
Field current reference which produces 90% flux in motor
(default: 79% of nominal field current).
1015 FB_P: I2 SC: CURR HL: 4095 LL: 0 D: 3255 U: %
GENER.EMF_REF
Parameter of EMF_CONTROL-function block (S8/16 | S21.232)
This parameter has a similar function than LOCAL_EMF_REF. It sets the value of the local
EMF reference, if the drive is in regenerative mode. This function becomes active, if the
value is lower than the one of LOCAL_EMF_REF.
In case this value is lower than the one of LOCAL_EMF_REF, but GENER.WEAK_POINT
is still higher than FIELD_WEAK_POINT the converter will block the other bridge until the
motor voltage has dropped below the level set by GENER.WEAK_POINT. The drive is
coasting and the speed normally will go down.
1016 FB_P: I2 SC: 1.0 HL: 160 LL: 0 D: 160 U: %

A 31
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

GENER.WEAK_POINT
Parameter of EMF_CONTROL-function block (S8/16 | S21.232)
This parameter has a similar function than FIELD_WEAK_POINT. It specifies the speed of
the motor where flux reference reduction is started, if the drive is in regenerative mode.
This function becomes active, if the value is lower than the one of FIELD_WEAK_POINT.
1017 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 23100 LL: 3400 D: 23100 U: rpm
FIELD_WEAK_DELAY
Parameter of EMF_CONTROL-function block (S8/16 | S21.233)
This parameter defines a time delay, which will delay a reduction of the field current in
case different field weakening points are set (see GENER.EMF_REF /
GENER.WEAK_POINT) and the drive starts field weakening very often because of a high
gain at the speed controller. This time delay will give the speed controller a chance to
“correct” himself and avoid a bridge reversal.
1018 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 100 LL: 0 D: 0 U: s

A 32
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 11: FAULTS, ALARMS

USER_EVENT1.[IN]
Input of EVENT1-function block. ( S15/16 )
Activates logging of an external alarm or fault into the Fault Logger.
1101 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
USER_EVENT1.TYPE
Parameter of EVENT1-function block. ( S15/16 )
Selects the type of external event:
0 = FAULT:TRIPLEVEL 1 (main, field and fan contactors are opened)
1 = FAULT:TRIPLEVEL 2 (main and field contactors are opened)
2 = FAULT:TRIPLEVEL 3 (main contactor is opened)
3 = ALARM: (only alarm indication)
4 = EVENT: (only logging to Fault Logger).
1102 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
USER_EVENT1.TEXT
Parameter of EVENT1-function block. ( S15/16 )
This parameter shows the event´s name: EXT. IND. 1
1103 FB_P: - SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
USER_EVENT1.DLY
Parameter of EVENT1-function block. ( S15/16 )
Selects the activation delay.
External event has to be active for longer than the activation delay until it is accepted.
1104 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: s
USER_EVENT2.[IN]
Input of EVENT2-function block. ( S15/16 )
Activates logging of an external alarm or fault into the Fault Logger.
1105 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
USER_EVENT2.TYPE
Parameter of EVENT2-function block. ( S15/16 )
Selects the type of external event:
(see USER_EVENT1.TYPE for available values).
1106 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
USER_EVENT2.TEXT
Parameter of EVENT2-function block. ( S15/16 )
This parameter shows the event´s name: EXT. IND. 2
1107 FB_P: - SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
USER_EVENT2.DLY
Parameter of EVENT2-function block. ( S15/16 )
Selects the activation delay.
External event has to be active for longer than the activation delay until it is accepted.
1108 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: s
USER_EVENT3.[IN]
Input of EVENT3-function block. ( S15/16 )
Activates logging of an external alarm or fault into the Fault Logger.
1109 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
USER_EVENT3.TYPE
Parameter of EVENT3-function block. ( S15/16 )
Selects the type of external event:
(see USER_EVENT1.TYPE for available values).
1110 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 33
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

USER_EVENT3.TEXT
Parameter of EVENT3-function block. ( S15/16 )
This parameter shows the event´s name: EXT. IND. 3
1111 FB_P: - SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
USER_EVENT3.DLY
Parameter of EVENT3-function block. ( S15/16 )
Selects the activation delay.
External event has to be active for longer than the activation delay until it is accepted.
1112 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: s
USER_EVENT4.[IN]
Input of EVENT4-function block. ( S15/16 )
Activates logging of an external alarm or fault into the Fault Logger.
1113 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
USER_EVENT4.TYPE
Parameter of EVENT4-function block. ( S15/16 )
Selects the type of external event:
(see USER_EVENT1.TYPE for available values).
1114 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
USER_EVENT4.TEXT
Parameter of EVENT4-function block. ( S15/16 )
This parameter shows the event´s name: EXT. IND. 4
1115 FB_P: - SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
USER_EVENT4.DLY
Parameter of EVENT4-function block. ( S15/16 )
Selects the activation delay.
External event has to be active for longer than the activation delay until it is accepted.
1116 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: s
USER_EVENT5.[IN]
Input of EVENT5-function block. ( S15/16 )
Activates logging of an external alarm or fault into the Fault Logger.
1117 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
USER_EVENT5.TYPE
Parameter of EVENT5-function block. ( S15/16 )
Selects the type of external event:
(see USER_EVENT1.TYPE for available values).
1118 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
USER_EVENT5.TEXT
Parameter of EVENT5-function block. ( S15/16 )
This parameter shows the event´s name: EXT. IND. 5
1119 FB_P: - SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
USER_EVENT5.DLY
Parameter of EVENT5-function block. ( S15/16 )
Selects the activation delay.
External event has to be active for longer than the activation delay until it is accepted.
1120 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: s
USER_EVENT6.[IN]
Input of EVENT6-function block. ( S15/16 )
Activates logging of an external alarm or fault into the Fault Logger.
1121 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 34
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

USER_EVENT6.TYPE
Parameter of EVENT6-function block. ( S15/16 )
Selects the type of external event:
(see USER_EVENT1.TYPE for available values).
1122 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
USER_EVENT6.TEXT
Parameter of EVENT6-function block. ( S15/16 )
This parameter shows the event´s name: EXT. IND. 6
1123 FB_P: - SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
USER_EVENT6.DLY
Parameter of EVENT6-function block. ( S15/16 )
Selects the activation delay.
External event has to be active for longer than the activation delay until it is accepted.
1124 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: s

A 35
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 12: MAINTENANCE

DRIVEMODE
Parameter of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )

This parameter is used to start special drive functions like autotuning for controllers.
After the drive function has completed DRIVEMODE changes to value 0. If an error occurs
during drive function, DRIVEMODE is set to value 12. The reason for the error can be
seen from the signal COMMIS_STAT1 (11201).
Following drive functions are available:
0 = NOT ACTIVATED (No function is active)
1 = CLEAR FAULT LOGG. (Clear the contents of Fault Logger)
2 = CALC PROGRAM LOAD (Calculate the processor load)
3 = ARM. AUTOTUNING (Autotuning of armature current controller)
4 = ARM. MAN. TUNING (Manual tuning of armature current controller)
5 = FEX2/3 AUTOTUNING (Autotuning of the first field exciter
6 = MOT2 FEXC AUTOTUN (Autotuning of the second field exciter
7 = FEXC2/3 MAN.TUNIN (Manual tuning of the first field exciter)
8 = MOT2 FEXC MAN.TUN (Manual tuning of the second field exciter)
9 = SPD LOOP MAN.TUN (Manual tuning of the speed loop)
10 = EMF CNTR MAN.TUN (Manual tuning of EMF controller

Following value is shown during PROGRAM_LOAD-function:

11 = WAIT A MOMENT…

Following value is shown if autotuning fails:

12 = FAILED, SEE 112-01
1201 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 10 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
CMT_DCS500_ADDR
Parameter of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
The node address of the drive in the communication link for CMT/DCS 500 PC-tool.
The new value is effective only after the power is switched off and on again.
1202 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 250 LL: 1 D: 250 U: -
DRIVE_ID
Parameter of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
This parameter is reserved for future extensions. As long as a panel CDP 312 and a DCS
500B converter is connected to each other this parameter has to be kept to default. It will
give a "name" to a drive in a multidrive system.
1203 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 31 LL: 1 D: 1 U: -
POT1_VALUE
Parameter of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
Constant test reference 1 for the manual tuning function.
1204 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: 1000 U: -
POT2_VALUE
Parameter of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
Constant test reference 2 for the manual tuning function.
1205 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: 0 U: -
PERIOD_BTW.POT1/2
Parameter of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
The time period of square wave generator for the manual tuning function.
1206 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 30000 LL: 1 D: 100 U: s

A 36
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

WRITE_ENABLE_KEY
Parameter of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
Save the parameter access
This is the key number
1207 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1000 LL: 1 D: 358 U: -
WRITE_ENABLE_PIN
Parameter of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
Save the parameter access
This is the personality identify number. Parameter access is only possible if
WRITE_ENABLE_KEY and WRITE_ENABLE_PIN numbers are equal.
1208 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1000 LL: 1 D: 358 U: -
SELECT_OPER.SYST.
Parameter of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
Select the operation mode of converter:
0 = 6P-SINGLE (6-pulse single mode, default)
1 = 12P-MASTER (12-pulse master mode)
2 = 12P-SLAVE (12-pulse slave mode)
1209 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 2 LL: 0 D: 0 U:-
ACTUAL VALUE 1
Input of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
Pointer to actual value 1 on panel.
1210 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12103 U: -
ACTUAL VALUE 2
Input of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
Pointer to actual value 2 on panel.
1211 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10501 U: -
ACTUAL VALUE 3
Input of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
Pointer to actual value 3 on panel.
1212 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10505 U: -
FIELDBUS NODE ADDR
Parameter of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
In case a field bus module Nxxx-0x is used keep this parameter to default. If a serial link
has to be established please handle this parameter according to the AC70 documentation.
1213 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 255 LL:1 D: 1 U: -
MACRO_SELECT
Parameter of MAINTENANCE-function block. ( S2/16 )
Select the macros:
0 = NONE (no macro selected)
1 = MACRO 1 (macro 1 selected)
2 = MACRO 2 (macro 2 selected)
3 = MACRO 3 (macro 3 selected)
4 = MACRO 4 (fieldbus macro selected)
1214 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 37
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

DCF MODE
Parameter of DCF_FIELDMODE-function block (S2/16 | S21.232)
Selects the control configuration for the DCF mode used for high inductive loads:
0 = DISABLE
1 = DCF CURR CONTROL Current controller adapted for high inductive load
2 = STAND ALONE functionality of (1) plus monitoring of overvoltage
protection DCF 506
3 = Reserved
4 = FEXLINK NODE 1 functionality of (2) plus reading of references /
commands via X16 as first field exciter
5 = FEXLINK NODE 2 functionality of (2) plus reading of references /
commands via X16 as second field exciter
6 = MG-SET functionality of (2) plus transfer of references /
commands via X16 to other field exciter(s)
1215 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 6 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
DI/OVP
Input of DCF_FIELDMODE-function block (S2/16 | S21.232)
Based on the wiring diagram example the relay contact of the overvoltage protection DCF
506 is connected to the digital input 2 of the SDCS-CON-2 board. By default this hardware
input is connected to the input of the DCF fieldmode block. In case a different hardware
input is used, adapt the interconnection!
1216 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10703 U: -
OVP_SELECT
Parameter of DCF_FIELDMODE-function block (S2/16 | S21.232)
If the overvoltage protection unit DCF 506 has triggered because of an overvoltage
condition the reaction of the converter can be selected by this parameter:
0 = OVP ALARM indication and blocking of current controller; controller is
released, when trigger signal goes back to logic “0” level
1 = OVP FAULT indication, forcing the current to zero and switch off
1217 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 38
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 13: MOTOR 1 FIELD

[F1_REF]
Input of MOTOR_1_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Field current reference for motor 1 field exciter.
1301 FB_I: C4 SC: FCURR HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 11003 U: -
[F1_FORCE_FWD]
Input of MOTOR_1_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Command to force motor field in forward direction.
1302 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
[F1_FORCE_REV]
Input of MOTOR_1_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Command to force motor field in reverse direction.
1303 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
[F1_ACK]
Input of MOTOR_1_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Input for analog or digital acknowledge signal from external field excitation system.
1304 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
F1_CURR_GT_MIN_L
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Tripping level of minimum field current monitoring function.
When field weakening function is used, this limit must be low enough to prevent minimum
field faults at high speed!
1305 FB_P: I2 SC: FCURR HL: 4095 LL: 0 D: 2047 U: A
F1_OVERCURR_L
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Field overcurrent limit for motor 1. The default limit is 115% of nominal field current.
1306 FB_P: I2 SC: FCURR HL: 8191 LL: 0 D: 4710 U: A
F1_CURR_TC
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD-function block (S8/16 ).
Filter time constant for actual field current measurement. (lower HL in S21.232)
1307 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 1000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: s
F1_KP
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Proportional gain for PI controller in the field excitation unit .
1308 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 4096 LL: 0 D: 1 U: -
F1_KI
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Integral action time for PI controller in the field excitation unit .
1309 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 4096 LL: 0 D: 20 U: s
F1_U_AC_DIFF_MAX
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD_OPTIONS-function block (S8/16 ).
Threshold level for free-wheeling function. If two successive AC voltage measurements in
field exciter differ more than this then the 2 phase field exciter activates the free-wheeling
function. (lower HL in S21.232)
1310 FB_P: I2 SC: 1.0 HL: 1000 LL: 0 D: 10 U: %

A 39
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

F1_U_LIM_N
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Negative output voltage limitation for current controller in field excitation unit. Minimum
output voltage = -4096.
1311 FB_P: I2 SC: VOLT HL: 0 LL: -4096 D: -4096 U: %
F1_U_LIM_P
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Positive output voltage limitation for current controller in field excitation unit. Maximum
output voltage = 4096.
1312 FB_P: I2 SC: VOLT HL: 4096 LL: 0 D: 4096 U: %
F1_RED.SEL
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD -function block. ( S8/16 )
Enables field heating function for the motor when RUN-command is not active.
The function is activated 10 s after the RUN-command has been removed.
0 = DISABLE
1 = ENABLE.
1313 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
F1_RED.REF
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Field current reference when field heating function is active or when the motor is at
standstill. Default is 30% of nominal value.
1314 FB_P: I2 SC: FCURR HL: 4095 LL: 0 D: 1228 U: A
OPTI.REF_GAIN
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD_OPTIONS-function block. ( S8/16 )
Used in OPTI-TORQUE function. Gain factor used to multiply torque reference when field
current reference, F1_CURR_REF (11301), is calculated. Field current reference is
calculated from torque reference:
Field current reference = OPTI.REF_GAIN * torque reference / 98.
1315 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 100 U: -
OPTI.REF_MIN_L
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD_OPTIONS-function block. ( S8/16 )
Used in OPTI-TORQUE function. Minimum field level when OPTI_TORQUE function is
selected with FIELD_MODE (1001) parameter.
Default value is 15% of nominal field current. See next parameter.
1316 FB_P: I2 SC: FCURR HL: 4096 LL: 0 D: 614 U: A
OPTI.REF_MIN_TD
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD_OPTIONS-function block. ( S8/16 )
Used in OPTI-TORQUE function. Time delay for minimum field indication. The field
reference can’t be below the limit OPTI.REF_MIN_L longer than this time when
OPTI_TORQUE function is active or when field reversal is done
1317 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 20000 LL: 0 D: 200 U: ms
REV.REV_HYST
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD_OPTIONS-function block. ( S8/16 )
Used in field reversal function. Hysteresis for actual field current comparator. During field
reversal output of the comparator will produce the flag FIELD1_REV_ACK located in
FEX_STATUS (11203)). Hysteresis is needed to avoid possible noise and offset of the
field current signal to affect the FIELD1_REV_ACK.
1318 FB_P: I2 SC: FCURR HL: 4095 LL: 0 D: 80 U: A

A 40
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

REV.REF_HYST
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD_OPTIONS-function block. ( S8/16 )
Used in field reversal function. Hysteresis for torque reference during field reversal. The
absolute value of torque reference must be bigger than REV.REF_HYST before the field
reversal can take place.
1319 FB_P: I2 SC: TORQ HL: 4000 LL: 0 D: 80 U: %
REV.FLUX_TD
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD_OPTIONS-function block. ( S8/16 )
Time period during field reversal when field current and internal FLUX of the motor don’t
correspond to each other. The flag FIELD1_REV_ACK located in FEXC_STATUS
(11203) changes state after this time delay.
1320 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 20000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: ms
F1_CURR_MIN_TD
Parameter of MOTOR_1_FIELD_OPTIONS-function block. (S8/16 | S21.233)
This parameter defines the time the actual field current is allowed to be lower than the
threshold F1_CURR_GT_MIN_L (1305) without error signal F39 (NO FIELD ACK). As
long as the actual field current is higher than the threshold, the flag FIELD1_CURR_MIN_L
located in FEXC_STATUS (11203) is set.
1321 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 1000 LL: 10 D: 200 U: s

A 41
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 14: MOTOR 1 PROTECT.

MOT1.[TEMP_IN]
Input of MOTOR_1_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Input where temperature measurement is connected.
1401 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
MOT1.TEMP_ALARM_L
Parameter of MOTOR_1_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Motor overtemperature alarm is activated when measured temperature (PT100) or
resistance value (PTC) exceeds this limit.
1402 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 4000 LL: -10 D: 0 U: C
MOT1.TEMP_FAULT_L
Parameter of MOTOR_1_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Motor overtemperature fault is activated and the drive will trip when measured temperature
(PT100) or resistance value (PTC) exceeds this limit.
1403 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 4000 LL: -10 D: 0 U: C
[KLIXON_IN]
Input of MOTOR_1_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Input where temperature alarm is connected. Drive will tripped when the input value is not
zero.
1404 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
MODEL1.SEL
Parameter of MOTOR_1_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Used to activate the temperature model for motor1. The model will estimate the
temperature of the motor based on motor current and given model parameters.
0 = DISABLED
1 = ENABLED.
1405 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
MODEL1.CURR
Parameter of MOTOR_1_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Nominal current parameter for thermal model. When motor current is MODEL1.CURR
and after a time of about 5 times MODEL1.TC, the output of thermal model will be 100.
1406 FB_P: I2 SC:MCURR HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 4096 U: A
MODEL1.ALARM_L
Parameter of MOTOR_1_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Motor overtemperature alarm is activated when calculated temperature exceeds this limit.
1407 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 130 LL: 10 D: 120 U: %
MODEL1.TRIP_L
Parameter of MOTOR_1_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Motor overtemperature fault is activated and the drive will trip when calculated temperature
exceeds this limit.
1408 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 130 LL: 10 D: 130 U: %
MODEL1.TC
Parameter of MOTOR_1_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Thermal time constant parameter for thermal model. The time in which the temperature
rises to 63% of the nominal value. When motor current is MODEL1.CURR and after a
time of about 5 times MODEL1.TC, the output of thermal model will be 100.
1409 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 5400 LL: 0 D: 240 U: s

A 42
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 15: MOTOR 2 FIELD

[F2_REF]
Input of MOTOR_2_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Field current reference for motor 2 field exciter.
1501 FB_I: C4 SC: FCURR HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12512 U: -
F2_CURR_GT_MIN_L
Parameter of MOTOR_2_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Tripping level of minimum field current monitoring function.
1502 FB_P: I2 SC: FCURR HL: 4095 LL: 0 D: 2047 U: A
F2_OVERCURR_L
Parameter of MOTOR_2_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Field overcurrent limit for motor 2. The default limit is 115% of nominal field current.
1503 FB_P: I2 SC: FCURR HL: 8191 LL: 0 D: 4710 U: A
F2_CURR_TC
Parameter of MOTOR_2_FIELD-function block (S8/16 ).
Filter time constant for actual field current measurement. (lower HL in S21.232)
1504 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 1000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: s
F2_KP
Parameter of MOTOR_2_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Proportional gain for PI controller in the field excitation unit .
1505 FB_P: I2 SC: - HL: 4096 LL: 0 D: 1 U: -
F2_KI
Parameter of MOTOR_2_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Integral action time for PI controller in the field excitation unit .
1506 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.01 HL: 4096 LL: 0 D: 20 U: s
F2_U_AC_DIFF_MAX
Parameter of MOTOR_2_FIELD_OPTIONS-function block (S8/16 ).
Threshold level for free-wheeling function. If two successive AC voltage measurements in
field exciter differ more than this then the 2 phase field exciter activates the free-wheeling
function. (lower HL in S21.232)
1507 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1000 LL: 0 D: 10 U: %
F2_U_LIM_N
Parameter of MOTOR_2_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Negative output voltage limitation for current controller in field excitation unit.
Minimum output voltage = -4096.
1508 FB_P: I2 SC: VOLT HL: 0 LL: -4096 D: -4096 U: %
F2_U_LIM_P
Parameter of MOTOR_2_FIELD-function block. ( S8/16 )
Positive output voltage limitation for current controller in field excitation unit.
Maximum output voltage = 4096.
1509 FB_P: I2 SC: VOLT HL: 4096 LL: 0 D: 4096 U: %
F2_RED.SEL
Parameter of MOTOR_2_FIELD -function block. ( S8/16 )
Enables field heating function for the motor when the RUN-command is not active.
The function is activated 10 s after the RUN-command has been removed.
0 = DISABLE
1 = ENABLE
1510 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 43
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

F2_RED.REF
Parameter of MOTOR_2_FIELD -function block. ( S8/16 )
Field current reference when field heating function is active or when the motor is at
standstill. Default is 30% of nominal value
1511 FB_P: I2 SC: FCURR HL: 4095 LL: 0 D: 1228 U: A

A 44
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 16: MOTOR 2 PROTECT.

MOT2.[TEMP_IN]
Input of MOTOR_2_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Input where temperature measurement is connected.
1601 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
MOT2.TEMP_ALARM_L
Parameter of MOTOR_2_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Motor overtemperature alarm is activated when measured temperature (PT100) or
resistance value (PTC) exceeds this limit
1602 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 4000 LL: -10 D: 0 U: C
MOT2.TEMP_FAULT_L
Parameter of MOTOR_2_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Motor overtemperature fault is activated and the drive will trip when measured temperature
(PT100) or resistance value (PTC) exceeds this limit
1603 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 4000 LL: -10 D: 0 U: C
MODEL2.SEL
Parameter of MOTOR_2_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Used to activate the temperature model for motor 2. The model will estimate the
temperature of the motor based on motor current and given model parameters.
0 = DISABLED
1 = ENABLED.
1604 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
MODEL2.CURR
Parameter of MOTOR_2_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Nominal current parameter for thermal model. When motor current is MODEL2.CURR
and after a time of about 5 times MODEL2.TC, the output of thermal model will be 100.
1605 FB_P: I2 SC: MCURR HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 4096 U: A
MODEL2.ALARM_L
Parameter of MOTOR_2_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Motor overtemperature alarm is activated when calculated temperature exceeds this limit.
1606 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 130 LL: 10 D: 120 U: %
MODEL2.TRIP_L
Parameter of MOTOR_2_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Motor overtemperature fault is activated and the drive will trip when calculated temperature
exceeds this limit.
1607 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 130 LL: 10 D: 130 U: %
MODEL2.TC
Parameter of MOTOR_2_PROTECTION-function block. ( S9/16 )
Thermal time constant parameter for thermal model. The time in which the temperature
rises to 63% of the nominal value. When motor current is MODEL2.CURR and after a
time of about 5 times MODEL2.TC, the output of thermal model will be 100.
1608 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 5400 LL: 0 D: 240 U: s

A 45
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 17: RAMP GENERATOR

RAMP.[IN]
Input of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
Source for the speed reference.
1701 FB_I: C4 SC: SPEED HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 11903 U: -
RAMP.[RES_IN]
Input of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
Used to set ramp input to zero.
1702 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
RAMP.[HOLD]
Input of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
Used to hold the present ramp output value .
1703 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
RAMP.[FOLLOW_IN]
Input of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
Used to make the ramp output to follow the ramp input value.
1704 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
RAMP.[FOLL_ACT]
Input of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
Used to make the ramp output to follow the signal at RAMP.[SPEED_SET],
connected to SPEED ACT (12102) by default.
1705 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
RAMP.[RES_OUT]
Input of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
Used to set ramp output to zero.
1706 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
RAMP.[T1/T2]
Input of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
Selects the used set of ramp times:
0 = ACCEL1, DECEL1 and SMOOTH1 are used
<> 0 = ACCEL2, DECEL2 and SMOOTH2 are used.
1707 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
ACCEL1
Parameter of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
The time in which the drive will accelerate from zero speed to nominal speed.
1708 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.1 HL: 30000 LL: 1 D: 200 U: s
DECEL1
Parameter of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
The time in which the drive will decelerate from nominal speed to zero speed.
1709 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.1 HL: 30000 LL: 1 D: 200 U: s
SMOOTH1
Parameter of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
The speed ramp output softening time (S-RAMP function).
The total time how long the softening function will last.
1710 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 20000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: ms
ACCEL2
Parameter of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
The time in which the drive will accelerate from zero speed to nominal speed.
1711 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.1 HL: 30000 LL: 1 D: 100 U: s

A 46
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

DECEL2
Parameter of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
The time in which the drive will decelerate from nominal speed to zero speed.
1712 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.1 HL: 30000 LL: 1 D: 100 U: s
SMOOTH2
Parameter of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
The speed ramp output softening time (S-RAMP function).
The total time how long the softening function will last.
1713 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 20000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: ms
EMESTOP_RAMP
Parameter of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
The time in which the drive will decelerate from nominal speed to zero speed in
emergency stop situation.
1714 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.1 HL: 30000 LL: 1 D: 200 U: s
SPEEDMAX
Parameter of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
Positive limit for speed reference.
1715 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 30000 LL: 0 D: 20000 U: rpm
SPEEDMIN
Parameter of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
Negative limit for speed reference.
1716 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 0 LL: -30000 D: -20000 U: rpm
STARTSEL
Parameter of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
Start-function when the motor is rotating
0 = START_FROM_0 (ramp output = 0 at start)
1 = FLYING_START (ramp output = actual speed at start.)
1717 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
ACC_COMP.MODE
Parameter of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
Acceleration compensation function
0 = DISABLED
1 = ENABLED.
1718 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
ACC_COMP.TRMIN
Parameter of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
The time in which the drive will accelerate from zero speed to the maximum speed using
nominal torque (TN) of the motor.
1719 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: s
RAMP.[SPEED_SET]
Input of RAMP GENERATOR-function block. ( S4/16 )
Set ramp output to this input with signal RAMP.[FOLL_ACT] (1705)
1720 FB_I: C4 SC: SPEED HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12102 U: -

A 47
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 18: REFERENCE CHAIN

REF_SUM.[IN1]
Input of REF_SUM-function block. ( S5/16 )
Summation point before Speed Contoller.
1801 FB_I: C4 SC: SPEED HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 11701 U: -
REF_SUM.[IN2]
Input of REF_SUM-function block. ( S5/16 )
Summation point before Speed Contoller.
1802 FB_I: C4 SC: SPEED HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 48
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 19: REFERENCE SOURCES

CONST_REF.[ACT1]
Input of CONST_REF-function block. ( S4/16 )
Selects the constant reference REF1 to block output.
ACT1 overrides other ACT-inputs.
1901 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
CONST_REF.[ACT2]
Input of CONST_REF-function block. ( S4/16 )
Selects the constant reference REF2 to block output.
ACT2 overrides ACT3- and ACT4-inputs.
1902 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
CONST_REF.[ACT3]
Input of CONST_REF-function block. ( S4/16 )
Selects the constant reference REF3 to block output.
ACT3 overrides ACT4-input.
1903 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
CONST_REF.[ACT4]
Input of CONST_REF-function block. ( S4/16 )
Selects the constant reference REF4 to block output.
1904 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
CONST_REF.DEF
Parameter of CONST_REF-function block. ( S4/16 )
This value is selected when none of four ACT-inputs is active.
1905 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 32767 LL: -32767 D: 1000 U: rpm
CONST_REF.REF1
Parameter of CONST_REF-function block. ( S4/16 )
This speed reference is selected when ACT1-input is active.
1906 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 32767 LL: -32767 D: 1500 U: rpm
CONST_REF.REF2
Parameter of CONST_REF-function block. ( S4/16 )
This speed reference is selected when ACT2-input is active.
1907 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 32767 LL: -32767 D: 0 U: rpm
CONST_REF.REF3
Parameter of CONST_REF-function block. ( S4/16 )
This speed reference is selected when ACT3-input is active.
1908 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 32767 LL: -32767 D: 0 U: rpm
CONST_REF.REF4
Parameter of CONST_REF-function block. ( S4/16 )
This speed reference is selected when ACT4-input is active.
1909 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 32767 LL: -32767 D: 0 U: rpm
REFSEL.[IN1]
Input of REF_SEL-function block. ( S4/16 )
Speed reference input which is selected with SEL1-input.
1910 FB_I: C4 SC: SPEED HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10104 U: -
REFSEL.[SEL1]
Input of REF_SEL-function block. ( S4/16 )
Selects the speed reference input IN1 to the output.
1911 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10715 U: -

A 49
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

REFSEL.[IN2]
Input of REF_SEL-function block. ( S4/16 )
Speed reference input which is selected with SEL2-input.
1912 FB_I: C4 SC: SPEED HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 11901 U: -
REFSEL.[SEL2]
Input of REF_SEL-function block. ( S4/16 )
Selects the speed reference input IN2 to the output.
1913 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 11902 U: -
REFSEL.[IN3]
Input of REF_SEL-function block. ( S4/16 )
Speed reference input which is selected with SEL3-input.
1914 FB_I: C4 SC: SPEED HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
REFSEL.[SEL3]
Input of REF_SEL-function block. ( S4/16 )
Selects the speed reference input IN3 to the output.
1915 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
REFSEL.[ADD]
Input of REF_SEL-function block. ( S4/16 )
Additional speed reference which is added to the output.
1916 FB_I: C4 SC: SPEED HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 11904 U: -
REFSEL.[REV]
Input of REF_SEL-function block. ( S4/16 )
Command which changes the sign of the block output.
1917 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
SOFTPOT.[INCR]
Input of SOFT_POT-function block. ( S4/16 )
Used to activate incrementing of output value.
1918 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
SOFTPOT.[DECR]
Input of SOFT_POT-function block. ( S4/16 )
Used to activate decrementing of output value.
1919 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
SOFTPOT.[FOLLOW]
Input of SOFT_POT-function block. ( S4/16 )
Used to make the output to follow actual motor speed.
1920 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL:0 D: 0 U: -
SOFTPOT.OHL
Parameter of SOFT_POT-function block. ( S4/16 )
Positive limit of the output
1921 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 23000 LL: -23000 D: 5000 U: rpm
SOFTPOT.OLL
Parameter of SOFT_POT-function block. ( S4/16 )
Negative limit of the output.
1922 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 23000 LL: -23000 D: -5000 U: rpm

A 50
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

SOFTPOT.[ENABLE]
Input of SOFT_POT-function block. (S4/16 | S21.233)
In default condition the output of the SOFT_POT function block is reset to zero, if the drive
is stopped by removing the RUN command from the binary input. In case this behaviour is
not useful change the interconnection to a different signal. Definition of this input:
The output SOFT_POT:OUT (11904) is kept to logic level = 0 as long as this input is not
connected or the connected signal (default: RUNNING (10903)) has logic level = 0. If the
connected signal is set to logic level = -1 the function is enabled.
1923 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10903 U: -

A 51
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 20: SPEED CONTROLLER

ERR.[IN]
Input of SPEED_ERROR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Speed reference value for speed error calculation.
2001 FB_I: C4 SC: SPEED HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 11802 U: -
ERR.[STEP]
Input of SPEED_ERROR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Speed step value which is added to speed error.
2002 FB_I: C4 SC: SPEED HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12517 U: -
ERR.[WIN_MODE]
Input of SPEED_ERROR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Selection for window control mode.
2003 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
ERR.WIN_SIZE
Parameter of SPEED_ERROR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Size of the speed error window in window control mode.
2004 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 20000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: rpm
ERR.FRS
Parameter of SPEED_ERROR-function block. ( S5/16 )
The time constant of speed difference filter.
2005 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: ms
SPC.[IN]
Input of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
Speed error input.
2006 FB_I: C4 SC: SPEED HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12001 U: -
SPC.[RINT]
Input of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
Command to reset the integral part of speed controller.
2007 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
SPC.[BAL]
Input of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
Command to set the integral part of the speed controller to the value at SPC.[BALREF].
2008 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
SPC.[BALREF]
Input of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
External value for the integral part of the speed controller when external setting is used via
SPC.[BAL].
2009 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
SPC.[BAL2]
Input of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
Command to set the integral part of the speed controller to the value at SPC.[BAL2REF].
2010 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12403 U: -
SPC.[BAL2REF]
Input of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
External value for the integral part of the speed controller when external setting is used via
SPC.[BAL2].
2011 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12402 U: -

A 52
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

SPC.[HOLD]
Input of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
Command to keep present value of the integral part of speed controller.
2012 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
SPC.DROOPING
Parameter of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
A decrease in speed when the motor has a nominal load (TN).
2013 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.1 HL: 4000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: %
SPC.KP
Parameter of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
The proportional gain of the speed controller. SPC.KP = 100 => gain = 1.
2014 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32000 LL: 0 D: 500 U: %
SPC.KPSMIN
Parameter of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
The proportional gain of the speed controller when output of the speed controller is 0.
Used to have lower gain when torque is small. SPC.KPSMIN = 100 => gain = 1
2015 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: %
SPC.KPSPOINT
Parameter of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
Used to have lower gain when torque is small. The value of the speed controller output
where the gain is SPC.KP. Between controller output values 0...SPC.KPSPOINT the
proportional gain will increase from SPC.KPSMIN to SPC.KP.
2016 FB_P: I2 SC: TORQ HL: 16000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: %
SPC.KPSWEAKFILT
Parameter of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
Used to have lower gain when torque is small.
The time constant of a filter that smoothens the changes of the proportional gain.
2017 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 500 U: ms
SPC.KI
Parameter of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
Integral action time of the controller.
2018 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32000 LL: 0 D: 5000 U: ms
SPC.TD
Parameter of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
Time constant for the derivative part of the controller.
2019 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: ms
SPC.TF
Parameter of SPEED_CONTROL-function block. ( S5/16 )
The filter time constant for the derivative part of the controller.
2020 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32000 LL: 5 D: 50 U: ms
ERR. [SPEED_ACT]
Input of SPEED_ERROR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Actuel speed value for speed error calculation.
2021 FB_I: C4 SC: SPEED HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12102 U: -

A 53
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 21: SPEED MEASUREMENT

TACHOPULS_NR
Parameter of SPEED_MEASUREMENT-function block. ( S4/16 )
Number of pulses from the tacho when it rotates one turn.
2101 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 10000 LL: 125 D: 2048 U: -
SPEED_MEAS_MODE
Parameter of SPEED_MEASUREMENT-function block. ( S4/16 )
Selects the type of speed measurement used:
0 = ENCODER A+, B dir (ch. A: pos. edges for speed; ch B: direction)
1 = ENCODER A+- (ch. A: pos. and neg. edges for speed; ch. B: not used)
2 = ENCODER A+-, B dir (ch. A: pos. and neg. edges for speed; ch. B: direction)
3 = ENCODER A+-, B +- (all edges of the channels A and B are used)
4 = ANALOG TACHO (AI channel AITAC is used for analog tacho input)
5 = EMF SPEED ACT (speed actual is calculated from EMF of motor)
2102 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 5 LL: 0 D: 5 U: -
SPEED_SCALING
Parameter of SPEED_MEASUREMENT-function block. ( S4/16 )
Speed reference of the motor in 0.1 rpm, when speed reference is 20000.
Notice that when this value is changed, all speed related parameters and signals
will have different values when they are shown in [rpm] in the panel or in
CMT/DCS 500:
AITAC_HIGH_VALUE, AITAC_LOW_VALUE, AI1_HIGH_VALUE,
AI1_LOW_VALUE, FIELD_WEAK_POINT, GENER.WEAK_POINT,
SPEEDMAX, SPEEDMIN, CONST_REF.DEF,
CONST_REF.REF1-4, SOFTPOT.OHL, SOFTPOT.OLL,
ERR.WIN_SIZE, MIN_SPEED_L, SPEED_L1,
SPEED_L2, OVERSPEEDLIMIT, STALL.SPEED,
MON.MEAS_LEV, MAX_CURR_LIM_SPD,

AITAC:OUT+, AITAC:OUT-, AI1:OUT+,

AI1:OUT-, RAMP:OUT, SPEED REFERENCE,
REF_SUM:OUT, LOCAL_SPEED_REF, CONST_REF:OUT,
REF_SEL.OUT, SOFTPOT:OUT, ERR:OUT,
ERR:STEP_RESP, SPEED_ACT_EMF, SPEED_ACT,
SPEED_ACT_FILT.
2103 FB_P: I2 SC: 0.1 HL: 65000 LL: 1000 D: 15000 U: rpm
SPEED_ACT_FTR
Parameter of SPEED_MEASUREMENT-function block. ( S4/16 )
Filter time constant for the speed actual filter.
Output of the filter is the signal SPEED_ACT (12102).
2104 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: ms
SPEED_ACT_FLT_FTR
Parameter of SPEED_MEASUREMENT-function block. ( S4/16 )
Filter time constant for the signal SPEED_ACT_FILT (12103).
This speed actual is intended for display on panel or CMT.
2105 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 20000 LL: 0 D: 500 U: ms

A 54
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 22: SPEED MONITOR

MIN_SPEED_L
Parameter of SPEED_MONITOR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Limit value for minimum speed detection.
When speed is below this limit MIN_SPEED (12201) output of the function block is set.
2201 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 30000 LL: 0 D: 50 U: rpm
SPEED_L1
Parameter of SPEED_MONITOR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Limit value for speed level detection. When speed is above this limit SPEED_GT_L1
(12202) output of the function block is set.
2202 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 30000 LL: 0 D: 5000 U: rpm
SPEED_L2
Parameter of SPEED_MONITOR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Limit value for speed level detection. When speed is above this limit SPEED_GT_L2
(12203) output of the function block is set.
2203 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 30000 LL: 0 D: 10000 U: rpm
OVERSPEEDLIMIT
Parameter of SPEED_MONITOR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Limit value for overspeed detection. When speed is above this limit OVERSPEED (12204)
output of the function block is set an the drive will trip.
2204 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 30000 LL: 0 D: 23000 U: rpm
STALL.SEL
Parameter of SPEED_MONITOR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Selection parameter for stall protection:
0 = DISABLED
1 = ENABLED.
2205 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
STALL.SPEED
Parameter of SPEED_MONITOR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Speed limit value for stall detection.
When speed is below this limit and torque is higher than STALL.TORQUE for a time longer
than STALL.TIME, the drive will trip.
2206 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 20000 LL: 0 D: 50 U: rpm
STALL.TORQUE
Parameter of SPEED_MONITOR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Torque limit value for stall detection. Description see STALL.SPEED (2206).
2207 FB_P: I2 SC: TORQ HL: 16000 LL: 0 D: 3000 U: %
STALL.TIME
Parameter of SPEED_MONITOR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Time delay for stall detection. Description see STALL.SPEED (2206).
2208 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 180 LL: 1 D: 10 U: s
MON.MEAS_LEV
Parameter of SPEED_MONITOR-function block. ( S5/16 )
This function is comparing speed actual from pulse or analog tacho and the calculated
EMF_ACT (10506) of the motor. If speed measurement fails the speed is zero, but the
EMF_ACT (10506) will increase when the drive is started.
MON.MEAS_LEV is the minimum absolute value the measured speed must have when
EMF_ACT (10506) is over the limit MON.EMF_V. Otherwise the drive trips to the speed
measurement fault.
2209 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 20000 LL: 0 D: 200 U: rpm

A 55
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

MON.EMF_V
Parameter of SPEED_MONITOR-function block. ( S5/16 )
Description see MON.MEAS_LEV (2209 ).
2210 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1500 LL: 0 D: 50 U: V

A 56
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 23: TORQUE and CURRENT LIMITS

[SPC_TORQ_MAX]
Input of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Maximum torque limit for the speed controller.
Can be connected to analog input or function block output.
2301 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12510 U: -
[SPC_TORQ_MIN]
Input of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Minimum torque limit for the speed controller.
Can be connected to analog input or function block output.
2302 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12511 U: -
[TREF_TORQ_MAX]
Input of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Maximum torque limit for the torque reference chain.
Can be connected to analog input or function block output.
2303 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12510 U: -
[TREF_TORQ_MIN]
Input of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Minimum torque limit for the torque reference chain.
Can be connected to analog input or function block output.
2304 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12511 U: -
TORQ_MAX
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Maximum torque limit for the drive.
2305 FB_P: I2 SC: TORQ HL: 16000 LL: 20 D: 4000 U: %
TORQ_MIN
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Minimum torque limit for the drive.
2306 FB_P: I2 SC: TORQ HL: -20 LL: -16000 D: -4000 U: %
ARM_CURR_LIM_P
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Maximum current of the motor bridge.
2307 FB_P: I2 SC: MCURR HL: 16383 LL: 0 D: 4095 U: A
ARM_CURR_LIM_N
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Maximum current of the generator bridge.
2308 FB_P: I2 SC: MCURR HL: 0 LL: -16383 D: -4095 U: A

A 57
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

MAX_CURR_LIM_SPD
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Speed dependent current limitation.
The speed limit named with x where armature current limitation starts to decrease the
current limit.

MAX_CURR_LIM_N1
X + 1/4*(20000 - X)
MAX_CURR_LIM_N2
MAX_CURR_LIM_N3 X + 2/4*(20000 - X)

X + 3/4*(20000 - X)
MAX_CURR_LIM_N4

MAX_CURR_LIM_N5

X 20000 SPEED_ACT(12101)

2309 FB_P: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 20000 LL: 0 D: 20000 U: rpm

MAX_CURR_LIM_N1
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Speed dependent current limitation.
Armature current limit at speed MAX_CURR_LIM_SPD (2309).
2310 FB_P: I2 SC: MCURR HL: 16383 LL: 0 D: 16383 U: A
MAX_CURR_LIM_N2
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Speed dependent current limitation.
Armature current limit at speed:
MAX_CURR_LIM_SPD + 1/4*(20000 - MAX_CURR_LIM_SPD).
2311 FB_P: I2 SC: MCURR HL: 16383 LL: 0 D: 16383 U: A
MAX_CURR_LIM_N3
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Speed dependent current limitation.
Armature current limit at speed:
MAX_CURR_LIM_SPD + 2/4*(20000 - MAX_CURR_LIM_SPD).
2312 FB_P: I2 SC: MCURR HL: 16383 LL: 0 D: 16383 U: A
MAX_CURR_LIM_N4
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Speed dependent current limitation.
Armature current limit at speed:
MAX_CURR_LIM_SPD + 3/4*(20000 - MAX_CURR_LIM_SPD).
2313 FB_P: I2 SC: MCURR HL: 16383 LL: 0 D: 16383 U: A
MAX_CURR_LIM_N5
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Speed dependent current limitation.
Armature current limit at speed:
20000 (nominal speed of the drive).
2314 FB_P: I2 SC: MCURR HL: 16383 LL: 0 D: 16383 U: A

A 58
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

GEAR.START_TORQ
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Gear backlash compensation function.
When the torque is changing direction, the torque limit is reduced for a while.
GEAR.START_TORQ is the torque limit right after the direction change.

TORQUE
GEAR. TORQ_RAMP

3,3ms at 50Hz
GEAR.START_TORQ

GEAR.TORQ_TIME

TIME

2315 FB_P: I2 SC: TORQ HL: 16000 LL: 0 D: 16000 U: %

GEAR.TORQ_TIME
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
GEAR.TORQ_TIME is the time period after the direction change when
GEAR.START_TORQ torque is used. ( see 2315 )
2316 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1000 LL: 0 D: 100 U: ms
GEAR.TORQ_RAMP
Parameter of TORQUE/CURRENT_LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
GEAR.TORQ_RAMP defines the rate of change for the torque limit when
GEAR.TORQ_TIME has elapsed. GEAR.TORQ_RAMP is given as the maximum change
of torque limit in 3.3 ms (50 Hz). ( see 2315 )
2317 FB_P: I2 SC: TORQ HL: 16000 LL: 0 D: 200 U: %

A 59
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 24: TORQUE REFERENCE CHAIN

SEL1.[TREF_A]
Input of TORQ_REF_SELECTION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Torque reference A is connected to this input.
2401 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10107 U: -
SEL1.TREF_A_FTC
Parameter of TORQ_REF_SELECTION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Filter time constant for torque reference A.
2402 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: ms
SEL1.[LOAD_SHARE]
Input of TORQ_REF_SELECTION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Load share is connected to this input.
Load share is used to scale the torque reference A.
SEL1:OUT = SEL1.[LOAD_SHARE] * SEL1.TREF_A_FTC / 4000
2403 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12521 U: -
SEL1.[TREF_B]
Input of TORQ_REF_SELECTION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Torque reference B is connected to this input.
2404 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12519 U: -
SEL1.TREF_B_SLOPE
Parameter of TORQ_REF_SELECTION-function block. ( S6/16 )
The slope of the ramp for torque reference B.
Given as the time from 0 to 100 % torque.
2405 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: ms
SEL2.TREF_SEL
Parameter of TORQ_REF_HANDLING-function block. ( S7/16 )
Selection for the source of torque reference:
0 = NONE
1 = SPEED_CONTROLLED (from TREF_SPC)
2 = EXT.TORQUE REF (from TREF_EXT)
3 = MIN (minimum logic with speed error comparison)
4 = MAX (maximum logic with speed error comparison)
5 = WINDOW (window control mode)
2406 FB_P: E2 SC: - HL: 5 LL: 0 D: 1 U: -
SEL2.[TREF_SPC]
Input of TORQ_REF_HANDLING-function block. ( S7/16 )
Torque reference from speed controller is connected to this input.
2407 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12004 U: -
SEL2.[TREF_EXT]
Input of TORQ_REF_HANDLING-function block. ( S7/16 )
External torque reference is connected to this input.
2408 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12401 U: -
SEL2.[TORQ_STEP]
Input of TORQ_REF_HANDLING-function block. ( S7/16 )
Torque step is connected to this input.
2409 FB_I: C4 SC: TORQ HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 12520 U: -

A 60
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 25: FB EXECUTION

TASK1_EXEC_ORDER
Execution order of function blocks of task 1, which is executed at 5 ms interval.
2501 P: AI2 SC: - HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
TASK2_EXEC_ORDER
Execution order of function blocks of task 2, which is executed at 20 ms interval.
2502 P: AI2 SC: - HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
TASK3_EXEC_ORDER
Execution order of function blocks of task 3, which is executed at 200 ms interval.
2503 P: AI2 SC: - HL: 10000 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
FB_APPL_ENABLE
Selection parameter for the execution of function block application:
0: (disabled; application blocks are not executed)
1: (enabled; application blocks are executed).
2504 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
FB_TASK_LOCK
Interlocking flag for function block programming via panel CDP 312 or PC tool CMT. If
function block programming is started via one tool, this one will set this flag to prevent
similar actions taking place via the other tool. This flag can be actively set by using one of
the tools to define this one being the preferred for function block programming.
0: (disabled; locking flag is not set)
1: (enabled; locking flag is set).
2505 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 61
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 26: FUNCTION BLOCKS 1

2601-2699: Parameters for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 27: FUNCTION BLOCKS 2

2701-2799: Parameters for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 28: FUNCTION BLOCKS 3

2801-2899: Parameters for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 29: FUNCTION BLOCKS 4

2901-2999: Parameters for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 30: FUNCTION BLOCKS 5

3001-3099: Parameters for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 31: FUNCTION BLOCKS 6

3101-3199: Parameters for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 32: FUNCTION BLOCKS 7

3201-3299: Parameters for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 33: FUNCTION BLOCKS 8

3301-3399: Parameters for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 34: FUNCTION BLOCKS 9

3401-3403: Parameters for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

A 62
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 36: 12-PULSE OPERATING

REV_DELAY
Parameter of 12-PULSE LOGIC-function block (S13/16 ).
A bridge reversal takes place in several steps. When the current has reached very low
values this delay time is started to make sure, the current will become zero and then the
bridges will be swapped and the current controller will be released. The delay time is
defined in multiples of cycles (cycle = 3.3 ms at 50 Hz / 2.78ms at 60 Hz). The function is
independent of the control mode (6- or 12-pulse or DCF mode). If used in 12 pulse mode
Master and Follower drive must have the same setting! (higher HL in S21.232)
3601 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 500 LL: 0 D: 1 U: -
REV_GAP
Parameter of 12-PULSE LOGIC-function block (S13/16 ).
If the actual current doesn´t go down in parallel and as expected in both converters this
delay time is started when the time of REV_DELAY has elapsed to enable the system to
correct itself. During this time the reversal is blocked. The delay time is defined in multiples
of cycles (see REV_DELAY). The bridge reversal will be performed independent of the
actual current signal of the other converter, if the time has elapsed. The function is
independent of the control mode (6- or 12-pulse or DCF mode). This parameter must have
the same setting at the Master and the Follower. (higher HL in S21.232)
3602 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 5000 LL: 0 D: 10 U: -
FREV_DELAY
Parameter of 12-PULSE LOGIC-function block (S13/16 ).
This delay time is started when the polarity of the current reference is inverted. In case the
bridge reversal is successful this delay time is reset. In case the bridge reversal failed the
fault message F65 is displayed when the time is elapsed. A reversal may fail because only
one converter swapped the bridge or the converters swapped bridges crosswise or
something else. At the end the current is not increased at both converters with the same
bridge. This delay time is defined in multiples of cycles (see REV_DELAY). ). The function
is independent of the control mode (6- or 12-pulse or DCF mode). This parameter must
have the same setting at the Master and the Follower and must be greater than the sum of
REV_DELAY and REV_GAP plus a safety margin. (higher HL in S21.232)
3603 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 5000 LL: 1 D: 10 U: -
IACT_SLAVE
Input of 12-PULSE LOGIC-function block (S13/16 ).
Pointer to an analog hardware input. In default condition the analog input 2 is connected.
At converters working as a 12 pulse MASTER the actual current signal taken out of the
SLAVE has to be connected to the hardware and transferred to this input.
At converters working as a 12 pulse SLAVE the actual current signal taken out of the
MASTER has to be connected to the hardware and transferred to this input.
3604 FB_I: C4 SC: CCURR HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 10107 U: -
DIFF_CURRENT
Parameter of 12-PULSE LOGIC-function block (S13/16 ).
Permitted difference of the currents (Master/Slave)
Operative only at the Master drive.
3605 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 50 LL: 5 D: 10 U: %

A 63
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

DIFF_CURR_DELAY
Parameter of 12-PULSE LOGIC-function block (S13/16 ).
Number of cycles in which the currents are allowed to differ (DIFF_CURRENT) without
triggering Error 66
Operative only at the Master drive.
3606 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 16383 LL: 3 D: 150 U: -
INHIB_Logic
Input of 12-PULSE LOGIC-function block (S13/16 ).
This input controls the reaction of this converter, if an error is active at the other converter.
Interconnection:
- At systems, running in 12 pulse mode all time (no redundancy; Master or Follower
never will be used as single 6 pulse drive), connect this input to the output
INPUT_X18:15 (13619) at both converters, the Master and the Follower.
3607 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
IREF0_Logic
Input of 12-PULSE LOGIC-function block (S13/16 ).
This input is used to monitor and control the bridge changeover. The Follower is reading
the polarity of the signal CURR.-REF.1 (13605), generated by the Master.
Interconnection:
- Keep this input unconnected, if this converter is used as a Master.
- Connect this input to INPUT_X18:13 (13617), if this converter is used as a Follower.
3608 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
Bridge_Logic
Input of 12-PULSE LOGIC-function block (S13/16 ).
This input is used to read, which bridge is active at the Follower.
Interconnection:
- Connect this input to INPUT_X18:13 (13617), if this converter is used as a Master.
- Keep this input unconnected, if this converter is used as a Follower.
3609 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
Reverse.Logic
Input of 12-PULSE LOGIC-function block (S13/16 ).
This input is used to monitor and control the bridge changeover. Both converters are
reading the polarity of the signal CURR.-REF2 (13608), generated by it´s partner.
Interconnection:
- Connect this input to INPUT_X18:14 (13618) at both converters, the Master and the
Follower.
3610 FB_I: C4 SC: BI HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
[X18:09]
Input of OUTPUT X18-function block (S13/16 ).
The signal passed to this pointer is outputted at Plug Connector X18:09. It is operative in
all modes.
Based on the connection diagram this interconnection should be done:
- Connect this input to IREF1-POLARITY (13606), if this converter is used as a Master.
- Connect this input to BRIDGE (13611), if this converter is used as a Follower.
3611 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 64
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

[X18:10]
Input of OUTPUT X18-function block (S13/16 ).
The signal passed to this pointer is outputted at Plug Connector X18:10. It is operative in
all modes.
Based on the connection diagram this interconnection should be done:
- Connect this input to IREF2-POLARITY (13609) at both converters, the Master and
the Follower.
3612 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
[X18:11]
Input of OUTPUT X18-function block (S13/16 ).
The signal passed to this pointer is outputted at Plug Connector X18:11. The logic level of
the signal transferred via the cable is inverted compared the one connected to. This
interconnection can be used for a fail-safe circuit. It is operative in all modes.
Based on the connection diagram this interconnection should be done:
- in case a 12 pulse system without redundancy is in use (see INHIB_LOGIC):
- connect this input to RDY_ON (10901) at both converters, the Master and the
Follower
- in case a 12 pulse system with redundancy is in use (see BC-LOGIC):
- connect this input to BC_NOT_ZERO (13621) at both converters, the Master and
the Follower
3613 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
[X18:12]
Input of OUTPUT X18-function block (S13/16 ).
The signal passed to this pointer is outputted at Plug Connector X18:12. It is operative in
all modes.
Based on the connection diagram this interconnection should be done:
- in case a 12 pulse system without redundancy is in use (see INHIB_LOGIC):
- connect this input to RUNNING (10903), if this converter is used as a Master
- keep this input unconnected, if this converter is used as a Follower
- in case a 12 pulse system with redundancy is in use (see BC_LOGIC):
- keep this input unconnected at both converters, the Master and the Follower
3614 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
ADJ_REF1
Parameter of 12-PULSE LOGIC-function block (S13/16 ).
The current reference exchanged between the two converters via analog data can be
scaled with this parameter. Higher values will increase the reference at that converter this
parameter is set, lower values will reduce the reference. In case the DC current of the two
converters involved is different, this parameter can serve for correction, if the error is
caused by the analog data exchange.
3615 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 16384 LL: 1 D: 2048 U: -

A 65
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

BC-Logic
Input of 12-PULSE LOGIC-function block (S13/16 ).
In conjunction to input INHIB_LOGIC the converters now exchange the logic level of bit 5
of the signal BC (11209). This bit blocks or releases the current controler. Using this input
for the data exchange gives the fastest reaction available. The use of bit 5 of the signal BC
is recommended, if the 12 pulse system needs redundancy. In this case, the ON/OFF and
the RUN command has to be given to each of the converters via digital inputs depending
on the converter needed. This enables the user to use both converters in a 12 pulse mode
or having the Master or the Follower running as a stand alone drive.
Interconnection:
- At systems, running in 6 or 12 pulse mode (redundancy; Master and Follower used in
12 pulse mode or only the Master is used in single 6 pulse mode or only the Follower
is used in single 6 pulse mode), connect this input to the output INPUT_X18:15
(13619) at both converters, the Master and the Follower.
3616 FB_I: C4 SC: - HL: 19999 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

Group 37: WINDER PARAMETER

3701-3726: Parameters for application winder blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 38: FUNCTION BLOCKS WINDER

3801-3867: Function for application winder
See application function block data sheets.

Group 39: FUNCTION BLOCKS 10

3901-3988: Parameter for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

A 66
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 40: FIELDBUS

FIELDBUS_PAR.1
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Selects the fieldbus-adapter.
0 = DISABLE
1 = Fieldbus
2 = Advant / DDCS
3 = MODBUS INTERNAL
4 = RESET fieldb. par.
If Fieldbus is selected the following fieldbus adapters are supported:
PROFIBUS adapter NPBA-02
PROFIBUS adapter NPBA-12
AC31(CS31) adapter NCSA-01
MODBUS adapter NMBA-01
MODBUS+ adapter NMBP-01
CANopen adapter NCAN-02
DeviceNet adapter NDNA-02

4001 FB_P: E2 SC: 1 HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 67
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

FIELDBUS_PAR.2
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
             
PROFIBUS
(NPBA-02) 1 2 6 1 0 30 0 0
PROFIBUS
(NPBA-12) 0 0 2 1 0 30 0 0

AC31 (CS31) r.o. 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1

MODBUS 0 1 3 2 r.o. r.o. 0

MODBUS+ 0 64 r.o. r.o. 4 5 6 0 0 0 0 0 0

CANopen 1 1 3 1 10 r.o. 0 1

DeviceNet 63 0 r.o. 0 0 0 0 0 0 1500 1500 0 1000 1

Table shows the default values set by the adapter (r.o. :read only)
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function :
PROFIBUS (NPBA-02) PROFIBUS MODE (0) FMS
(1) DP-PPO1
(2) DP-PPO2
(3) DP-PPO3
(4) DP-PPO4
(5) DP-PPO5
PROFIBUS (NPBA-12) PROTOCOL (0) DP
(1) DPV1
AC31 PROTOCOL Read-only
MODBUS MODBUS MODE (0) RTUv wdg:flt
(1) RTU wdg:rst
MODBUS+ PROTOCOL (0) MODBUS PLUS
(1) MBP FAST
CANopen WD MODE (0) FAULT
(1) AUTO RESET
DeviceNet MAC I D 0 … 63
4002 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 255 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
FIELDBUS_PAR.3
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS (NPBA-02): STATION NUMBER 2 to 126
PROFIBUS (NPBA-12): PPO TYPE (0) PPO 1
(1) PPO 2
(2) PPO 3
(3) PPO 4
(4) PPO 5
AC31 MODULE ID (0) WORD
(1) BINARY
MODBUS STATION NUMBER 1 – 247
MODBUS+ Station 1 ... 64
CANopen NODE ID 1 to 127
DeviceNet BAUD RATE (0) 125 kBit/s
(1) 250 kBit/s
(2) 500 kBit/s

4003 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 255 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 68
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

FIELDBUS_PAR.4
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS (NPBA-02) BIT RATE SELECT (0) 9.6KBIT
(1) 19.2KBIT
(2) 93.75KBIT
(3) 187.5KBIT
(4) 500KBIT
(5) 1.5MBIT
(6) AUTO
PROFIBUS (NPBA-12) NODE NUMBER 2 to 126
AC31 STATION NUMBER 0 … 5 (Word Mode)
0 … 57 (Binary Mode)
MODBUS BAUD RATE (0) 1200
(1) 2400
(2) 4800
(3) 9600
(4) 19200
MODBUS+ Good Msg read only
CANopen BAUD RATE (0) 1 Mbit/s
(1) 500 kbit/s
(2) 250 kbit/s
(3) 125 kbit/s
(4) 100 kbit/s
(5) 50 kbit/s
(6) 20 kbit/s
(7) 10 kbit/s
DeviceNet STATUS read only
(0) SELF TEST
(1) NO CONNECT
(2) CONNECTED
(3) TIMEOUT
(4) DUP. MAC ERR
(5) BUS_OFF
(6) COM. ERROR
(7) WRONG ASMBLY

4004 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 69
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

FIELDBUS_PAR.5
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS (NPBA-02) NO. OF DATA SETS 1 to 4
PROFIBUS (NPBA-12) NO. OF DATA SETS 1 to 4
AC31 ADDR INDEX (0) LOWER
(1) UPPER
MODBUS PARITY (0) EVEN
(1) ODD
(2) NONE 2 STOP BIT;
(3) NONE 1 STOP BIT
MODBUS+ Bad Msg read only
CANopen COMM PROFILE (0) CSA 2.8/3.0
(1) ABB DRIVES
(2) TRANSPARENT
DeviceNet PROFILE SELECTION (0) ABB DRIVES
(1) CSA 2.8/3.0

4005 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

FIELDBUS_PAR.6
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS (NPBA-02) DATA SET OFFSET 0 to 255
PROFIBUS (NPBA-12) DATA SET INDEX (0) FBA DSET 1
(1) FBA DSET 10
AC31 DATA SETS 1; 2; 3
MODBUS GOOD MESSAGES read only
MODBUS+ GD Out 1 0 ... 96
CANopen CUT-OFF TIMEOUT 0 to 255
DeviceNet POLL OUTPUT SELECT (0) BASIC SPEED
(1) TRANSPARENT
(2) PARAMETERS
(3) MUL. DATASETS

4006 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 70
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

FIELDBUS_PAR.7
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS (NPBA-02) CUT-OFF TIMEOUT 0 to 255
PROFIBUS (NPBA-12) CUT-OFF TIMEOUT 0 to 255
AC31 DATA SET1 CONST 0 … 32767 (1 = 6ms)
MODBUS BAD MESSAGES read only
MODBUS+ GD Out 2 0 ... 96
CANopen STATUS read only
(0) SELF TEST
(1) RX Q OVERRUN
(2) CAN OVERRUN
(3) BUS OFF
(4) ERROR SET
(5) ERROR RESET
(6) TX Q OVERRUN
(7) DISCONNECTED
(8) STARTED
(9) STOPPED
(10) G FAILS
(11) PRE-OPERAT
(12) RESET COMM.
(13) RESET NODE
DeviceNet POLL/COS INPUT SEL (0) BASIC SPEED
(1) TRANSPARENT
(2) PARAMETERS
(3) MUL. DATASETS

4007 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

FIELDBUS_PAR.8
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS (NPBA-02) COMM PROFILE (0) ABB DRIVES
(1) CSA 2.8/3.0
PROFIBUS (NPBA-12) COMM PROFILE (0) ABB DRIVES
(1) CSA 2.8/3.0
AC31 DATA SET2 CONST 0 … 32767 (1 = 6ms)
MODBUS DDCS CHANNEL (0) CH0'
(1) CH3
MODBUS+ GD Out 3 0 ... 96
CANopen DATA SET INDEX (0) FBA D SET 1
(1) FBA D SET 10
DeviceNet COS DATA OUTPUT (0) BASIC SPEED
(1) TRANSPARENT
(2) PARAMETERS
(3) MUL. DATASETS

4008 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 71
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

FIELDBUS_PAR.9
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS (NPBA-02)
Software > V2.3 CONTROL ZERO MODE (0) STOP
(1) FREEZE
PROFIBUS (NPBA-12) CONTROL ZERO MODE (0) STOP
(1) FREEZE
AC31 DATA SET3 CONST 0 … 32767 (1 = 6ms)
MODBUS not used
MODBUS+ GD In 1 Stn 0 ... 64
CANopen NO. OF D SETS 1 or 2
DeviceNet BIT STROBE OUTPUT (0) BASIC SPEED
(1) TRANSPARENT
(2) PARAMETERS

4009 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

FIELDBUS_PAR.10
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS not used
AC31 DATA SET OFFSET 1 … 255
MODBUS not used
MODBUS+ GD In 1 Wrd 0 ... 31
CANopen not used
DeviceNet DATASET INDEXES (0) FBA DSET 1
(1) FBA DSET 10

4010 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

FIELDBUS_PAR.11
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS not used
AC31 not used
MODBUS not used
MODBUS+ GD In2 Stn 0 ... 64
CANopen not used
DeviceNet SPEED REF. SCALE 0 … 32767

4011 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

FIELDBUS_PAR.12
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS not used
AC31 not used
MODBUS not used
MODBUS+ GD In2 Wrd 0 ... 31
CANopen not used
DeviceNet SPEED ACT. SCALE 0 … 32767

4012 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 72
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

FIELDBUS_PAR.13
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS not used
AC31 not used
MODBUS not used
MODBUS+ GD In3 Stn 0 ... 64
CANopen not used
DeviceNet ABB DRIVES STOP M (0) COAST STOP
(1) RAMP STOP

4013 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

FIELDBUS_PAR.14
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS not used
AC31 not used
MODBUS not used
MODBUS+ GD In3 Wrd 0 ... 31
CANopen not used
DeviceNet RAMP STOP LEVEL 0 … 20000

4014 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

FIELDBUS_PAR.15
Parameter of FIELDBUS-function block. (S12/16 ).
Fieldbus parameter with adapter specific function
PROFIBUS not used
AC31 not used
MODBUS not used
MODBUS+ not used
CANopen not used
DeviceNet NO. OF DATASETS 1 … 20

4015 FB_P: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 73
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 101: ANALOG INPUTS

AITAC:OUT+
Signal of AITAC-function block. ( S4/16 )
Usually used for speed feedback when analog tacho is utilized.
10101 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
AITAC:OUT-
Signal of AITAC-function block. ( S4/16 )
Usually used for speed feedback when analog tacho is utilized. Negated output.
10102 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
AITAC:ERR
Signal of AITAC-function block. ( S4/16 )
Status of AITAC-function block:
0 = NO FAULT No fault
1 = I < 4 mA AITAC_CONV_MODE = 2 and I < 4 mA,
current signal out of range
2 = NO IOB1/IOB2/IOB3 No IOB3-board connected
3 = WRONG IOB Only IOB2 connected or
AITAC CONV_MODE = 1...2 and IOB3 not connected
4 = LOW VAL>HIGH VALAITAC_LOW_VALUE > AITAC_HIGH_VALUE.
10103 FB_O: E2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI1:OUT+
Signal of AI1-function block. ( S4/16 )
Usually used for speed reference input when analog reference is used.
10104 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
AI1:OUT-
Signal of AI1-function block. ( S4/16 )
Usually used for speed reference input when analog reference is used. Negated output.
10105 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
AI1:ERR
Signal of AI1-function block. ( S4/16 )
Status of AI1-function block:
0 = NO FAULT No fault
1 = I < 4 mA AI1_CONV_MODE = 2 and I < 4 mA,
current signal out of range
2 = NO IOB1/IOB2/IOB3 No IOB3-board connected
3 = WRONG IOB Only IOB2 connected or
AI1_CONV_MODE = 3...6 and IOB3 not connected
4 = LOW VAL>HIGH VALAI1_LOW_VALUE > AI1_HIGH_VALUE.
10106 FB_O: E2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI2:OUT+
Signal of AI2-function block. ( S6/16 )
Value read from Analog Input 2.
10107 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI2:OUT-
Signal of AI2-function block. ( S6/16 )
Value read from Analog Input 2. Negated output.
10108 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 74
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

AI2:ERR
Signal of AI2-function block. ( S6/16 )
Status of AI2-function block:
0 = NO FAULT No fault
1 = I < 4 mA AI2_CONV_MODE = 2 and I < 4 mA,
current signal out of range
2 = NO IOB1/IOB2/IOB3 No IOB3-board connected
3 = WRONG IOB Only IOB2 connected or
AI2_CONV_MODE=3...6 and IOB3 not connected
4 = LOW VAL>HIGH VALAI2_LOW_VALUE > AI2_HIGH_VALUE.
10109 FB_O: E2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI3:OUT+
Signal of AI3-function block. ( S11/16 )
Value read from Analog Input 3.
10110 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI3:OUT-
Signal of AI3-function block. ( S11/16 )
Value read from Analog Input 3. Negated output.
10111 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI3:ERR
Signal of AI3-function block. ( S11/16 )
Status of AI3-function block:
0 = NO FAULT No fault
1 = I < 4 mA AI3_CONV_MODE = 2 and I < 4 mA,
current signal out of range
2 = NO IOB1/IOB2/IOB3 No IOB3-board connected
3 = WRONG IOB Only IOB2 connected or
AI3_CONV_MODE=3...6 and IOB3 not connected
4 = LOW VAL>HIGH VALAI3_LOW VALUE > AI3_HIGH VALUE.
10112 FB_O: E2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI4:OUT+
Signal of AI4-function block. ( S11/16 )
Value read from Analog Input 4.
10113 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI4:OUT-
Signal of AI4-function block. ( S11/16 )
Value read from Analog Input 4. Negated output.
10114 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 75
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

AI4:ERR
Signal of AI4-function block. ( S11/16 )
Status of AI4-function block:
0 = NO FAULT No fault
1 = I < 4 mA AI4_CONV_MODE = 2 and I < 4 mA,
current signal out of range
2 = NO IOB1/IOB2/IOB3 No IOB3-board connected
3 = WRONG IOB Only IOB2 connected or
AI4_CONV_MODE=3 and IOB3 not connected
4 = LOW VAL>HIGH VALAI4_LOW_VALUE > AI4_HIGH_VALUE.
10115 FB_O: E2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI5:OUT+
Signal of AI5-function block. ( S11/16 )
Value read from Analog Input 5.
10116 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI5:OUT-
Signal of AI5-function block. ( S11/16 )
Value read from Analog Input 5. Negated output.
10117 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI5:ERR
Signal of AI5-function block. ( S11/16 )
Status of AI5-function block:
0 = NO FAULT No fault
1 = I < 4 mA AI5_CONV_MODE = 2 and I < 4 mA,
current signal out of range
4 = LOW VAL>HIGH VALAI5_LOW_VALUE > AI5_HIGH_VALUE
5 = NO IOE1 No IOE1-board connected.
10118 FB_O: E2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI6:OUT+
Signal of AI6-function block. ( S11/16 )
Value read from Analog Input 6.
10119 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI6:OUT-
Signal of AI6-function block. ( S11/16 )
Value read from Analog Input 6. Negated output.
10120 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AI6:ERR
Signal of AI6-function block. ( S11/16 )
Status of AI6-function block:
0 = NO FAULT No fault
1 = I < 4 mA AI6_CONV_MODE = 2 and I < 4 mA,
current signal out of range
4 = LOW VAL>HIGH VALAI6_LOW_VALUE > AI6_HIGH_VALUE
5 = NO IOE1 No IOE1-board connected.
10121 FB_O: E2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DATASET1:OUT1
Signal of DATASET1-function block ( S12/16 )
DATASET 1 is used for data transmission from the fieldbus master to the drive.
When a fieldbus communication module is connected the DCS 500 can receive a
3 word telegram called DATASET1:OUT1…OUT3 from a fieldbus master.
DATASET1:OUT1 is the first word of this telegram.
10122 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 76
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

DATASET1:OUT2
Signal of DATASET1-function block ( S12/16 )
DATASET1:OUT2 is the first word of this telegram.
10123 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DATASET1:OUT3
Signal of DATASET1-function block ( S12/16 )
DATASET1:OUT3 is the first word of this telegram.
10124 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DATASET3:OUT1
Signal of DATASET3-function block ( S12/16 )
DATASET 3 is used for data transmission from the fieldbus master to the drive.
When a fieldbus communication module is connected the DCS 500 can receive a
3 word telegram called DATASET3:OUT1...OUT3 from a fieldbus master.
DATASET3:OUT1 is the first word of this telegram.
10125 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DATASET3:OUT2
Signal of DATASET3-function block ( S12/16 )
DATASET3:OUT2 is the first word of this telegram.
10126 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DATASET3:OUT3
Signal of DATASET3-function block ( S12/16 )
DATASET3:OUT3 is the first word of this telegram.
10127 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 77
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 103: BRAKE CONTROL

TREF_OUT
Signal of BRAKE_CONTROL-function block ( S10/16 )
Output for torque reference which is used when the brake is opened or closed.
Usually connected to input SPC.[BALREF] (2009) or SPC.[BAL2REF] (2011) of
SPEED_CONTROL-block.
10301 FB_O: I2 SC: TORQ HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
TREF_ENABLE
Signal of BRAKE_CONTROL-function block ( S10/16 )
Output which is active when the brake is opened or closed.
Usually connected to input SPC.[BAL] (2008) or SPC.[BAL2] (2010) of
SPEED_CONTROL-block:
0 = TREF_OUT = 0
-1 = TREF_OUT is set by BRAKE_CONTROL-block.
10302 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DECEL_CMND
Signal of BRAKE_CONTROL-function block ( S10/16 )
Output which is active before the brake is closed:
0 = normal speed reference from application
-1 = command to set the speed reference to zero to stop the drive.
10303 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
LIFT_BRAKE
Signal of BRAKE_CONTROL-function block ( S10/16 )
Output which is used to open the brake when the motor is able to produce torque:
0 = brake is closed
-1 = lift the brake.
10304 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
BRAKE_RUN
Signal of BRAKE_CONTROL-function block ( S10/16 )
Output which is used to give a run-command to DRIVE LOGIC and reference selectors:
0 = no run-command
-1 = run-command active.
10305 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 78
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 104: CURRENT CONTROL

ARM_ALPHA
Signal of CURRENT CONTROL-function block ( S7/16 ).
Firing angle.
10401 FB_O: I2 SC: 1 HL: - LL: - D: - U: -.
ARM_DIR
Signal of CURRENT CONTROL-function block ( S7/16 ).
Identification of the bridge currently in use:
0 = NO BRIDGE
1 = MOTOR BRIDGE
2 = GENERATOR BRIDGE
10402 FB_O: E2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
CURR_REF_IN_LIM
Signal of CURRENT CONTROL-function block ( S7/16 ).
Status signal indicating that the current reference is in limit:
0 = current reference is not in limit
-1 = current reference is in limit.
10403 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
CURR_DER_IN_LIM
Signal of CURRENT CONTROL-function block ( S7/16 ).
Status signal indicating that the rate of change of the current reference is too high:
0 = current reference is not in limit
-1 = rate of change of current reference is in limit.
10404 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
ARM_CURR_REF
Signal of CURRENT CONTROL-function block ( S7/16 ).
Either current or torque reference is use depending on value of REF_TYPE_SEL (405).
10405 FB_O: I2 SC: MCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A

A 79
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 105: CONVERTER, MOTOR

CONV_CURR_ACT
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Actual current of the converter. Scaling based on signal I_CONV_A
10501 FB_O: I2 SC: CCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
ARM_CURR_ACT
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Actual current of the motor. Scaling based on parameter I_MOTN_A (502)
10502 FB_O: I2 SC:MCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
TORQUE_ACT
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Actual torque of the motor. 100 % = nominal torque of motor.
10503 FB_O: I2 SC: TORQ HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
U_NET_ACT
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Actual voltage of the net supply. Scaling based on parameter U_SUPPLY (507)
10504 FB_O: I2 SC: VOLT HL: - LL: - D: - U: V
U_ARM_ACT
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Actual voltage of the motor. Scaling based on signal U_NET_DC_NOM
10505 FB_O: I2 SC: VOLT HL: - LL: - D: - U: V
EMF_ACT
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Actual internal voltage (emf) of the motor. Scaling based on signal U_NET_DC_NOM
10506 FB_O: I2 SC: EMF HL: - LL: - D: - U: V
BRIDGE_TEMP
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Actual temperature of the heat sink.
10507 FB_O: I2 SC: 1 HL: - LL: - D: - U: C
U_NET_DC_NOM_V
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Nominal value of full-rectified supply voltage. Scaling:
U_NET_DC_NOM_V = 1,35 * U_SUPPLY (507).
Notice that when P507 is changed, the internal values of the following net voltage
signals will have different values, but the physical values shown in [V] on the panel
or CMT/DCS 500 will keep its values:
U_ARM_ACT, EMF_ACT.
10508 FB_O: I2 SC: 1 HL: - LL: - D: - U: V
I_CONV_A
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Converter rating plate value. Nominal current of the converter. At C1, C2 and C3 type
converters this value is coded via resistors on the power interface board and will be read
and then set by the system itself. At C4 type converters it has to be set via settings
parameters (group 5) during commissioning.
Notice that when the value of the settings parameters is changed, all converter
current parameters and signals will have different values when they are shown in
[A] in the panel or in CMT/DCS 500:
ARM_CONT_CURR_LIM, ARM_CURR_CLAMP, CONV_CURR_ACT,
I_TRIP_A, Conv.Curr.Slave, Conv.Curr.both.
10509 FB_O: I2 SC: 1 HL: - LL: - D: - U: A

A 80
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

I_TRIP_A
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Converter rating plate value. Overcurrent tripping limit of the converter. (see additional
information at I_CONV_A)
10510 FB_O: I2 SC: 1 HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
U_CONV_V
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Converter rating plate value. Nominal voltage of the converter. (see additional information
at I_CONV_A)
10511 FB_O: I2 SC: 1 HL: - LL: - D: - U: V
MAX_BR_TEMP
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Converter rating plate value.Tripping limit for converter heatsink overtemperature
monitoring. (see additional information at I_CONV_A)
10512 FB_O: I2 SC: 1 HL: - LL: - D: - U: C
CONV_TYPE
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Converter rating plate value (type of the converter):
1= (C1)
2= (C2)
3= (C3)
4= (C4)
(see additional information at I_CONV_A)
10513 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
QUADR_TYPE
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Converter rating plate value (number of quadrants):
1= (one quadrant)
4= (four quadrant)
(see additional information at I_CONV_A)
10514 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
LINE_FREQUENCY
Signal of SETTINGS-function block. ( S2/16 )
Actual line frequency.
10515 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: 1/s

A 81
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 106: DATA LOGGER

DLOG_STATUS
Signal of DATA_LOGGER-function block ( S14/16 )
Status of Data Logger:
0= (logger is empty)
1= (logger is collecting data)
2= (a trigger has occurred)
3= (logger has stopped after a trigger)
4= (logger has stopped after a stop command)
5= (logger has stopped after a trigger and a stop command)
10601 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 82
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 107: DIGITAL INPUTS

DI1:O1
Signal of DI1-function block ( S3/16 )
State of Digital Input 1:
0 = input voltage is zero
-1 = input voltage is nominal.
10701 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI1:O2
Signal of DI1-function block ( S3/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 1:
0 = input voltage is nominal
-1 = input voltage is zero.
10702 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI2:O1
Signal of DI2-function block ( S3/16 )
State of Digital Input 2. See 10701.
10703 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI2:O2
Signal of DI2-function block ( S3/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 2. See 10702.
10704 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI3:O1
Signal of DI3-function block ( S3/16 )
State of Digital Input 3. See 10701.
10705 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI3:O2
Signal of DI3-function block ( S3/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 3. See 10702.
10706 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI4:O1
Signal of DI4-function block ( S3/16 )
State of Digital Input 4. See 10701.
10707 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI4:O2
Signal of DI4-function block ( S3/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 4. See 10702.
10708 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI5:O1
Signal of DI5-function block ( S3/16 )
State of Digital Input 5. See 10701.
10709 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI5:O2
Signal of DI5-function block ( S3/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 5. See 10702.
10710 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI6:O1
Signal of DI6-function block ( S3/16 )
State of Digital Input 6. See 10701.
10711 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 83
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

DI6:O2
Signal of DI6-function block ( S3/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 6. See 10702.
10712 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI7:O1
Signal of DI7-function block ( S3/16 )
State of Digital Input 7. See 10701.
10713 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI7:O2
Signal of DI7-function block. Inverted state of Digital Input 7. See 10702.
10714 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI8:O1
Signal of DI8-function block ( S3/16 )
State of Digital Input 8. See 10701.
10715 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI8:O2
Signal of DI8-function block ( S3/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 8. See 10702.
10716 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI9:O1
Signal of DI9-function block ( S11/16 )
State of Digital Input 9. See 10701.
10717 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI9:O2
Signal of DI9-function block ( S11/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 9. See 10702.
10718 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI10:O1
Signal of DI10-function block ( S11/16 )
State of Digital Input 10. See 10701.
10719 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI10:O2
Signal of DI10-function block ( S11/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 10. See 10702.
10720 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI11:O1
Signal of DI11-function block ( S11/16 )
State of Digital Input 11. See 10701.
10721 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI11:O2
Signal of DI11-function block ( S11/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 11. See 10702.
10722 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI12:O1
Signal of DI12-function block ( S11/16 )
State of Digital Input 12. See 10701.
10723 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI12:O2
Signal of DI12-function block ( S11/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 12. See 10702.
10724 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 84
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

DI13:O1
Signal of DI13-function block ( S11/16 )
State of Digital Input 13. See 10701.
10725 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI13:O2
Signal of DI13-function block ( S11/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 13. See 10702.
10726 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI14:O1
Signal of DI14-function block ( S11/16 )
State of Digital Input 14. See 10701.
10727 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI14:O2
Signal of DI14-function block ( S11/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 14. See 10702.
10728 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI15:O1
Signal of DI15-function block ( S11/16 )
State of Digital Input 15. See 10701.
10729 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DI15:O2
Signal of DI15-function block ( S11/16 )
Inverted state of Digital Input 15. See 10702.
10730 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 85
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 109: DRIVE LOGIC

RDY_ON
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = drive is not ready for ON-command
-1 = drive is ready for ON-command.
10901 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
RDY_RUNNING
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block. ( S3/16 )
0 = drive is not ready for RUN-command
-1 = drive is ready for RUN-command.
10902 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
RUNNING
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = drive is not running
-1 = drive is running.
10903 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
FAULT
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = there is no active fault in the drive
-1 = there is an active fault in the drive.
10904 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
ALARM
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 ).
0 = there is no active alarm in the drive
-1 = there is an active alarm in the drive.
10905 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
LOCAL
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = the drive is in remote control (control from I/O or via communication)
-1 = the drive is in local control (control from panel or CMT/DCS500).
10906 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
EMESTOP_ACT
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = emergency stop function is not active
-1 = emergency stop function is active.
10907 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
FAN_ON
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = command to put all fans in off-state
-1 = command to put all fans in on-state.
10908 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
FIELD_ON
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = command to put external field exciter in off-state
-1 = command to put external field exciter in on-state.
10909 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 86
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

MAIN_CONT_ON
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = command to put main contactor in off-state
-1 = command to put main contactor in on-state.
10910 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
TRIP_DC_BREAKER
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = no command to a dc breaker
-1 = command to open the dc breaker.
10911 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
DYN_BRAKE_ON
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = no command to a dynamic brake
-1 = command to close the dynamic brake.
10912 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
MOTOR_ACT
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = parameter set for motor 1 is active
-1 = parameter set for motor 2 is active.
10913 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
AUTO-RECLOSING
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = Auto-reclosing function is not active
-1 = Auto-reclosing function is active.
10914 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
COMM_FAULT
Signal of DRIVE LOGIC-function block ( S3/16 )
0 = there is no active communication fault in the drive
-1 = there is an active communication fault in the drive.
10915 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
RUN_DCF
Signal of DCF FIELDMODE-function block (S2/16 | S21.232)
Only active if DCF MODE = FEXLINK NODE1 or FEXLINK NODE2. Can be used to start
and stop a DCF 500B, if this converter is connected via FEX-LINK (X16: to X16:
connection) to a DCS 500B and no external start / stop command should be used to
control the field exciter. In this case connect this signal to input ON/OFF (901) and RUN1
(902) of the DRIVE LOGIC. The signal definition is:
0 = command to put DCF500B field exciter in off-state
-1 = command to put DCF500B field exciter in on-state
10916 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
RESET_DCF
Signal of DCF FIELDMODE-function block (S2/16 | S21.232)
Only active if DCF MODE = FEXLINK NODE1 or FEXLINK NODE2. Can be used to reset
faults at a DCF 500B, if this converter is connected via FEX-LINK (X16: to X16:
connection) to a DCS 500B and no external RESET command should be used to reset
faults at the field exciter. In this case connect this signal to input RESET (907) of the
DRIVE LOGIC. The signal definition is:
0 = no command to DCF500B field exciter
-1 = command to reset DCF500B field exciter faults
10917 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 87
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 110: EMF CONTROL

FLUX_REF1
Signal of EMF CONTROL-function block ( S8/16 )
Flux reference after field weakening function.
11001 FB_O: I2 SC: FLUX HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
FLUX_REF_SUM
Signal of EMF CONTROL-function block ( S8/16 )
Final flux reference.
11002 FB_O: I2 SC: FLUX HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
F_CURR_REF
Signal of EMF CONTROL-function block ( S8/16 )
Field current reference.
11003 FB_O: I2 SC: FLUX HL: - LL: - D: - U: %

A 88
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 111: FAULTS, ALARMS

FAULT_WORD_1
Signal of FAULT HANDLING function block ( S16/16 )
Fault status word where each bit represents one fault status.
If fault is active, corresponding bit is set.
B0 Auxil. undervoltage
B1 Overcurrent
B2 Armature overvoltage
B3 Converter overtemp.
B4 Earth fault
B5 Motor 1 overtemp.
B6 Motor 1 overload
B7 I/O-Board not found
B8 Motor 2 overtemp
B9 Motor 2 overload
B10 No BRAKE ack
B11 Mains undervoltage
B12 Mains overvoltage
B13 Not in synchronism
B14 Field ex.1 overcurr
B15 Field ex.1 comerror
11101 S: PB SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
FAULT_WORD_2
Signal of FAULT HANDLING function block ( S16/16 )
Fault status word where each bit represents one fault status.
If fault is active, corresponding bit is set.
B0 Arm. current ripple
B1 Field ex.2 overcurr
B2 Field ex.2 comerror
B3 Phase sequence fault
B4 No field ack.
B5 Speed meas. fault
B6 No ext. FAN ack.
B7 No main cont. ack.
B8 Type coding fault
B9 Backup read fault
B10 No C FAN ack
B11 Local & disconnected
B12 Field ex.1 not OK
B13 Field ex.2 not OK
B14 Motor stalled
B15 Motor overspeed.
11102 S: PB SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 89
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

FAULT_WORD_3
Signal of FAULT HANDLING function block ( S16/16 )
Fault status word where each bit represents one fault status.
If fault is active, corresponding bit is set.
B0 reserved
B1 reserved
B2 reserved
B3 reserved
B4 reserved
B5 reserved
B6 reserved
B7 reserved
B8 reserved
B9 reserved
B10 Current rise fault
B11 Conv.fan curr.fault
B12 Ext.Overvolt.Fault
B13 Fieldbus Timeout
B14 Current Difference
B15 Reversal Fault.
11103 S: PB SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
ALARM_WORD_1
Signal of FAULT HANDLING function block ( S16/16 )
Alarm status word where each bit represents one alarm status.
If alarm is active, corresponding bit is set.
B0 Start inhibition
B1 Emergency stop
B2 Motor 1 temp. alarm
B3 Motor 1 overl.alarm
B4 Conv.overtemp alarm
B5 Current reg blocked (used from S21.233 on)
B6 reserved
B7 RAM-backup failed
B8 Motor 2 temp. alarm
B9 Motor 2 overl alarm
B10 Mains underv.alarm
B11 reserved
B12 Conv.FAN ack.alarm
B13 Arm.curr.dev.alarm
B14 reserved
B15 Ext. FAN ack.larm
11104 S: PB SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 90
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

ALARM_WORD_2
Signal of FAULT HANDLING function block ( S16/16 )
Alarm status word where each bit represents one alarm status.
If alarm is active, corresponding bit is set.
B0 Panel disconnected
B1 Type code changed
B2 Init values read,S2
B3 Param set 2 missing
B4 Backup not allowed
B5 Write backup alarm
B6 Ext.Overvolt.Alarm
B7 Macro change failed
B8 Auto-reclosing
B9 Arm. current ripple
B10 reserved
B11 reserved
B12 reserved
B13 reserved
B14 reserved
B15 reserved
11105 S: PB SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
ALARM_WORD_3
Signal of FAULT HANDLING function block ( S16/16 )
Alarm status word where each bit represents one alarm status.
If alarm is active, corresponding bit is set.
B0 reserved
B1 reserved
B2 reserved
B3 reserved
B4 reserved
B5 reserved
B6 reserved
B7 reserved
B8 reserved
B9 reserved
B10 reserved
B11 reserved
B12 reserved
B13 reserved
B14 reserved
B15 reserved
11106 S: PB SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
LATEST_FAULT
Signal of FAULT HANDLING function block ( S16/16 )
Error code of the latest fault.
11107 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
LATEST_ALARM
Signal of FAULT HANDLING function block ( S16/16 )
Error code of the latest alarm.
11108 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 91
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

OPERATING_HOURS
Signal of FAULT HANDLING function block ( S16/16 )
Operating hours in 0.1 h resolution.
Counter is usually reset if auxiliary power of the control board is switched off for more than
8 hours and the contents of non-volatile memory is lost.
11109 S: U4 SC: 0.1 HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 92
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 112: MAINTENANCE

COMMIS_STAT
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Result from a drive function.
Gives feedback status information when the DRIVEMODE parameter was used to start a
drive function.
COMMIS_STAT will tell if the function was successful:
0 = NOT ACTIVATED selected function successfully worked out
1 = RUN COMMAND ? see code 53
2 = FEXC SEL ? wrong FEX selection
3 = FEXC RDY OPER=0 FEX1 / 2 or DCF 503/4 not ready for operation
4 = FEXC OK=0 field supply not o.k.; see error message on the display of
the converter
5 = FIELD ON=0 FEX1 / 2 or DCF 503/4 not switched on
6 = IF NOT IN 95–105% field current not within 95% ..... 105%
7 = NOT O.K.AFTER 20s drive was not released by hardware within 20s
8…34 = reserved
35 = CANNOT AUTOTUNE cannot autotune the armature current controller
36...48 = reserved
49 = IF AT START ? Field current does not reach reference within 10s, when
the selftuning is started

DRIVE_MODE (12.01) = 3, 5 or 6 (autotuning):

50 = OHMIC LOAD ? Ohmic load not determined.
51 = IACT FEEDBACK ? Current feedback is less than current reference during
measurement of armature resistance. Current limits
are lower than the limit for continous current flow or
lower than 20%.
52 = CURRENT CURVE ? Bad current curve. Fuse blown,thyristor not firing or
no motor load.
53 = RUN COMMAND ? Wrong starting conditions. The drive is running when
the autotuning is started or run command is not given
within 20 s after start of autotuning.
54 = TOO HIGH SPEED ? Too high speed during autotuning .Speed greater than
1% or EMF greater than 15%.
55 = INDUCTANCE ? Inductance cannot be determined. Fuse blown,
thyristor not firing or no motor load.
56 = CONT CURR LIM ? Limit for continous current flow cannot be determined.
57 = FIELD REMOVAL ? The field removal takes longer time than 10 s.
58 = STOP COMMAND ? Current contoller blocking or stop command appears
during autotuning.
59 = MUST BE LOCAL Drive is not in local mode
60 = CANNOT AUTOTUNE cannot autotune the field current controller
61 = ILL START COND. illegal start condition for field autotuning
11201 S: E2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 93
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

BACKUPSTOREMODE
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
BACKUPSTOREMODE is used to give commands to parameter handling function in the
drive:
0 = NONE
1 = SAVE MOT1 SET Save motor set 1
2 = SAVE MOT2 SET Save motor set 2
3 = FACTORY SET VAL. Load factory values
4 = SELECT MOT1 SET Load motor set 1
5 = SELECT MOT2 SET Load motor set 2
6 = READ APPL BLOCKS Load application; if additional function blocks are
activated and saved via SAVE MOTx SET and modified afterwards
without saving the configuration before the last modification (the one
directly after the last SAVE action) can be activated

While the command is executing the value of BACKUPSTOREMODE will show what is
happening or the reason for error if the command fails:
7 = ERASE ERROR Error during erasing of parameter flash
8 = ERASING… Erasing the parameter flash
9 = PROGRAM ERROR Error during programing of parameter flash
10 = PROGRAMMING… Programing the parameter flash
11 = WRONG FLASH TYPE Verification error
12 = READING… Reading the parameter flash
13 = READ ERROR Error during reading of parameter flash
14 = reserved
15 = VERSION ERROR Bad type of parameter flash
16 = reserved
17 = SIZE ERROR Bad size of parameter flash
11202 S: E2 SC: - HL: 5 LL: 1 D: - U: -
FEXC_STATUS
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Status of the field exciters 1 and 2:
(internal signal; not shown on the panel; definition)
B0 (FEXC1_RDY_OPER 0 = not ready for operation; AC-voltage missing)
B1 (FEXC1_OK 0 = self diagnostic failed or power failure in fex 1)
B2 (EXC2_RDY_OPER 0 = not ready for operation; AC-voltage missing)
B3 (EXC2_OK 0 = self diagnostic failed or power failure in fex 2)
B4 (ACK_FEXC1_ON 1 = motor 1 field OK)
B5 (ACK_FEXC2_ON 1 = motor 2 field OK)
B6 (FIELD_HEAT_ON 1 = motor heating function active)
B7 (FIELD1_REV_ACK direction of the field 0 = forward, 1 = reverse)
B8 (ACK_CSC_ON 1 = on-command accepted by sequence control)
B9 (ACK_FEXC_ON 1 = motor field OK)
B10 (FIELD_REF_ON) 1 = field current reference released
B11 (FIELD1_CURR_MIN_L) 1 = motor 1 field current above min level
B12 (FIELD2_CURR_MIN_L) 1 = motor 2 field current above min level
11203 S: PB SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 94
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

TC_STATUS
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Status of the torque control sequencing:
(internal signal; not shown on the panel; definition)
B0 (RDY ON 1 = ready for closing contractor)
B1 (MAIN CONT ON 1 = command to close contractor)
B2 (RDY RUNNING 1 = ready for run command)
B3 (RUNNING 1 = command to release controllers)
B4 (TC_RDY_REF 1 = ready for reference)
B5 (TC_FIELD_CHANGE 1 = field revelsal is active)
B6 (CONTINUOUS_CURR 1 = armature current is discontinuous)
11204 S: PB SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
BC
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Status of the current contoller. If the value of BC is zero, everything is OK. Otherwise
different bits of BC will indicate the reason for blocking the current contoller:
(internal signal; not shown on the panel; definition)
B0 ( overcurrent)
B1 ( Freewheeling unit was fired)
B2 ( field reversal)
B3 ( supply system undervoltage)
B4 ( 12Puls only: fault 65 and 66 occurred)
B5 ( 12Puls only: signal via cable X18)
B6 ( supply system overvoltage)
B7 ( type code error)
B8 ( suppression of controller at contoller change-over)
B9 ( processor overload)
B10 ( thyristor diagnostic running)
B12 ( primary (AC) or secondary (48Vac) power failure)
B13 ( synchronization signal missing)
B14 ( pulse firing section not in synchronism)
B15 ( not released)
11205 S: PB SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
SQUARE_WAVE
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Output of square wave generator. Used for tuning of controllers.
11206 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
TEST_REF
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Test reference input for different drive functions which are activated with DRIVE_MODE
parameter.
11207 S: I2 SC: 1 HL: 32767 LL: -32768 D: 0 U: -
TEST_RELEASE
Signal of MAINTENANCE function..
Release-command for a controller in manual tuning of current or EMF controller. In
manual tuning first the reference is selected with the signal TEST_REF_SEL and then the
controller is released by setting TEST_RELEASE to a value different than zero.
11208 S: I2 SC: 1 HL: 1 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -

A 95
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

TEST_REF_SEL
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Test reference selection. In manual tuning the reference is selected with the signal
TEST_REF_SEL:
0 = ZERO reference is zero
1 = POT1 reference is POT1_VALUE, 1204
2 = POT2 reference is POT2_VALUE, 1205
3 = SQRW reference is SQUARE_WAVE, 11206
4 = TEST reference is TEST_REF, 11207.
11209 S: E2 SC: - HL: 4 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
FEXC1_CODE
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Type code from field exciter no. 1
0000...0307 FEX-2, half-controlled, single
0308...0819 FEX-31, full-controlled, double
0820...1023 FEX-32, half-controlled, single
10000 DCF501, DCF501B, DCF502B
11210 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
FEXC1_COM_STATUS
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Communication link timeout-status for field exciter no. 1.
FEXC1_COM_STATUS = 0 = no time-out indication:
B0 timeout when write parameter, no echo for address
B1 timeout when write parameter, no values received
B2 timeout when read parameter, no echo for address
B3 timeout when read parameter, no values received
B4 timeout when read actual values, no values received.
11211 S: PB SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
FEXC1_COM_ERRORS
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Number of transmission errors in FEXC-communication link for field exciter no. 1.
11212 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
FEXC2_CODE
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Type code from field exciter no. 2
0308...0819 FEX-31, full-controlled, double
0820...1023 FEX-32, half-controlled, single
10000 DCF501, DCF501B, DCF502B
11213 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
FEXC2_COM_STATUS
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Communication link timeout-status for field exciter no. 2.
FEXC2_COM_STATUS = 0 = no time-out indication:
B0 timeout when write parameter, no echo for address
B1 timeout when write parameter, no values received
B2 timeout when read parameter, no echo for address
B3 timeout when read parameter, no values received
B4 timeout when read actual values, no values received.
11214 S: PB SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 96
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

FEXC2_COM_ERRORS
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Number of transmission errors in FEXC-communication link for field exciter no. 2.
11215 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
CMT_COM_ERRORS
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Number of transmission errors in DDCTool communication link.
11216 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
CDI300_BAD_CHAR
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Number of transmission errors in panel communication link.
11217 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
CNT_SW_VERSION
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
DCS 500 converter firmware revision.
11218 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
CNT_BOOT_SW_VERSION
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
DCS 500 converter boot firmware revision.
11219 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
FEXC1_SW_VERSION
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Field exciter no. 1 firmware revision.
11220 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
FEXC2_SW_VERSION
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Field exciter no. 2 firmware revision.
11221 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
PROGRAM_LOAD
Signal of MAINTENANCE function.
Calculated load of DCS 500 control program.
Calculation is started by setting DRIVE_MODE, 1201 = PROGRAM_LOAD.
The calculation will take about 20 seconds.
11222 S: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: %

A 97
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 113: MOTOR 1 FIELD

F1_CURR_REF
Signal of MOTOR_1_FIELD- function block. ( S8/16 )
Field current reference for field exciter no. 1.
11301 FB_O: I2 SC: FCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
F1_CURR_ACT
Signal of MOTOR_1_FIELD- function block. ( S8/16 )
Actual field current from field exciter no. 1.
11302 FB_O: I2 SC: FCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
REF_DCF
Signal of DCF FIELDMODE function block. (S2/16 | S21.232)
Only activ if DCF MODE (1215) = FEXLINK NODE1 or FEXLINK NODE2
Field current reference via FEXLINK for DCF500 as field exciter no. 1 or no. 2
11303 FB_O: I2 SC:MCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A

A 98
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 114: MOTOR 1 PROTECT.

MOT1_MEAS_TEMP
Signal of MOTOR_1_PROTECTION- function block. ( S9/16 )
Measured temperature of motor 1.
The unit of the value depends on the selection of AI_CONV_MODE (107, 110):
0 = not selected
1, 2 = value scaled by AI_HIGH_VALUE (108,111) and AI_LOW_VALUE (109,112)
3..5 = unit = degrees
6, 7 = resistance value is ohms (but displayed in °C )
11401 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: C
MOT1_CALC_TEMP
Signal of MOTOR_1_PROTECTION- function block. ( S9/16 )
Output from thermal model for motor 1.
11402 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: %

A 99
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 115: MOTOR 2 FIELD

F2_CURR_REF
Signal of MOTOR_2_FIELD- function block. ( S8/16 )
Field current reference for field exciter no. 2.
11501 FB_O: I2 SC: FCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
F2_CURR_ACT
Signal of MOTOR_2_FIELD- function block. ( S8/16 )
Actual field current from field exciter no. 2.
11502 FB_O: I2 SC: FCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A

A 100
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 116: MOTOR 2 PROTECTION

MOT2_MEAS_TEMP
Signal of MOTOR_2_PROTECTION- function block. ( S9/16 )
Measured temperature of motor 2.
The unit of the value depends on the selection of AI_CONV_MODE (107, 110):
0 = not selected
1, 2 = value scaled by AI_HIGH_VALUE (108,111) and AI_LOW_VALUE (109,112)
3..5 = unit = degrees
6, 7 = resistance value is ohms (but displayed in °C )
11601 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: C
MOT2_CALC_TEMP
Signal of MOTOR_2_PROTECTION- function block. ( S9/16 )
Output from thermal model for motor 2.
11602 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: %

A 101
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 117: RAMP GENERATOR

RAMP:OUT
Signal of RAMP GENERATOR- function block. ( S4/16 )
Speed reference after ramp function.
11701 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
ACCELCOMP:OUT
Signal of RAMP GENERATOR- function block. ( S4/16 )
Acceleration compensation. Additional torque reference output calculated from the
ACC_COMP.TRMIN (1719) parameter.
11702 FB_O: I2 SC: TORQ HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
RAMP:SIGN
Signal of RAMP GENERATOR- function block. ( S4/16 )
Sign of speed reference after ramp function.
11703 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 102
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 118: REFERENCE CHAIN

SPEED_REFERENCE
Signal of the RAMP GENERATOR-function block.
Speed reference after RAMP.[RES_IN] (1702) and before RAMP.[FOLLOW_IN] (1704)
controlled switches. Both limits SPEEDMAX (1715) and SPEEDMIN (1716) are effective.
11801 S: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
REF_SUM:OUT
Signal of REFSUM_2-function block. ( S5/16 )
Speed reference which is connected to SPEED_ERROR-function block.
11802 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
LOCAL_SPEED_REF
Signal of RAMP GENERATOR-function block..
Local mode: Input value used as speed reference set by either panel or CMT-tool.
Remote mode: Output used to display the speed reference after the LOCAL controlled
switch.
11803 S: I2 SC: SPEED HL: 23000 LL: -23000 D: 0 U: rpm

A 103
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 119: REFERENCE SOURCES

CONST_REF:OUT
Signal of CONST_REF-function block ( S4/16 )
Selected constant speed reference.
11901 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
CONST_REF:ACT
Signal of CONST_REF-function block ( S4/16 )
Signal which is set to TRUE when one of the ACT-inputs is active.
11902 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
REF_SEL:OUT
Signal of REF_SEL-function block ( S4/16 )
Selected speed reference which is usually connected to the ramp generator input.
11903 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
SOFT_POT:OUT
Signal of SOFT_POT-function block ( S4/16 )
Speed reference from the software potentiometer.
11904 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
SOFT_POT:ACT
Signal of SOFT_POT-function block ( S4/16 )
Signal which is set to TRUE if either input SOFTPOT.[INCR] (1918) or SOFTPOT.[DECR]
(1919) is active.
11905 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 104
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 120: SPEED CONTROLLER

ERR:OUT
Signal of SPEED_ERROR-function block ( S5/16 )
Speed error which is usually connected to the speed controller input.
12001 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
ERR:OUT_OF_WIN
Signal of SPEED_ERROR-function block ( S5/16 )
Indication which is active when speed error is out of error window ERR.WIN_SIZE (2004).
12002 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
ERR:STEP_RESP
Signal of SPEED_ERROR-function block ( S5/16 )
Speed error output which is used to show the behaviour of speed controller in step
response test.
12003 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
SPC:OUT
Signal of SPEED_CONTROL-function block ( S5/16 )
Torque reference output from speed controller.
12004 FB_O: I2 SC: TORQ HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
SPC:IN_LIM
Signal of SPEED_CONTROL-function block ( S5/16 )
Indication from speed controller showing that output is in limit.
12005 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 105
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 121: SPEED MEASUREMENT

SPEED_ACT_EMF
Signal of SPEED_MEASUREMENT-function block ( S4/16 )
Actual speed calculated from armature voltage and motor parameters.
12101 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
SPEED_ACT
Signal of SPEED_MEASUREMENT-function block ( S4/16 )
Actual speed after filtering which is connected to the SPEED_ERROR-function block..
12102 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
SPEED_ACT_FILT
Signal of SPEED_MEASUREMENT-function block ( S4/16 )
Actual speed after second filtering stage.
Usually used for display purposes.
12103 FB_O: I2 SC: SPEED HL: - LL: - D: - U: rpm
TACHO_PULSES
Signal of SPEED_MEASUREMENT-function block ( S4/16 )
Counter which is counting tacho pulses.
12104 FB_O: U2 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 106
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 122: SPEED MONITOR

MIN_SPEED
Signal of SPEED_MONITOR-function block ( S4/16 )
Indication which is active when actual speed is below minimum speed limit MIN_SPEED_L
(2201).
12201 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
SPEED_GT_L1
Signal of SPEED_MONITOR-function block ( S4/16 )
Indication which is active when actual speed is above speed level SPEED_L1 (2202).
12202 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
SPEED_GT_L2
Signal of SPEED_MONITOR-function block ( S4/16 )
Indication which is active when actual speed is above speed level SPEED_L2 (2203).
12203 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
OVERSPEED
Signal of SPEED_MONITOR-function block ( S4/16 )
Indication which is active when actual speed is above speed limit OVERSPEEDLIMIT
(2204).
12204 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 107
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 123: TORQUE and CURRENT LIMITS

SPC_TORQMAX1
Signal of TORQUE/CURRENT LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Positive torque limit for speed controller.
12301 FB_O: I2 SC: TORQ HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
SPC_TORQMIN1
Signal of TORQUE/CURRENT LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Negative torque limit for speed controller.
12302 FB_O: I2 SC: TORQ HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
TREF_TORQMAX1
Signal of TORQUE/CURRENT LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Positive torque limit for torque reference chain.
12303 FB_O: I2 SC: TORQ HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
TREF_TORQMIN1
Signal of TORQUE/CURRENT LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Negative torque limit for torque reference chain.
12304 FB_O: I2 SC: TORQ HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
TORQMAX2
Signal of TORQUE/CURRENT LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Positive torque limit before external torque limitation.
12305 FB_O: I2 SC: TORQ HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
TORQMIN2
Signal of TORQUE/CURRENT LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Negative torque limit before external torque limitation.
12306 FB_O: I2 SC: TORQ HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
CURR_LIM_P
Signal of TORQUE/CURRENT LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Positive current limit for current contoller.
12307 FB_O: I2 SC:MCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
CURR_LIM_N
Signal of TORQUE/CURRENT LIMITATION-function block. ( S6/16 )
Negative current limit for current contoller.
12308 FB_O: I2 SC:MCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A

A 108
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 124: TORQUE REFERENCE CHAIN

SEL1:OUT
Signal of TORQ_REF_SELECTION-function block ( S6/16 )
Torque reference from torque reference chain .
12401 FB_O: I2 SC: TORQ HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
SEL2:OUT
Signal of TORQ_REF_HANDLING-function block ( S7/16 )
Torque reference after torque reference selector .
12402 FB_O: I2 SC: TORQ HL: - LL: - D: - U: %
SEL2:TORQ/SPEED
Signal of TORQ_REF_HANDLING-function block ( S7/16 )
An output indicating which control mode is active:
0 = speed control is active
-1 = torque control is active.
12403 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
SEL2:IN_LIM
Signal of TORQ_REF_HANDLING-function block ( S7/16 )
An output indicating that torque reference is in limit:
0 = reference between limits
-1 = reference has reached limit / is limited
12404 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 109
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 125: TASKS, CONSTANTS

CONSTANT 0
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which is always zero (FALSE).
12501 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 0 LL: 0 D: 0 U: -
CONSTANT -1
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which is always -1 (TRUE).
Can be connected to function block inputs (FB_I: B) which use BI scaling.
12502 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: -1 LL: -1 D: -1 U: -
CONSTANT 1
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which is always 1.
12503 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 1 LL: 1 D: 1 U: -
CONSTANT 2
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which is always 2.
12504 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 2 LL: 2 D: 2 U: -
CONSTANT 10
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which is always 10.
12505 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 10 LL: 10 D: 10 U: -
CONSTANT 100
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2;S16/16 )
Value which is always 100.
12506 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 100 LL: 100 D: 100 U: -
CONSTANT 1000
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which is always 1000.
12507 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 1000 LL: 1000 D: 1000 U: -
CONSTANT 31416
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which is always 31416.
12508 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 31416 LL: 31416 D: 31416 U: -
EMF: 100%
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which corresponds to nominal EMF = 3786.
12509 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 3786 LL: 3786 D: 3786 U: -
TORQ: 100%
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which corresponds to nominal positive torque = 4000.
12510 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 4000 LL: 4000 D: 4000 U: -
TORQ -100%
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which corresponds to nominal negative torque = -4000.
12511 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: -4000 LL: -4000 D: -4000 U: -

A 110
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

CUR,FLX,VLT 100%
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which corresponds to nominal positive current, flux and voltage = 4095.
12512 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 4095 LL: 4095 D: 4095 U: -
CUR,FLX,VLT -100%
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which corresponds to nominal negative current, flux and voltage = -4096.
12513 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: -4095 LL: -4095 D: -4096 U: -
SPEED: 100%
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which corresponds to nominal positive speed = 20000.
12514 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 20000 LL: 20000 D: 20000 U: -
SPEED: -100%
Signal of CONSTANTS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
Value which corresponds to nominal negative speed = -20000.
12515 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: -20000 LL: -20000 D: -20000 U: -
SIG1(SPEED REF)
Signal of FREE_SIGNALS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
This block is containing signals which can be set by the CMT or panel.
Value which can be used to give a speed reference. Before the drive will follow this
reference, it has to be connected to the speed reference input ERR.[IN] (2001).
12516 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 30000 LL: -30000 D: 0 U: -
SIG2(SPEED STEP)
Signal of FREE_SIGNALS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
This block is containing signals which can be set by the CMT or panel.
Value which can be used to give a speed step. Before the drive will follow this step, it has
to be connected to the speed step input ERR.[STEP] (2002).
12517 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 30000 LL: -30000 D: 0 U: -
SIG3(TORQ. REF A)
Signal of FREE_SIGNALS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
This block is containing signals which can be set by the CMT or panel.
Value which can be used to give a torque reference. Before the drive will follow this
reference, it has to be connected to the torque reference input SEL1.[TREF_A] (2401).
12518 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 30000 LL: -30000 D: 0 U: -
SIG4(TORQ. REF B)
Signal of FREE_SIGNALS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
This block is containing signals which can be set by the CMT or panel.
Value which can be used to give a torque reference. Before the drive will follow this
reference, it has to be connected to the torque reference input SEL1.[TREF_B] (2404).
12519 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 30000 LL: -30000 D: 0 U: -
SIG5(TORQUE STEP)
Signal of FREE_SIGNALS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
This block is containing signals which can be set by the CMT or panel.
Value which can be used to give a torque step. Before the drive will follow this step, it has
to be connected to the torque step input SEL2.[TORQ_STEP] (2409).
12520 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 30000 LL: -30000 D: 0 U: -

A 111
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

SIG6(LOAD SHARE)
Signal of FREE_SIGNALS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
This block is containing signals which can be set by the CMT or panel.
Value which can be used to give control load sharing in master/follower drives. Before the
drive will use this value, it has to be connected to the load sharing input
SEL1.[LOAD_SHARE] (2403).
12521 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 30000 LL: -30000 D: 4000 U: -
SIG7(FLUX REF)
Signal of FREE_SIGNALS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
This block is containing signals which can be set by the CMT or panel.
Value which can be used to give a flux reference. Before the drive will follow this
reference, it has to be connected to the flux reference input [FLUX_REF] (1002).
12522 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 30000 LL: -30000 D: 4095 U: -
SIG8(EMF REF)
Signal of FREE_SIGNALS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
This block is containing signals which can be set by the CMT or panel.
Value which can be used to give an emf reference. Before the drive will follow this
reference, it has to be connected to the emf reference input [EMF_REF] (1003).
12523 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 30000 LL: -30000 D: 3786 U: -
SIG9(FORCE FWD)
Signal of FREE_SIGNALS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
This block is containing signals which can be set by the CMT or panel.
Value which can be used to give a force command to field logic. Before the drive will
follow this command, it has to be connected to the force forward-input [F1_FORCE_FWD]
(1302).
12524 FB_O: B SC: - HL: 30000 LL: -30000 D: 0 U: -
SIG10(FORCE REV)
Signal of FREE_SIGNALS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
This block is containing signals which can be set by the CMT or panel.
Value which can be used to give a force command to field logic. Before the drive will
follow this command, it has to be connected to the force reverse-input [F1_FORCE_REV]
(1303).
12525 FB_O: B SC: - HL: 30000 LL: -30000 D: 0 U: -
SIG11(CURR. REF)
Signal of FREE_SIGNALS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
This block is containing signals which can be set by the CMT or panel.
Value which can be used to give a current reference. Before the drive will follow this
reference, it has to be connected to the current contoller input [CURR_REF] (402).
12526 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 30000 LL: -30000 D: 0 U: -
SIG12(CURR. STEP)
Signal of FREE_SIGNALS-function block ( S2,S16/16 )
This block is containing signals which can be set by the CMT or panel.
Value which can be used to give a current step. Before the drive will follow this step, it
has to be connected to the current contoller step input [CURR_STEP] (403).
12527 FB_O: I2 SC: - HL: 30000 LL: -30000 D: 0 U: -

A 112
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 126: FUNCTION BLOCKS 1

12601-12699: Signals for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 127: FUNCTION BLOCKS 2

12701-12799: Signals for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 128: FUNCTION BLOCKS 3

12801-12899: Signals for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 129: FUNCTION BLOCKS 4

12901-12999: Signals for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

Group 130: FUNCTION BLOCKS 5

13001-13013: Signals for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

A 113
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 135: DDCTool

STATUS_WORD
Signal of DDCTool interface. DCS 500 drive status word:
B0 reserved
B1 RDY ON 1=ready to close the contactor
B2 RDY RUN 1=ready to generate torque
B3 RUNNING 1=speed/torque control operating
B4 Auto-reclosing 1=A140 is activ
B5 FAULT 1=indication of a fault in DCS500
B6 ALARM 1=indication of an alarm in DCS500
B7 reserved
B8 reserved
B9 reserved
B10 reserved
B11 reserved
B12 reserved
B13 reserved
B14 Emergency stop 1=A102 is not activ, [EME_STOP](906)="0"
B15 Start inhibition 1=A101 is activ, [START_INHIBIT](908)="1"
13501 S: PB SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
LTIME
Signal of DDCTool interface.
DCS 500 time counter.
13502 S: I4 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
LDATE
Signal of DDCTool interface.
DCS 500 date counter.
13503 S: I4 SC: - HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 114
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 136: 12-PULSE-OPERATING

Conv.Curr.Slave
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
Converter current of the Slave; evaluated signal from input IACT_SLAVE (3604); scaling
as with the CONV_CUR_ACT (10501); operative only at that converter, which has got
Master functionallity
13601 FB_O: I2 SC: CCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
Arm.Curr.Slave
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
Motor current of the Slave; evaluated signal from input IACT_SLAVE (3604); scaling as
with the CONV_CUR_ACT_A (10502); operative only at that converter, which has got
Master functionallity
13602 FB_O: I2 SC: MCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
Conv.Curr.Both
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
Sum of converter currents (current of the Master and the Slave are added); evaluated
signal from input IACT_SLAVE (3604) and CONV_CUR_ACT (10501); scaling: half of
each current is added together, so that 100 % corresponds to twice of the single converter
current; operative only at Master
13603 FB_O: I2 SC: CCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
Arm.CURR.Both
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
Sum of motor currents (current of the Master and the Slave are added); evaluated signal
from inputs IACT_SLAVE (3604) and CONV_CUR_ACT_A (10502); scaling: half of each
current is added together, so that 100 % corresponds to the real motor current; operative
only at Master.
13604 FB_O: I2 SC: MCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
Curr.-Ref.1
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
The current reference in front of the current limiting block (ARM_CURR_LIM_P (415),
ARM_CURR_LIM_N (416)) at the CURRENT_CONTROL function block is outputted via
this signal. This signal is calculated at the MASTER and the SLAVE.
13605 FB_O: I2 SC: MCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
IREF1-Polarity
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
The sign of the current reference in front of the current limiting block (ARM_CURR_LIM_P
(415), ARM_CURR_LIM_N (416)) at the CURRENT_CONTROL function block is
outputted via this signal. This signal is calculated at the MASTER and the SLAVE.
Logic level: “0” = positive current / forward bridge.
13606 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
IREF1-Pol.Master
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
The sign of the current reference in front of the current limiting block (ARM_CURR_LIM_P
(415), ARM_CURR_LIM_N (416)) at the CURRENT_CONTROL function block of the
MASTER is outputted via this signal at the converter having SLAVE functionallity. Logic
level as before.
13607 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 115
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Curr.-Ref.2
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
The current reference at the output of the current limiting block (ARM_CURR_LIM_P
(415), ARM_CURR_LIM_N (416)) at the CURRENT_CONTROL function block is
outputted via this signal. This signal is calculated at the MASTER and the SLAVE.
13608 FB_O: I2 SC: MCURR HL: - LL: - D: - U: A
IREF2-Polarity
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
The sign of the current reference at the output of the current limiting block
(ARM_CURR_LIM_P (415), ARM_CURR_LIM_N (416)) at the CURRENT_CONTROL
function block is outputted via this signal. This signal is calculated at the MASTER and the
SLAVE.
Logic level: “0” = positive current / forward bridge.
13609 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
IREF2-Pol.Broth.
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
This signal is taken from the same point as signal IREF2-POLARITY and has therefor the
same definition. Before it is available as a signal, it is transferred to the other unit and
displayed there. So the converter with the MASTER function shows the logic level actually
used at the converter with the SLAVE function and vice versa.
13610 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
Bridge
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
This signal is a picture of signal 10402. It is calculated at the MASTER and the SLAVE.
With logic level 0 = Bridge 1 is active.
13611 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
Bridge of Slave
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
This signal is operative only in the MASTER and indicates which bridge is used by the
Slave.
Logic level: 0 = Bridge 1 active
13612 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
Indicat.Revers.
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
This signal indicates, if a bridge reversal takes place.
Logic level: -1 = bridge reversal running.
13613 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
Fault Reversion
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
This signal triggers Error 65.
13614 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
Fault Current
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
This signal triggers Error 66.
13615 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 116
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Logik f.INHIBIT
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
This signal is generated by the 12 pulse switch-off logic. In case this signal is used at the
12 pulse data exchange the converters will try to switch off each other in the event of an
error.
Based on the connection diagram this interconnection should be done:
- in case a 12 pulse system without redundancy is in use (see INHIBIT_LOGIC (3607)):
- connect this output to input START_INHIBIT (908) at both converters, Master and
Follower
- in case a 12 pulse system with redundancy is in use (see BC_LOGIC (3616)):
- don´t use this signal at both of the converters and keep START_INHIBIT (908) to
default or application dependent
13616 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
Input X18:13
Signal of INPUT X18-function block (S13/16 )
The signal passed to this pointer is outputted at Plug Connector X18:13. It is operative in
all modes. The interconnections recommended for the different 12 pulse modes are listed
at groupe 36.
13617 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
Input X18:14
Signal of INPUT X18-function block (S13/16 )
The signal passed to this pointer is outputted at Plug Connector X18:14. It is operative in
all modes. The interconnections recommended for the different 12 pulse modes are listed
at groupe 36.
13618 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
Input X18:15
Signal of INPUT X18-function block (S13/16 )
The signal passed to this pointer is outputted at Plug Connector X18:15. It is operative in
all modes. The interconnections recommended for the different 12 pulse modes are listed
at groupe 36.
13619 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
Input X18:16
Signal of INPUT X18-function block (S13/16 )
The signal passed to this pointer is outputted at Plug Connector X18:16. It is operative in
all modes. The interconnections recommended for the different 12 pulse modes are listed
at groupe 36.
13620 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
BC not Zero
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
Signal is set when signal BC (112-05) is different to 0 (Bit 5 of BC is not taken into
account!).
13621 FB_O: B SC: BO HL: - LL: - D: - U: -
Reserved f.Commun
Signal of 12-PULSE_LOGIC-function block (S13/16 )
This signal is already defined and used for future extensions.
13622 FB_O: I2 SC: 1 HL: - LL: - D: - U: -

A 117
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

Group 138: FUNCTION WINDER BLOCKS

13801-13819: Function for application winder
See winder data sheets.

Group 139: FUNCTION BLOCKS 10

13901-13912: Parameter for application function blocks
See application function block data sheets.

A 118
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

ALARM (S109-05), 86 COAST_STOP (P9-05), 27

ALARM_WORD_1 (S111-04), 90 COMFAULT_MODE (P9-20), 29
1 ALARM_WORD_2 (S111-05), 91 COMFAULT_TIMEOUT (P9-21), 29
12-Pulse Operating, 63, 115 ALARM_WORD_3 (S111-06), 91 COMM_FAULT (S109-15), 87
Alarms, 33, 89 COMMIS_STAT (S112-01), 93
Analog Inputs, 8, 74 CONST_REF.[ACT1] (P19-01), 49
A Analog Outputs, 12 CONST_REF.[ACT2] (P19-02), 49
AO1.[IN] (P2-01), 12 CONST_REF.[ACT3] (P19-03), 49
ACC_COMP.MODE (P17-18), 47 AO1_NOMINAL_V (P2-02), 12 CONST_REF.[ACT4] (P19-04), 49
ACC_COMP.TRMIN (P17-19), 47 AO1_NOMINAL_VAL (P2-04), 12 CONST_REF.DEF (P19-05), 49
ACCEL1 (P17-08), 46 AO1_OFFSET_V (P2-03), 12 CONST_REF.REF1 (P19-06), 49
ACCEL2 (P17-11), 46 AO2.[IN] (P2-05), 12 CONST_REF.REF2 (P19-07), 49
ACCELCOMP:OUT (S117-02), 102 AO2_NOMINAL_V (P2-06), 12 CONST_REF.REF3 (P19-08), 49
ACK_CONV_FAN (P9-10), 27 AO2_NOMINAL_VAL (P2-08), 12 CONST_REF.REF4 (P19-09, 49
ACK_MAIN_CONT (P9-12), 28 AO2_OFFSET_V (P2-07), 12 CONST_REF:ACT (S119-02), 104
ACK_MOTOR_FAN (P9-11), 28 Arm.CURR.Both (S136-04), 115 CONST_REF:OUT (S119-01), 104
ACT_BRAKE (P3-04), 14 Arm.Curr.Slave (S136-02), 115 CONSTANT_0 (S125-01), 110
ACTUAL VALUE 1 (P12-10), 37 ARM_ALPHA (S104-01), 79 CONSTANT_-1 (S125-02), 110
ACTUAL VALUE 2 (P12-11), 37 ARM_ALPHA_LIM_MAX (P4-12), 16 CONSTANT_1 (S125-03), 110
ADJ_REF1 (P36-15), 65 ARM_ALPHA_LIM_MIN (P4-13), 16 CONSTANT_10 (S125-05), 110
AI1:ERR (S101-06), 74 ARM_CONT_CURR_LIM (P4-09), 15 CONSTANT_100 (S125-06), 110
AI1:OUT- (S101-05), 74 ARM_CURR_ACT (S105-02), 80 CONSTANT_1000 (S125-07), 110
AI1:OUT+ (S101-04), 74 ARM_CURR_CLAMP (P4-17), 16 CONSTANT_2 (S125-04), 110
AI1_CONV_MODE (P1-04), 8 ARM_CURR_LIM_N (P23-08), 57 CONSTANT_31416 (S125-08), 110
AI1_HIGH_VALUE (P1-05), 8 ARM_CURR_LIM_N (P4-16), 16 Constants, 110
AI1_LOW_VALUE (P1-06), 8 ARM_CURR_LIM_P (P23-07), 57 Conv.Curr.Both (S136-03), 115
AI2:ERR (S101-09), 75 ARM_CURR_LIM_P (P4-15), 16 Conv.Curr.Slave (S136-01), 115
AI2:OUT- (S101-08), 74 ARM_CURR_PI_KP (P4-07), 15 CONV_CURR_ACT (S105-01), 80
AI2:OUT+ (S101-07), 74 ARM_CURR_PI_KP (P4-08), 15 CONV_TEMP_DELAY (P5-27), 22
AI2_CONV_MODE (P1-07), 9 ARM_CURR_REF (S104-05), 79 CONV_TYPE (S105-13), 81
AI2_HIGH_VALUE (P1-08), 9 ARM_CURR_REF_SLOPE (P4-06), Converter, 18, 80
AI2_LOW_VALUE (P1-09), 9 15 CUR,FLX,VLT_100% (S125-12), 111
AI3:ERR (S101-12), 75 ARM_DIR (S104-02), 79 CUR,FLX,VLT_-100% (S125-13), 111
AI3:OUT- (S101-11), 75 ARM_L (P4-10), 16 CUR_RIPPLE_LIM (P4-21), 17
AI3:OUT+ (S101-10), 75 ARM_OVERCURR_LEV (P5-12), 19 CUR_RIPPLE_MONIT (P4-20), 17
AI3_CONV_MODE (P1-10), 9 ARM_OVERVOLT_LEV (P5-11), 19 Curr.-Ref.1 (S136-05), 115
AI3_HIGH_VALUE (P1-11), 9 ARM_R (P4-11), 16 Curr.-Ref.2 (S136-08), 116
AI3_LOW_VALUE (P1-12), 9 AUTO-RECLOSING (S109-14), 87 CURR_ACT_FILT_TC (P5-23), 21
AI4:ERR (S101-15), 76 CURR_DER_IN_LIM (S104-04), 79
AI4:OUT- (S101-14), 75 CURR_LIM_N (S123-08), 108
AI4:OUT+ (S101-13), 75 B CURR_LIM_P (S123-07), 108
AI4_CONV_MODE (P1-13), 10 CURR_REF (P4-02), 15
AI4_HIGH_VALUE (P1-14), 10 BACKUPSTOREMODE (S112-02), 94
BC (S112-05), 95 CURR_REF_IN_LIM (S104-03), 79
AI4_LOW_VALUE (P1-15), 10 CURR_STEP] (P4-03), 15
AI5:ERR (S101-18), 76 BC not Zero (S136-21), 117
BC-Logic (P36-16), 66 CURRENT CONTROL, 15, 79
AI5:OUT- (S101-17), 76 CURRENT_RISE_MAX (P4-18), 16
AI5:OUT+ (S101-16), 76 BLOCK (P4-04), 15
AI5_CONV_MODE (P1-16), 10 BR_RELEASE (P3-02), 14
AI5_HIGH_VALUE (P1-17, 10 Brake Control, 14, 78 D
AI5_LOW_VALUE (P1-18), 10 BRAKE_RUN (S103-05), 78
AI6:ERR (S101-21), 76 Bridge (S136-11), 116 Data Logger, 23, 82
AI6:OUT- (S101-20), 76 Bridge of Slave (S136-12), 116 DATASET1.[OUT1] (S101-22), 76
AI6:OUT+ (S101-19), 76 Bridge_logic (P36-09), 64 DATASET1.[OUT2] (S101-23), 77
AI6_CONV_MODE (P1-19), 10 BRIDGE_TEMP (S105-07), 80 DATASET1.[OUT3] (S101-24), 77
AI6_HIGH_VALUE (P1-20), 10 DATASET2.[IN1] (P2-09), 12
DATASET2.[IN2] (P2-10), 12
AI6_LOW_VALUE (P1-21), 11 C DATASET2.[IN3] (P2-11), 12
AITAC:ERR (S101-03), 74
AITAC:OUT- (S101-02), 74 CMT_COM_ERRORS (S112-16), 97 DATASET3.[OUT1] (S101-25), 77
AITAC:OUT+ (S101-01), 74 CMT_DCS500_ADDR (P12-02), 36 DATASET3.[OUT2] (S101-26), 77
AITAC_CONV_MODE (P1-01), 8 CNT_BOOT_SW_VERSION (S112- DATASET3.[OUT3] (S101-27), 77
AITAC_HIGH_VALUE (P1-02), 8 19), 97 DATASET4.[IN1(P2-12), 13
AITAC_LOW_VALUE (P1-03), 8 CNT_SW_VERSION (S112-18), 97 DATASET4.[IN2] (P2-13), 13
DATASET4.[IN3] (P2-14), 13

A 119
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

DCF MODE (P12-15), 38 DO5.[INV_IN] (P8-10), 25 F1_U_LIM_P (P13-12), 40

DDCTool, 114 DO6.[IN] (P8-11), 25 F2_CURR_ACT (S115-02), 100
DECEL_CMND (S103-03), 78 DO6.[INV_IN] (P8-12), 25 F2_CURR_GT_MIN_L (P15-02), 43
DECEL1 (P17-09), 46 DO7.[IN] (P8-13), 26 F2_CURR_REF (S115-01), 100
DECEL2 (P17-12), 47 DO7.[INV_IN] (P8-14), 26 F2_CURR_TC (P15-04), 43
DI/OVP (P12-16), 38 DO8.[IN] (P8-15), 26 F2_KI (P15-06), 43
DI1:O1 (S107-01), 83 DO8.[INV_IN] (P8-16), 26 F2_KP (P15-05), 43
DI1:O2 (S107-02), 83 Drive Logic, 27, 86 F2_OVERCURR_L (P15-03), 43
DI10:O1 (S107-19), 84 DRIVE_ID (P12-03), 36 F2_RED.REF (P15-11), 44
DI10:O2 (S107-20), 84 DRIVEMODE (P12-01), 36 F2_RED.SEL (P15-10), 43
DI11:O1 (S107-21), 84 DXN (P4-14), 16 F2_REF (P15-01), 43
DI11:O2 (S107-22), 84 DYN_BRAKE_ON (S109-12), 87 F2_U_AC_DIFF_MAX (P15-07), 43
DI12:O1 (S107-23), 84 F2_U_LIM_N (P15-08), 43
DI12:O2 (S107-24), 84 F2_U_LIM_P (P15-09), 43
DI13:O1 (S107-25), 85 E FAN_ON (S109-08), 86
DI13:O2 (S107-26), 85 EARTH.CURR_SEL (P5-14), 20 FAULT (S109-04), 86
DI14:O1 (S107-27), 85 EARTH.FLT_DLY (P5-16), 20 Fault Current (S136-15), 116
DI14:O2 (S107-28), 85 EARTH.FLT_LEV (P5-15), 20 Fault Revision (S136-14), 116
DI15:O1 (S107-29), 85 EME_STOP (P9-06), 27 FAULT_WORD_1 (S111-01), 89
DI15:O2 (S107-30), 85 EME_STOP_MODE (P9-17), 28 FAULT_WORD_2 (S111-02), 89
DI2:O1 (S107-03), 83 EMESTOP_ACT (S109-07), 86 FAULT_WORD_3 (S111-03), 90
DI2:O2 (S107-04), 83 EMESTOP_BRAKE (P3-08), 14 Faults, 33, 89
DI3:O1 (S107-05), 83 EMESTOP_RAMP (P17-14), 47 FB Execution, 61
DI3:O2 (S107-06), 83 EMF Control, 30, 88 FB_APPL_ENABLE (P25-04), 61
DI4:O1 (S107-07), 83 EMF_100% (S125-09), 110 FB_TASK_LOCK (P25-05), 61
DI4:O2 (S107-08), 83 EMF_ACT (S105-06), 80 FEXC_SEL (P5-05), 19
DI5:O1 (S107-09), 83 EMF_FILT_TC (P5-13), 20 FEXC_STATUS (S112-03), 94
DI5:O2 (S107-10), 83 EMF_KI (P10-08), 31 FEXC1_CODE (S112-10), 96
DI6:O1 (S107-11), 83 EMF_KP (P10-07), 30 FEXC1_COM_ERRORS (S112-12),
DI6:O2 (S107-12), 84 EMF_REF (P10-03), 30 96
DI7:O1 (S107-13), 84 EMF_REF_SEL (P10-05), 30 FEXC1_COM_STATUS (S112-11), 96
DI7:O2 (S107-14), 84 EMF_REG_LIM_N (P10-10), 31 FEXC1_SW_VERSION (S112-20), 97
DI8:O1 (S107-15), 84 EMF_REG_LIM_P (P10-09), 31 FEXC2_CODE (S112-13), 96
DI8:O2 (S107-16), 84 EMF_REL_LEV (P10-11), 31 FEXC2_COM_ERRORS (S112-15),
DI9:O1 (S107-17), 84 ERR. [SPEED_ACT] (P20-21), 53 97
DI9:O2 (S107-18), 84 ERR.[IN] (P20-01), 52 FEXC2_COM_STATUS (S112-14), 96
DIFF_CURR_DELAY (P36-06), 64 ERR.[STEP] (P20-02), 52 FEXC2_SW_VERSION (S112-21), 97
DIFF_CURRENT (P36-05), 63 ERR.[WIN_MODE] (P20-03), 52 FIELD_CONST_1 (P10-13), 31
Digital Inputs, 83 ERR.FRS (P20-05), 52 FIELD_CONST_2 (P10-14), 31
Digital Outputs, 25 ERR.WIN_SIZE (P20-04), 52 FIELD_CONST_3 (P10-15), 31
DISABLE_LOCAL (P9-09), 27 ERR:OUT (S120-01), 105 FIELD_HEAT_SEL (P9-14), 28
DLOG.[IN1] (P6-01), 23 ERR:OUT_OF_WIN (S120-02), 105 FIELD_MODE (P10-01), 30
DLOG.[IN2] (P6-02), 23 ERR:STEP_RESP (S120-03), 105 FIELD_ON (S109-09), 86
DLOG.[IN3] (P6-03), 23 FIELD_WEAK_DELAY (P10-18), 32
DLOG.[IN4] (P6-04), 23 FIELD_WEAK_POINT (P10-12), 31
DLOG.[IN5] (P6-05), 23 F FIELDBUS NODE ADDR (P12-13), 37
DLOG.[IN6] (P6-06), 23 Fieldbus Parameter, 67
DLOG.[RESTART] (P6-13), 24 F_CURR_REF (S110-03), 88 FIELDBUS_PAR.1 (P40-01), 67
DLOG.[STOP] (P6-12), 24 F1_ACK (P13-04), 39 FIELDBUS_PAR.10 (P40-10), 72
DLOG.[TRIG] (P6-11), 24 F1_CURR_ACT (S113-02), 98 FIELDBUS_PAR.11 (P40-11), 72
DLOG.SAMPL_INT (P6-10), 23 F1_CURR_GT_MIN_L (P13-05), 39 FIELDBUS_PAR.12 (P40-12), 72
DLOG.TRIGG_COND (P6-07), 23 F1_CURR_MIN_TD (P13-21), 41 FIELDBUS_PAR.13 (P40-13), 73
DLOG.TRIGG_DELAY (P6-09), 23 F1_CURR_REF (S113-01), 98 FIELDBUS_PAR.14 (P40-14), 73
DLOG.TRIGG_VALUE (P6-08), 23 F1_CURR_TC (P13-07), 39 FIELDBUS_PAR.15 (P40-15), 73
DLOG_STATUS (S106-01), 82 F1_FORCE_FWD (P13-02), 39 FIELDBUS_PAR.2 (P40-02), 68
DO1.[IN] (P8-01), 25 F1_FORCE_REV (P13-03), 39 FIELDBUS_PAR.3 (P40-03), 68
DO1.[INV_IN] (P8-02), 25 F1_KI (P13-09), 39 FIELDBUS_PAR.4 (P40-04), 69
DO2.[IN] (P8-03), 25 F1_KP (P13-08), 39 FIELDBUS_PAR.5 (P40-05), 70
DO2.[INV_IN] (P8-04), 25 F1_OVERCURR_L (P13-06), 39 FIELDBUS_PAR.6 (P40-06), 70
DO3.[IN] (P8-05), 25 F1_RED.REF (P13-14), 40 FIELDBUS_PAR.7 (P40-07), 71
DO3.[INV_IN] (P8-06), 25 F1_RED.SEL (P13-13), 40 FIELDBUS_PAR.8 (P40-08), 71
DO4.[IN] (P8-07), 25 F1_REF (P13-01), 39 FIELDBUS_PAR.9 (P40-09), 72
DO4.[INV_IN] (P8-08), 25 F1_U_AC_DIFF_MAX (P13-10), 39 FLUX_REF (P10-02), 30
DO5.[IN] (P8-09), 25 F1_U_LIM_N (P13-11), 40 FLUX_REF_SEL (P10-04), 30

A 120
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

FLUX_REF_SUM (S110-02), 88 PERIOD_BTW_POT1/2 (P12-06), 36

FLUX_REF1 (S110-01), 88
M PHASE_SEQ_CW (P5-06), 19
FREV_DELAY (P36-03), 63 MACRO_SELECT(P12-14), 37 PLL_DEV_LIM (P5-28), 22
Function Blocks 1, 62, 113 MAIN_CONT_MODE (P9-15), 28 POT1_VALUE (P12-04), 36
Function Blocks 10, 66, 118 MAIN_CONT_ON (S109-10), 87 POT2_VALUE (P12-05), 36
Function Blocks 2, 62, 113 Maintenance, 36, 93 PROGRAM_LOAD (S112-22), 97
Function Blocks 3, 62, 113 MAX_BR_TEMP (S105-12), 81 PWR_DOWN_TIME (P5-10), 19
Function Blocks 4, 62, 113 MAX_CURR_LIM_N1 (P23-10), 58 PWR_LOSS_MODE (P9-19), 29
Function Blocks 5, 62, 113 MAX_CURR_LIM_N2 (P23-11), 58
Function Blocks 6, 62 MAX_CURR_LIM_N3 (P23-12), 58
Function Blocks 7, 62 MAX_CURR_LIM_N4 (P23-13), 58
Q
Function Blocks 8, 62 MAX_CURR_LIM_N5 (P23-14), 58 QUADR_TYPE (S105-14), 81
Function Blocks 9, 62 MAX_CURR_LIM_SPEED (P23-09),
Function Blocks Winder, 66 58
Function Winder Blocks, 118 MIN_SP_IND (P3-03), 14 R
MIN_SPEED (S122-01), 107
Ramp Generator, 46, 102
MIN_SPEED_L (P22-01), 55
G MODEL1.ALARM_L (P14-07), 42
RAMP.[FOLL_ACT] (P17-05), 46
RAMP.[FOLLOW_IN] (P17-04), 46
GEAR.START_TORQ (P23-15), 59 MODEL1.CURR (P14-06), 42
RAMP.[HOLD] (P17-03), 46
GEAR.TORQ_RAMP(P23-17), 59 MODEL1.SEL (P14-05), 42
RAMP.[IN] (P17-01), 46
GEAR.TORQ_TIME(P23-16), 59 MODEL1.TC (P14-09), 42
RAMP.[RES_IN] (P17-02), 46
GENER.EMF_REF (P10-16), 31 MODEL1.TRIP_L (P14-08), 42
RAMP.[RES_OUT] (P17-06), 46
GENER.WEAK_POINT (P10-17), 32 MODEL2.ALARM_L (P16-06), 45
RAMP.[SPEED_SET] (P17-20), 47
MODEL2.CURR (P16-05), 45
RAMP.[T1/T2] (P17-07), 46
MODEL2.SEL (P16-04), 45
H MODEL2.TC (P16-08), 45
RAMP:OUT (S117-01), 102
RAMP:SIGN (S117-03), 102
MODEL2.TRIP_L (P16-07), 45
HOLD_REF (P3-01), 14 RDY_ON (S109-01), 86
MON.EMF_V (P22-10), 56
HOLD_TORQ (P3-07), 14 RDY_RUNNING (S109-02), 86
MON.MEAS_LEV (P22-09), 55
REF_SEL:OUT (S119-03), 104
MOT1.[TEMP_IN] (P14-01), 42
REF_SUM.[IN1] (P18-01), 48
I MOT1.TEMP_ALARM_L (P14-02), 42
REF_SUM.[IN2] (P18-02), 48
MOT1.TEMP_FAULT_L (P14-03), 42
I_CONV_A (S105-09), 80 REF_SUM:OUT (S118-02, 103
MOT1_CALC_TEMP (S114-02), 99
I_MOT1_FIELDN_A] (P5-03), 18 REF_TYPE_SEL (P4-05), 15
MOT1_MEAS_TEMP (S114-01), 99
I_MOT2_FIELDN_A] (P5-04), 18 Reference Chain, 48, 103
MOT2.[TEMP_IN] (P16-01), 45
I_MOTN_A (P5-02), 18 Reference Sources, 49, 104
MOT2.TEMP_ALARM_L (P16-02), 45
I_TRIP_A (S105-10), 81 REFSEL.[ADD] (P19-16), 50
MOT2.TEMP_FAULT_L (P16-03), 45
IACT_SLAVE (P36-04), 63 REFSEL.[IN1] (P19-10), 49
MOT2_CALC_TEMP (S116-02), 101
Indicat.Revers. (S136-13), 116 REFSEL.[IN2] (P19-12), 50
MOT2_MEAS_TEMP (S116-01), 101
INHIB_Logic (P36-07), 64 REFSEL.[IN3] (P19-14), 50
Motor, 18, 80
IREF0_Logic (P36-08), 64 REFSEL.[REV] (P19-17), 50
Motor 1 Field, 39, 98
IREF1-Pol.Master (S136-07), 115 REFSEL.[SEL1] (P19-11), 49
Motor 1 Protection, 42, 99
IREF1-Polarity (S136-06), 115 REFSEL.[SEL2] (P19-13), 50
Motor 2 Field, 43, 100
IREF2-Pol.Broth. (S136-10), 116 REFSEL.[SEL3] (P19-15), 50
Motor 2 Protection, 45, 101
IREF2-Polarity (S136-09), 116 Reserved f.Commun (S136-22), 117
MOTOR_ACT (S109-13), 87
RESET (P9-07), 27
MOTOR2 (P9-13), 28
RESET_DCF (P109-17), 87
K REV.FLUX_TD (P13-20), 41

KLIXON_IN (P14-04), 42
O REV.REF_HYST (P13-19), 41
REV.REV_HYST (P13-18), 40
OFFSET_UDC (P5-26), 21 REV_DELAY (P36-01), 63
ON/OFF (P9-01), 27 REV_GAP (P36-02), 63
L OPERATING_HOURS (S111-09), 92 Reverse.Logic (P36-10), 64
LANGUAGE (P5-22), 21 OPTI.REF_GAIN (P13-15), 40 RUN_DCF (P109-16), 87
LATEST_ALARM (S111-08), 91 OPTI.REF_MIN_L (P13-16), 40 RUN1 (P9-02), 27
LATEST_FAULT (S111-07), 91 OPTI.REF_MIN_TD (P13-17), 40 RUN2 (P9-03), 27
LDATE (S135-03), 114 OVERSPEED (S122-04), 107 RUN3 (P9-04), 27
LIFT_BRAKE (S103-04), 78 OVERSPEEDLIMIT (P22-04), 55 RUNNING (S109-03), 86
LINE_FREQUENCY (S105-15), 81 OVP_SELECT (P12-17), 38
LOCAL (S109-06), 86
LOCAL_EMF_REF (P10-06), 30
S
LOCAL_SPEED_REF (S118-03), 103
P
SEL1.[LOAD_SHARE] (P24-03), 60
Logik f.INHIBIT (S136-16), 117 PANEL_BAD_CHAR (S112-17), 97 SEL1.[TREF_A] (P24-01), 60
LTIME (S135-02), 114 PANEL_DISC_MODE (P9-18), 29

A 121
 DCS500 Pin and Parameter list

SEL1.[TREF_B] (P24-04), 60 SPC_TORQ_MIN (P23-02), 57 TRIP_DC_BREAKER (S109-11), 87

SEL1.TREF_A_FTC (P24-02), 60 SPC_TORQMAX1 (S123-01), 108
SEL1.TREF_B_SLOPE (P24-05), 60 SPC_TORQMIN1 (S123-02), 108
SEL1:OUT (S124-01), 109 Speed Controller, 52, 105 U
SEL2.[TORQ_STEP] (P24-09), 60 Speed Measurement, 54, 106 U_ARM_ACT (S105-05), 7, 80
SEL2.[TREF_EXT] (P24-08), 60 Speed Monitor, 55, 107 U_CONV_V (S105-11), 81
SEL2.[TREF_SPC] (P24-07), 60 SPEED_100% (S125-14), 111 U_MOTN_V (P5-01), 6, 18
SEL2.TREF_SEL (P24-06), 60 SPEED_-100% (S125-15), 111 U_NET_ACT (S105-04), 80
SEL2:IN_LIM (S124-04), 109 SPEED_ACT (S121-02), 106 U_NET_DC_NOM_V (S105-08), 80
SEL2:OUT (S124-02), 109 SPEED_ACT_EMF (S121-01), 106 U_NET_MIN1 (P5-08), 19
SEL2:TORQ/SPEED (S124-03), 109 SPEED_ACT_FILT (S121-03), 106 U_NET_MIN2 (P5-09), 19
SELECT_OPER_SYST (P12-09), 37 SPEED_ACT_FILT_FTR (P21-05), 54 U_SUPPLY (P5-07), 19
SET_CONV_TYPE (P5-20), 21 SPEED_ACT_FTR (P21-04), 54 UNI_FILT_TC (P5-25), 21
SET_I_CONV_A (P5-17), 20 SPEED_GT_L1 (S122-02), 107 USER_EVENT1.[IN] (P11-01), 33
SET_MAX_BR_TEMP (P5-19), 20 SPEED_GT_L2 (S122-03), 107 USER_EVENT1.DLY (P11-04), 33
SET_QUADR_TYPE (P5-21), 21 SPEED_L1 (P22-02), 55 USER_EVENT1.TEXT (P11-03), 33
SET_U_CONV_V (P5-18), 20 SPEED_L2 (P22-03), 55 USER_EVENT1.TYPE (P11-02), 33
SIG1(SPEED_REF) (S125-16), 111 SPEED_MEAS_MODE (P21-02), 54 USER_EVENT2.[IN] (P11-05), 33
SIG10(FORCE_REV) (S125-25), 112 SPEED_REFERENCE (S118-01, 103 USER_EVENT2.DLY (P11-08), 33
SIG11(CURRENT_REF) (S125-26), SPEED_SCALING (P21-03), 54 USER_EVENT2.TEXT (P11-07), 33
112 SPEEDMAX (P17-15), 47 USER_EVENT2.TYPE (P11-06), 33
SIG12(CURRENT_STEP) (S125-27), SPEEDMIN (P17-16), 47 USER_EVENT3.[IN] (P11-09), 33
112 SQUARE_WAVE (S112-06), 95 USER_EVENT3.DLY (P11-12), 34
SIG2(SPEED_STEP) (S125-17), 111 STALL.SEL (P22-05), 55 USER_EVENT3.TEXT (P11-11), 34
SIG3(TORQUE_REF_A) (S125-18), STALL.SPEED (P22-06), 55 USER_EVENT3.TYPE (P11-10), 33
111 STALL.TIME (P22-08), 55 USER_EVENT4.[IN] (P11-13), 34
SIG4(TORQUE_REF_B) (S125-19), STALL.TORQUE (P22-07), 55 USER_EVENT4.DLY (P11-16), 34
111 START_DELAY (P3-05), 14 USER_EVENT4.TEXT (P11-15), 34
SIG5(TORQUE_STEP) (S125-20), START_INHIBIT (P9-08), 27 USER_EVENT4.TYPE (P11-14), 34
111 STARTSEL (P17-17), 47 USER_EVENT5.[IN] (P11-17), 34
SIG6(LOAD_SHARE) (S125-21), 112 STATUS_WORD (S135-01), 114 USER_EVENT5.DLY (P11-20), 34
SIG7(FLUX_REF) (S125-22), 112 STOP_DELAY (P3-06), 14 USER_EVENT5.TEXT (P11-19), 34
SIG8(EMF_REF) (S125-23), 112 STOP_MODE (P9-16), 28 USER_EVENT5.TYPE (P11-18), 34
SIG9(FORCE_FWD) (S125-24), 112 USER_EVENT6.[IN] (P11-21), 34
SMOOTH1 (P17-10), 46
SMOOTH2 (P17-13), 47 T USER_EVENT6.DLY (P11-24), 35
USER_EVENT6.TEXT (P11-23), 35
SOFT_POT:ACT (S119-05), 104 TACHO_PULSES (S121-04), 106 USER_EVENT6.TYPE (P11-22), 35
SOFT_POT:OUT (S119-04), 104 TACHOPULS_NR (P21-01), 54
SOFTPOT.[DECR] (P19-19), 50 TASK1_EXEC_ORDER (P25-01), 61
SOFTPOT.[ENABLE] (P19-23), 51 TASK2_EXEC_ORDER (P25-02), 61 W
SOFTPOT.[FOLLOW] (P19-20), 50 TASK3_EXEC_ORDER (P25-03), 61
SOFTPOT.[INCR] (P19-18), 50 Winder Parameter, 66
TC_STATUS (S112-04), 95 WRITE_ENABLE_KEY (P12-07), 37
SOFTPOT.OHL (P19-21), 50 TEST_REF (S112-07), 95
SOFTPOT.OLL (P19-22), 50 WRITE_ENABLE_PIN (P12-08), 37
TEST_REF_SEL (S112-09), 96
SPC.[BAL] (P20-08), 52 TEST_RELEASE (S112-08), 95
SPC.[BAL2] (P20-10), 52
SPC.[BAL2REF] (P20-11), 52
TORQ_100% (S125-10), 110 X
TORQ_-100% (S125-11), 110
SPC.[BALREF] (P20-09), 52 TORQ_MAX (P23-05), 57 X18
SPC.[HOLD] (P20-12), 53 TORQ_MIN (P23-06), 57 09 (P36-11), 64
SPC.[IN] (P20-06), 52 TORQ_REF (P4-01), 15 10 (P36-12), 65
SPC.[RINT] (P20-07), 52 TORQMAX2 (S123-05), 108 11 (P36-13), 65
SPC.DROOPING (P20-13), 53 TORQMIN2 (S123-06), 108 12 (P36-14), 65
SPC.KI (P20-18), 53 Torque and Current Limits, 57, 108 13 (S136-17), 117
SPC.KP (P20-14), 53 Torque Reference Chain, 60, 109 14 (S136-18), 117
SPC.KPSMIN (P20-15), 53 TORQUE_ACT (S105-03), 80 15 (S136-19), 117
SPC.KPSPOINT (P20-16), 53 TREF_ENABLE (S103-02), 78 16 (S136-20), 117
SPC.KPSWEAKFILT (P20-17), 53 TREF_OUT (S103-01), 78
SPC.TD (P20-19), 53 TREF_TORQ_MAX (P23-03), 57
SPC.TF (P20-20), 53 TREF_TORQ_MIN (P23-04), 57
Z
SPC:IN_LIM (S120-05), 105 TREF_TORQMAX1 (S123-03), 108 ZERO_CUR_DETECT (P4-19), 16
SPC:OUT (S120-04), 105 TREF_TORQMIN1 (S123-04), 108
SPC_TORQ_MAX (P23-01), 57

A 122
 Ident. No.: 3ADW 000 078 R0301 Rev C

ABB Automation Products GmbH

Postfach 1180
08_01

ABBLampertheim
D-68619 Industrietechnik GmbH
Tel: +49 (0) &62Automation
Drives 06-5 03-0
Postfach
Fax: +49 (0) 621180
06-5 03-6 09
D-68619 Lampertheim
www.abb.com/motors&drives  
Telephone: +49(0) 62 06-5 03-0 *078R0301A1310000*
Fax: +49(0) 62 06 5-03-6 09